The aim of the book is to provide enough shocking facts
about the manipulative practices of America's power elite, that readers
will be motivated (i.e., made angry enough) to take part in efforts to
bring the richest 1% under control, ...before they impoverish the planet
and destroy the biosphere.
The book presents overwhelming evidence that masquerading
behind a democratic facade, an economic elite comprising less than 1% of
the population is quietly and cunningly ruling America. Their immense
wealth and power enable them to exercise so much control over the
governmental process, that they effectively operate the country as a
Feudal oligarchy. The book will leave little doubt that Government has
been serving as a tool to subsidize and legitimize their exploitation of
national and international resources, while legislative tax changes have
left the nation with a Feudal wealth distribution system.
Presenting the evidence to substantiate this argument is not the
main reason the book was written. Documenting the methods used by
the elite to manipulate, control and exploit those with less money or
power is the real purpose. At least 80% of the book is devoted to
documenting their very effective methodology.
While it is evident that most people are somewhat aware that government
appears to cater to corporations and influential lobby groups, the average
taxpayer is practically oblivious to the extent to which the
wealthiest 1% directly and purposely control and manipulate the lives and
destinies of everyone else on the planet.
For those who have been brought up on a steady diet of the American
Dream, but notice that today's reality and the American Dream seem to be
growing further and further apart, it may be worth keeping in mind that if
a frog is placed in a pan full of cold water, and the heat is turned up
gradually enough, the frog will fail to sense the danger, and instead of
jumping to safety, it could quite unknowingly allow itself to be cooked.
In a similar fashion, the media continues to be used to desensitize and/or
misinform the general public into repeatedly accepting domestic and
foreign policies that are very often diametrically opposed to the best
interest of the majority.
While the average American does have "a vague idea" that corporations
(as well as the economic elite) use plenty of techniques for avoiding
taxation; how many know that the proportion of Federal Income tax derived
from Corporate income tax declined steadily from 32% in 1952; to 23% in
1960; to 17% in 1970; to a low of 9% in 1985? Without vital knowledge such
as this, the public will remain in the dark as to what is really causing
the decline in most Americans' standard of living. .
Although the growing deficit and the near trillion dollar banking
industry losses will inevitably lead to continuing cuts in the standard of
living for present and future generations, most Americans feel powerless
to alter their deteriorating economic conditions, and simply take
consolation in the belief that everyone else is also feeling the
pinch.
Nothing could be further from the truth !
Statistics taken from Forbes magazine's annual July survey of America's
billionaires expose the true reality. In 1982 there were 13 billionaires,
in 1983...15; in 1984...12; in 1985...13; in 1986...26; in 1987...49
In other words, the number of American billionaires had for many
years hovered around 13, then the Reagan administration drastically
altered the wealth distribution patterns by introducing tax changes
favoring the super rich. In 1986 the number of billionaires DOUBLED, and
by 1987 the number of billionaires had QUADRUPLED!! By 1988 there were
68 individuals or families that each had net wealth in excess of
$1,000,000,000. By 1989, the number had risen precipitously to 82. And by
1990, the Forbes survey reported the staggering total of 99!!
This explosion of wealth taking place at the top has occurred
and will continue to occur while waves of beggars flood onto the streets,
and thousands of farmers lose their farms. It is neither fate nor
coincidence that these events are occurring simultaneously. Tremendous
profits continue to flow into the bank accounts of the super rich even
during supposedly poor economic periods.
Unless facts such as these become "common knowledge", economic
Feudalism will continue to be an integral aspect of the status quo.
Why isn't the general public aware of these facts? Simply
because the richest 1% own virtually all of the media, and have little
difficulty controlling the content and coloration of television and
newspaper information reaching the public. The superficial and often
distorted picture of reality offered by newspapers and television's 30
second sound bites has traditionally contributed little to the exposure of
America's hidden reality. In no less a fashion, the major publishing
houses have, like a circle of protective elephants, provided a wall of
defense around the existing status quo and the elite who profit from it.
In short, Americans are being deceived and seduced into clinging to
unrealistic concepts served up through the mass media by the very people
who are exploiting the nation.
Facts that would have exposed the true nature of present day America
rarely get presented through newspapers or television. Instead, they
surface in magazines such as the Economist, Forbes, Fortune, Insight, and
The Wall Street Journal which are read almost exclusively by the economic
elite and their sympathizers. Moreover, the specialized economic jargon
and ever changing "buzzwords" used throughout these publications poses yet
another barrier preventing the published facts from becoming widely
appreciated.
Consequently, this book has been written to present the reader
with a comprehensive but seemingly radical perspective of America's hidden
reality, based on and supported by facts extracted almost exclusively
from the conservative, pro-establishment publications just mentioned.
This was done purposely to avoid arguments regarding the truth,
accuracy or bias of facts used throughout the book. Additionally, the
author attempted wherever possible to present both the perspectives and
the supporting facts in plain uncomplicated English so as to be accessible
to a broader spectrum of the general public.
The book could easily have been entitled "The Hoax of Democracy and
Equality in Western Society", because the world's economic elite have
taken control not only in America, but in virtually all the capitalist
democracies, England, Canada, Scotland, Ireland, West Germany, Israel,
South Africa, India, Australia, New Zealand, Japan, etc., as well as all
the other countries ruled by economically elite minorities.
However, because America chooses to be the flagship for democratic
capitalism, so she automatically deserves to be the focus of criticism as
well. Moreover, it has been the American elite who have pioneered many of
the social and constitutional controls that the economic elite of other
countries have imitated. Consequently, incidents were chosen from American
society to provide references and examples, although each of the other
countries could have served the purpose as well.
It is therefore the author's hope that the book will serve as a
catalyst to arouse true democratic power not only in America, but
throughout the so-called Western democracies, simply by outlining many of
the methods which the elite purposely use to manipulate society in order
to maintain their wealth and power (i.e., a Feudal society).
If and when Western citizens come to know even some of the facts
contained in this book, the outcry could be deafening. The shift of power
from the wealthy elite to the majority could come just as surprisingly and
as quickly as the shift of power away from the Communist elite occurred in
Russia.
The demand for true democracy, and a more equitable distribution of
wealth could dramatically alter humanity's destiny. A "New World Order"
could really take place.
As Victor Hugo once put it, "No army can withstand the strength of an
idea whose time has come", and the time has come.
Important additional note! The author would
like to remind the reader that although most of the incidents referred to
in the book occurred in the late 80s and early 90s (because that's when
the book was originally written), it would be no problem at all to choose
a comparable set of incidents taken from today's current events. In short,
we are always being manipulated and exploited with basically the same
methodology, so providing incidents (i.e., examples of a particular
exploitation method), at any point in time, to support the basic
arguments in the book would be relatively easy. It would simply entail a
repeat of the time and effort taken to collect the currently provided set
of supporting bibliographic references.
I have little doubt that readers will be able to supply their own
current references, ...and all too easily. This type of expose of
the elite's methodology needs to be written only once.
Chapter 1 The Hoax Of Equal Opportunity And Equitable
Prosperity
HOAX:
: to trick into believing or accepting or doing something : play
upon the credulity of ...so as to bring about belief in or
acceptance of what is actually false and often preposterous : take
in : DELUDE, DUPE,
MISLEAD, VICTIMIZE
The Hidden Social Order
(Part 1) The Society We Can SeeIn the 50's, the United States
appeared to hold the formula for prosperity. Her love affair with the
automobile soon caused homes to sprout two and three car garages, while
her industrial automation produced such a profusion of affordable consumer
goods that the growing prosperity enjoyed by the predominantly one income
families of America could best be described as an era of rampant
consumerism.
Television series like Father Knows Best and Leave It To
Beaver, among others, slowly but surely etched apple pie concepts of
America into the nation's psyche. Individually and collectively, Americans
began to expect and demand world recognition as the flagship of prosperity
and democratic freedom. National pride became the country's chief export.
To put it mildly, times have changed.
Escalating real estate prices and high rents have forced most families
to require two incomes just to get by, and the concept of home ownership
has been transformed from an expectation to little more than a pipe dream
for this generation's youth, who have very little money left over after
paying their rent.
With the advent of two working parents, the quality and nature of home
life progressively deteriorated to the extent that few children now enjoy
the luxury of growing up with only one set of parents. Broken homes and
single parents on welfare have become part of the norm.
In the workplace, computers, improved communications,
and automated manufacturing techniques have dramatically increased
efficiency and productivity; but unless you count yourself among the
richest 10%, your economic group has been relatively losing ground
steadily since the 50's despite all the technological breakthroughs. More
recently, across the board cuts in social programs have significantly
decreased the standard of living for the employed and unemployed alike.
Moreover, the widespread proliferation of street beggars, soup kitchens,
grocery handout centers, and flop houses for the homeless bears witness to
the fact that an American reality is shaping up that can no longer be
ignored. Educational opportunities are not being equitably
shared. Health resources are not being equitably shared.
Access to justice is not being equitably shared National
resources are not being equitably shared. In fact, the inequities
increase with each passing decade.
The hallowed buildings of the nation's capitol, that once echoed with
the visions of the original Founding Fathers, now bear witness to a
continuous parade of high level government officials forced to resign for
various abuses of public trust. The Founding Fathers would no doubt be
horrified to learn the extent to which drugs, violence and organized crime
have come to be an integral aspect of the American way of life. So much
so, that the deterioration of life in America is epitomized by
Washington DC itself. Not only has the nation's capital had to resort
to imposing a night-time curfew on all Washingtonians under 18, its mayor
is currently facing drug charges, and the city has also become the murder
capital of America!! {B1}
Legislative and constitutional changes favoring the most wealthy are
rapidly running the country into bankruptcy. In 1988 alone, 200 American
banks, and 226 Savings and Loan thrift institutions (S&Ls) failed, and
hundreds more are about to fail. The banking industry is on the verge of
collapse. Losses involving the S&L thrift institutions alone could
eventually cost the taxpayer up to 500 billion dollars. In addition, the
major U.S. banks are being secretly bailed out from their defaulting 3rd
World loans.
Continuing cuts in the standard of living for America's unborn loom
ominously. As a result, Americans are now beginning to reluctantly
acknowledge that the expectations of prosperity fueled by the American
Dream are no longer probable. The optimism of the 50's has been replaced
by widespread uncertainty concerning future economic well-being, and
rightly so.
Clearly, America of the 80's is radically different
from America of the 50's, yet most Americans still cling to concepts of
wealth distribution, democracy, and freedom of the press that echo the
ideals the American Dream of the 50's even though many of the concepts can
no longer be substantiated by present-day social realities. Socio-economic
changes occurring behind the scenes have drastically altered the nation's
destiny. A covert social order is in place and there is a 90% chance that
you are one of the chosen losers. Those who remain ignorant of what is
happening behind the scenes, will have to take it lying down. If you know
what is going on, you can fight back. Knowledge is power. Let's begin by
examining the hidden social order within America. The facts will probably
shock you.
(Part 2) The Hidden Wealth of the Richest 1%Including or
excluding the so called "couch potatoes", Americans take in more
information than they ever have. Newscasters such as Ted Koppel, Dan
Rather, Tom Brokaw, Robert McNeil, and Jim Lehrer are as well known to
this generation as Walter Cronkite was to previous generations. Not only
do people watch their favorite newscasters regularly, they read mountains
of newspapers and magazines as well.
Because the American media claims to be the freest in the world, few
have reason to suspect that their mass media information is being very
carefully controlled and colored. The shocking truth is that the American
public is being purposely kept in the dark about many vital realities. For
example are you aware that:
THE RICHEST 1 (ONE) PERCENT OF AMERICANS possess more wealth than
THE COMBINED WEALTH OF THE BOTTOM 90 (NINETY) PERCENT. {B2}
Despite how incorrect that statistic may first appear, there is
definitely no error or misprint involved. Not only that, the full
significance of the above statement is rather difficult to instantly
appreciate, so we'll take a moment more to consider its implications.
Because the richest 1% prefer to associate almost exclusively with
members of their own social and economic standing, few members of the
bottom 90% of Americans have ever even met a millionaire let alone a
billionaire.
Consequently if you belong to the bottom 90%, you can think of the
wealth of the richest 1% as : more wealth than the combined assets of
every American you have ever met, plus all the assets of every American
you would be likely to meet on a trip that took you through every single
city and town in the nation!!
If you haven't been thinking of the rich and their
wealth in quite that light, I suggest you begin to, because that
information is only the tip of the iceberg of information being actively
suppressed by the so-called freest media on the planet. Many references
will be made throughout the book to the bottom 90%, so it is appropriate
that we try to define the group a little more precisely.
Since the average person in the West considers himself or herself a
member of the middle class, logic as well as popular opinion would suggest
that half or more of the population fits into it. Initially then, let's
arbitrarily consider that American society is comprised of 60% middle
class, 20% lower class, and 20% upper class. Because the combined middle
and lower economic classes only account for 80% of the population, the
bottom 90% of society must also include half of the so-called upper class
as well! This means that the bottom 90% is comprised of:
1) Every member of the middle class 2) Every member of the
lower class 3) Half the members of the wealthy upper class
So now our original statistics can be interpreted to mean that:
THE RICHEST 1 (ONE) PERCENT of Americans own more wealth than:
1) ALL of the wealth of ALL of the MIDDLE class COMBINED
WITH 2) ALL of the wealth of ALL of the LOWER class AND ADDED TO
3) ALL of the wealth of the bottom HALF of the UPPER class
If you are surprised or shocked, don't feel bad. The elite have gone
out of their way to ensure that you didn't know it. Nevertheless, my
initial choice of (20%, 60%, and 20%) to represent the upper, middle, and
lower class population percentages was arbitrary, so if you think the
arbitrary percentage breakdown of society was at fault, I welcome you to
run your own idea of the class percentages through the preceding model. No
matter what figures you choose, the bottom 90% of society would still have
to include ALL of the lower class, plus ALL of the so called middle class,
plus a portion of the upper class. The staggering significance of the
wealth of the richest 1% will not alter. Go ahead and try it.
(Part 3) The Hidden Wealth of the Next Richest 9%Up to this
point, we have referred only to the richest 1% and the bottom 90%. However, sandwiched in between those two groups is another wealthy minority, "the next richest 9%". Let's now
find out how that group fares economically. You may be stunned to learn
that:
THE NEXT RICHEST 9 (NINE) PERCENT also possess more wealth than
THE COMBINED WEALTH OF THE BOTTOM 90(NINETY)PERCENT
As unbelievable as it sounds, there are two minority groups, not just
one, that own more assets than the bottom 90%. These two statistics alone
should leave little doubt that the bulk of the wealth in America is owned
by a very small minority of super rich individuals. This reality contrasts
so drastically with the "equal opportunity", "equal prosperity" concepts
fed to the bottom 90% and the world at large, that statistics such as
these have had to be suppressed. Again, there is no misprint. The only
deceit involved is that the bottom 90% have been purposely kept in the
dark about wealth distribution realities.
(Part 4) Hidden Permanent Prosperity For The RichIf you were
unaware of the severity of wealth distribution inequities, then you are
probably in for an even bigger surprise to learn that the rate, at which
the economic elite are getting richer, is simply astounding.
Statistics published in Forbes magazine's annual survey of America's
billionaires expose this little known but shocking reality. In 1982
there were 13 billionaires; in 1983....15; in 1984....12; in 1985....13;
in 1986....26; in 1987....49. Note carefully that prior to 1986 the
number of American billionaires had averaged around 13. Then the Reagan
administration drastically altered the wealth distribution patterns by
introducing new tax legislation favoring the top 1%. In 1986 the
number of billionaires DOUBLED, and by 1987 the number of billionaires had
virtually QUADRUPLED to 49!! By 1988, there were 68 individuals or
families that each had net wealth in excess of $1,000,000,000. By 1989,
the number had risen precipitously to 82. And by 1990, the Forbes survey
reported the staggering total of 99!! {B3} With favorable tax
laws in place, the super rich can enjoy bonanza years even during
recessions!! The tax laws that allowed this to happen are still in
place, and will remain in place till enough people get sufficiently
concerned to insist that they be changed. What should cause the
American people to sit up and take notice, once and for all, is the fact
that this explosion of wealth took place during a period when:
- 1. The stock market crashed harder than in 1929.
- 2. Hundreds of American banks and Savings and Loan thrift
institutions declared bankruptcy and saddled the taxpayer with a debt to
pay that may ultimately exceed $500 billion dollars.
- 3. Thousands of farmers lost farms that had been in the their
families for generations.
- 4. Millions lost their jobs.
- 5. Wage earners were having to take massive pay cuts and reductions
to their benefits.
- 6. Social programs and health and education programs were being
drastically cut back or terminated.
- 7. Waves of pan-handlers were flooding onto the streets.
- 8. Shelters for the homeless, and grocery handout centers were
springing up like mushrooms in practically every city throughout the
nation.
It should not take an Einstein to observe that equal
opportunity, and equitable prosperity is an outright hoax for all but a
small minority. Unlike Britain, France, and Germany which can point to
their Feudal pasts to explain their existing wealth distribution
inequities, America can point to no such excuse! The American economic
elite have established Feudal wealth distribution inequities equal to, and
even surpassing their European counterparts (the monarchs and the landed
aristocracy), in just 200 years!! We have been brainwashed into
believing that the super rich are so few in number that they and their
wealth can be safely ignored. In reality, they directly and significantly
affect everyone else's standard of living, and will continue to do so as
long as their power and influence remain unrecognized, and unchallenged.
This explosion of wealth for America's super rich has immense significance
not only for society as a whole, but especially for the bottom 90%.
Many of those in the bottom 90% who accepted pay cuts and decreases to
their employment benefits, did so because they had been led to believe
that everyone else was also feeling the pinch. Nothing could be further
from the truth. What is being successfully hidden from public
awareness is the fact that the widening gap between the haves and the
have-nots is an ongoing process, and one which is running even now at
full throttle. The extent to which the bottom 90% are being successfully
deceived can be made more obvious by noting just how the current economic
bad times are affecting American billionaires. A good example, but not
necessarily a typical one, is Sam Walton and family, who increased their
wealth by $2,300,000,000 (from $6.7 billion to approximately $9 billion),
in a twelve month period, from the time Fortune magazine took their
1988 survey, to the time they took their 1989 survey. For those who
believe that the rich pay high taxes, Sam's pre-tax profits had to have
been considerably higher than $2.3 billion. Even a 25% tax rate would put
his pre-tax profits in excess of $3,000,000,000 for a 12 month period!!!
If you think that movie theater prices are exorbitant, or feel that
"pay TV" prices are unreasonable, then perhaps you ought to have a word
with Mr. Sumner Murray Redstone whose fortune increased by $1,480,000,000
(from $1.4 billion to a hair under $3 billion) in the same twelve month
period. His name surfaces attached to entities like Twentieth Century Fox,
Columbia Pictures, MGM/United Artists, or "pay TV" entities such as
Showtime, The Movie Channel, and MTV. Fortune magazine's own comment was:
"That's a compound annual rate of return of about 132%". Or perhaps
you would liked to have purchased a cellular telephone, but found them too
expensive? Try talking Mr. John Werner Kluge into taking less profit.
After all, his wealth increased by a cool $2,000,000,000 ($2 Billion) just
last year.{B4} For those unused to thinking in terms of
hundreds of millions, not to speak of billions, let's take a moment to
digest the significance of this magnitude of wealth. To begin with, a
simple 10 percent interest on just one billion dollars amounts to
$100,000,000 (one hundred million dollars) in interest alone per year.
From a working person's perspective, it would take 100 lifetimes, (of 40
working years each), for a person earning $25,000 per year to earn the
amount of income each of our billionaires can earn in interest,
per billion, per year. (without lifting a finger) Who pays for
these previously mentioned profits? You of course, through an
unnecessarily high cost of living (high cost of goods and services, high
bank interest rates and inflated real estate prices, etc.). It is
worth keeping in mind that before families like the Carnegies,
Rockefellers, Morgans, Vanderbilts, and others of similar ilk used PR
campaigns and some supposedly philanthropic donations to help convince
Americans of their social nobility, they were commonly known as "robber
barons". Consequently, it should come as no surprise that in recognition
of the widespread use of tax-deductible methods of purchasing civic
respectability, Ralph Waldo Emerson defined a philanthropist as a man who
gives away what he should be giving back. In short, fantastic wealth
is being generated virtually all the time, but the bulk of it is being
skimmed off by the wealthy while the working class are kept on a
relatively minimum standard of living to help fuel the illusion of ongoing
hard-times. To avoid showing the rest of the nation the amount of
money they have managed to amass, and to further avoid paying taxes, some
of their corporations are registered in out of the way playboy tax havens
like the Bahamas. In addition, they keep much of their money in specially
numbered secret bank accounts (no questions asked, no information given),
in countries such as the Bahamas, Switzerland, or Liechtenstein, whose
banking communities have grown fat by obligingly taking on the role of
laundering and safely storing secret treasures for some of the world's
wealthiest thieves and criminals. In fact, the August 21 1989 issue of
Insight magazine fully exposed just how cheaply and easily a money
laundering network can be set up.{B5} People who work from nine to
five everyday don't have the time to waste thinking about the activities
of these jet setters and playboys. Because of economic segregation, most
nine to fivers have never even met such a person. Quite often the elite
have their own jets, and seek obscurity behind tinted limousine windows.
For the most part, the elite who rule America from behind the scenes,
purposely go out of their way to maintain extremely low profiles. Why?
Because neither their fortunes nor their business transactions would stand
up well to public scrutiny. Media owners, who belong to the richest
echelons of our society, cooperate with their peers to ensure that their
profiles remain as low as they wish. Laws that were supposedly enacted to
protect the privacy of individuals, have certainly served the purpose of
keeping the general public largely ignorant of the shocking realities of
wealth distribution inequities. In effect, the economic elite are
effectively making fools of 90% of society's so-called equals. Not
surprisingly, their lobbying power has ensured that inheritance laws allow
fortunes to remain virtually intact from generation to generation.
(Part 5) Subsistence for the Working ClassThe old Feudal system
based on economic and social class discrimination, which was supposedly
left behind centuries ago, has in fact not gone away. It has only been
made to appear as if it had. For example, from poor humble beginnings in
servile poverty, the feudal serf rose phoenix-like to a minimum wage
which now allows him to afford a standard of living just under the poverty
level. American society has plenty of them, and their numbers are growing
all the time. The Census Bureau acknowledges not only that 32.5 million
Americans are living below the poverty level, but that less than a third
receive welfare assistance! {B6} Perhaps the most tragic aspect of
all is that in 1986, two million adults who lived below the poverty level
held full-time jobs!! {B7} Can any ethical government expect its
citizens to spend 40 hours a week working to earn a living BELOW the
poverty level? Surely, this is an insult to human dignity. Back in 1981, a
full 36% of workers paid on an hourly basis received the minimum wage, or
within a dollar of the minimum wage!! {B8} The hardest hit are
America's youth. Since 1973, the poverty rate for the under-30 group has
nearly doubled to 22%. {B9}
Those working in a restaurant for minimum wage sometimes get to take
home some of the leftovers, but if they make beds and empty urinals in a
hospital, they probably couldn't afford to catch anything from the people
they work around. Why? Because they would have to work for at least three
weeks to pay for a single day's hospitalization. Medicare costs have risen
an average of 8.5% per year since 1984. {B10} By 1987, more than 11
million children had no health insurance. {B11} What makes the
situation even more shameful is that of the 37 million Americans who
entered the 1990's with no medical coverage, the majority were employed!
{B12} The fact that health care is becoming an unaffordable luxury
in America is made more evident when one becomes aware that America ranks
20th in infant mortality behind Spain and Singapore. The shocking truth is
that almost 40,000 of the 3.8 million children born in America in 1986
died before their first birthday!! {B13} Moreover, on any given
night in America, there are approximately 100,000 homeless children.
{B14} This figure may be seriously understated because a group of
San Francisco lawyers known as "Public Advocates" estimate that in the San
Francisco area alone there are 48,000 homeless and that more than 10,000
of that number are children. Why so many homeless? Simply because
Capitalism practically demands homelessness. The self-regulating market
forces of supply and demand, that America so proudly markets to the world,
dictate that builders have little or no incentive to build housing for
people with little or no money, but plenty of incentive to build more
office space for wealthy corporations despite the fact that 100,000
homeless American children are growing up socially and economically
deprived in a country which has had a nationwide office space vacancy rate
of 18% for the last five years!!! In Manhattan for example, 8.9 million
additional square feet of newly completed office space came on-line last
year, but only 2.5 million square feet of it was rented. {B15}
Another cause of the homelessness can be traced back to unemployment.
Unemployment (Exported Jobs, Imported Cheap Labor)The root causes
are extremely important, and to appreciate them let's think back to the
50's once more. Back then prosperity seemed within everyone's reach. Homes
were beginning to sprout two car garages, and practically everyone's
standard of living was on the rise. Here's what changed all that.
The prosperity of the 50's that generated and fueled the American
Dream, occurred because American corporations were employing
American workers. Now, they hire the 3rd World.
Because the American economy was booming at that time, and much money
was being made, organized labor began to demand a fairer share of the
prosperity. American corporations reacted by shutting down their American
plants, and building their non-military related factories and
manufacturing installations in Second and Third World countries. Tax
legislation allowed the elite to write off the costs of building
their factories abroad. In effect, taxpayers have paid for virtually all
the American owned factories abroad! By doing so, the corporations were
not only robbing North America of much needed employment opportunities,
but were simultaneously exploiting the cheap labor and natural resources
of poorer nations in the latest version of colonial exploitation. American
corporations still help white South Africans to exploit and repress the
blacks.
Moreover, the success of the anti-apartheid movement, since the 50's,
displeased many of the corporate elite because they knew that eventually
even the blacks would belong to organized labor groups, and that the days
of cheap black labor were obviously numbered. This
development greatly accelerated the practice of shutting down factories
and industries in America and rebuilding them in Third World countries to
take advantage of the remaining pools of cheap unorganized labor. The
industrial exodus caused such a shortage of jobs for unskilled and
semi-skilled men, that more and more women were obliged to enter the work
force to enable families to cope economically. On average, women have been
paid from 65%-70% of what men earn for the same job. {B16} Today,
employers are still trying to discriminate against women, with regard to
salary equality and career opportunities, in an effort to keep women as a
cheaper source of labor than men.
Newsweek pointed out in its March 13 1989 issue, there are now about
140 million Americans between the ages of 20 to 64, and a staggering 30
million of these individuals are unemployed! {B17} But, just as the
government hides much of its deficit "off budget", so it has ways of
excluding many of the unemployed from its official figures. Those who have
quite literally given up looking for work don't even get included in the
government's seasonally adjusted unemployment figures, so the true picture
of reality remains hidden. For political expediency, unemployment figures
can be deceivingly and artificially reduced when required, at taxpayer
expense again, through "make work" programs. Nevertheless, jobs are being
constantly exported. According to Department of Labor statistics, the
blue-collar factory work force decreased by 11% in the last decade alone.
{B18}
General Motors provides an excellent example of a corporation which
deserted the American work force for cheap labor abroad. The current movie
"Roger and Me", which deals with the after effects of General Motors
laying off over 32,000 employees in Flint Michigan, should help to draw
attention to the problem. {B19}
The American textile industry is currently in the process of relocating
to places like South Korea where the cost of skilled garment industry
workers is about $2.50 per hour, which is less than the American minimum
wage.
General Electric too is preparing a deal to buy 50% (plus one share) of
Tungsram, an Hungarian manufacturer of light bulbs. With Hungary's average
wage at 81 cents per hour, G.E.'s loyalty to the American work force will
pan out to be just another of the illusions that Americans must shed.
Chicago-based Schwinn Bicycle Co., and Guardian Industries, a
Michigan-based glassmaker have already taken the plunge.
With the widespread demand in Eastern European countries like Poland,
Hungary, and Czechoslovakia for a taste of capitalism, it won't be long
before we begin importing name brand bicycles, fridges, etc., instead of
employing Americans to make them. The rush to do so will most likely
intensify before the unification of Western Europe takes place in 1992. In
Poland, the cost of labor is even cheaper, a mere $40 per month.
{B20} However, Americans should keep in mind that where wages are
low, cost of living is usually correspondingly lower. In other words,
Poles don't have to fork out $300-$500 per month in rent.
In 1988 alone, spending by overseas subsidiaries of American firms
increased by 23% to $42.3 billion. {B21}
Not only were the taxpayers footing the bill, lower labor rates gave
them higher profits. On top of that, the elite were often able to
negotiate tax advantages with the foreign countries, so all in all, it has
been a case of "to hell with the American work force".
The economic elite have such a strong control over public opinion and
government in the West, that they knew they could virtually abandon their
own populations, and allow the standard of living to deteriorate
because the desirability of Communism and even Socialism has already
been virtually purged out of the psyche of the Western mind. However,
the elite know they will have to put up with a growing amount of
grumbling. But because they control the government and the media, they
will safely be able to allow the standard of living in America to
gradually drop to the point that it approaches the rising standard of
living among the developing nations.
Another method the elite have been using to maintain a downward
pressure on American wages has been to make sure that almost all
immigrants coming to America come from the cheap labor countries. Even
though practically all the immigrants now coming to America fit this
description, there is a push on to accelerate this process.
Despite the existence of 30 million eligible unemployed Americans, the
Deputy Editor in chief of Forbes magazine, M.S. Forbes Jr., editorialized
in the Jan 8 1990 edition that the nation was actually suffering from a
"People shortage". He went on to add that, "There are not enough young
people entering the labor force. We badly need to revamp our immigration
laws so that many more hardworking foreigners from Europe and
elsewhere can come here."{B22} Not surprisingly, an article also
appeared in the Jan 29 1990 issue of Fortune magazine entitled "Let's
change the immigration law - now". The article started out by saying
"Millions of Eastern Europeans and Soviets - educated and talented for the
most part - are likely to try to start fresh lives in the West..." The
latter article also clearly pointed out that in the last decade, the
greatest number of immigrants to America have been ...Mexicans, then
Asians, and then immigrants from Central and South America. These people
enter the country desperate for jobs and willing to take minimum wage
payment for ever increasing levels of skilled work. Of course they are not
to be blamed for driving down the cost of labor nation-wide, it is the
elite who are purposely pushing to change the existing laws to be able to
flood the American labor market with even cheaper labor from Romania,
Hungary, etc. (who by the way have received better education on average
than their equivalents in America). {B23}
Where do all the homeless come from? At least part of the 30 million
unemployed and disillusioned Americans between the ages of 20 and 64 would
probably sooner be unemployed than work for a humiliating and disgraceful
minimum wage, while the white collared elite drive the streets in their
Rolls Royces having milked the economy of hundred of millions and even
billions in a single year!!!
Despite this, on June 13 1989, George Bush hastily vetoed Congress's
bill to raise the minimum wage from $3.35 to $4.55 over a three year
period. {B24} Mrs. Dole, Bush's labor secretary, argued on behalf
of the elite that doing so would result in 650,000 fewer jobs. This
obviously implies that spoiled employers would sooner fire 650,000
employees than pay them a minimum wage of $4.55 per hour. To compensate
for this, she is also trying to introduce a compulsory six-month "training
period" during which the "new hire" would receive sub-minimum wage!!
However, this would only provide incentive for employers to dismiss their
minimum wage workers and use wherever possible the sub-minimum wage
"new hires in training". Some employers would retire long before they kept
a candidate longer than six months. {B25}
In future, semi-skilled and skilled factory work will be done
increasingly by robots, by cheaper labor abroad, or by importing cheap
labor from abroad. As long as corporate America
continues it's industrial expansion abroad while reducing it's industrial
base at home, unemployment will only get worse. With a shortage of jobs,
and an over-abundance of labor, employers will continue to hire
unorganized labor who are willing to work for substandard wages. Should
anyone wonder why so many youths have given up on the system and turned to
pushing drugs to survive? No doubt the elite would wish to have all
the new immigrants enrolled immediately in sub-minimum wage training
programs. Notch one up for the "Feudalists in pinstripes".
Incentive for corporate America to purchase American labor will
probably only resume again when the price of American labor drops to the
point that it competes favorably with the cost of the cheapest foreign or
imported labor.
American Slavery in the 1990'sThe exploitation of blacks in
America is still evident from the fact that there was a higher ratio of
blacks to whites in military service in Vietnam, than the normal ratio of
blacks to whites in the population. In many states the infant mortality
rate for non-whites is often double the rate for white infants.
{B26}
In a similar way, the black to white ratios involved with unemployment
figures reveal as much about the truth concerning our whitewashed reality.
Only 44 of the 752 Federal judges are black. The number would be abysmally
lower if Jimmy Carter had not nominated 37 of them himself. {B27}
More importantly, blacks account for 11% of America's voters, but only one
and a half percent of its elected officials are black. {B28}
Meanwhile, David Duke, the former Imperial Wizard of the Ku Klux Klan,
who also dabbles in neo-Nazi white supremacy movements, not only ran in
February 1989 as a Republican candidate in New Orleans, Louisiana; he
won!! His goal now is to become a Louisiana senator. {B29}
But hey, it's not all doom and gloom. American blacks have definitely
made progress over their counterparts in South Africa, whose lot seems to
have remained on a par with that of English feudal serfs. Mind you, they
are still confined to the servants' quarters, which are now called
"homelands".
"Homelands", per se, don't exist in America, but many who live in the
black ghettoes found in most American cities, would probably wish to hotly
debate that issue. In any case, since the 50's, much of the discrimination
practiced against the blacks has disappeared. Nevertheless, feudal slave tactics still persist within the
United States, but are largely overlooked because the American psyche has
been conditioned to acknowledge slavery only when it comes in
black.
Industries in Texas and Southern California have been paying slave
wages for decades to Mexicans who had entered the country illegally. The
garment industry in Southern California was still thriving in the 1980's
by running sweat shops which used this labor pool. These Mexicans have
been completely at the mercy of their modern Feudal lords who could
totally abuse them, fire them, or have them deported if they dared to
protest about their wages or working conditions.
Everyone knew about the sweat shops but little was done about them,
because all the right palms had been greased. Everyone was turning a blind
eye until the 60 Minutes TV show brought their plight to the
nation's awareness. The government was no longer able to turn a blind eye,
so it provided the next best concession for the sweat shop owners, it
offered conditional amnesty to the Mexicans who were already living in the
States, so that the affected industries would not be put out of business
by the sudden loss of its sizable work force.
Of course this meant that sweat shop owners would have to pay the newly
legalized Mexicans the minimum wage, and it certainly defused the issue
nationally, but it probably won't prevent them from hiring future illegal
Mexicans at the old rates. In fact a few days after George Bush had
returned the Republicans to office, legislation was passed to allow
garment industry workers in the South West to work at home. This
practice, which will throw open the slavery floodgates once more, had been
outlawed for the last 40 years.
Ever since the serf gained the right to be called a free man, the
wealthiest 1 percent have been using the time to regain ground initially
lost. They seem more determined than ever to maintain the old order. One
way of doing this is to purposely maintain a poorly educated work force.
Maintaining a Poorly Educated Work ForceIt has been argued that
if all the wealth of our billionaires were equally redistributed among the
poorer classes, ...within a short time, the wealth would again be
concentrated within the hands of the few. I would even tend to agree with
that hypothesis. However, if the money were used to provide free education
for all students, to the limits of their mental abilities, I would be
reluctant to jump to the same conclusion. The scenario parallels the
futility of providing only food to the starving 3rd world peoples, as
opposed to providing them with the education and means to provide their
own food.
EDUCATION BRINGS WITH IT FREEDOM AND POWER.
The minority of white South Africans, who dominate, not only prevent
the blacks from forming effective opposition groups, they keep them poorly
educated and deny them the right to vote. As a result, South African
unskilled labor has historically remained cheap. Capitalists in other
countries have also gone out of their way to maintain an ignorant working
class. For example, there was an understood, unwritten agreement among
early American feudal lords, not to teach their black servants, (slaves)
to read or write; in South Africa there have even been laws to enforce the
policy. Nowadays, survey after survey exposes that American schools are
graduating functional illiterates. Because the level of education is
rising in many less developed countries, corporate America is finding that
it can relocate even more sophisticated levels of non-military related
industrialization into Second and Third World countries to take advantage
of the world's remaining slave labor pools. Consequently the elite have
less need of educating the American work force, and have stepped up
their lobbying pressure to divert tax dollars away from education, and
into other areas that benefit themselves more, namely Star Wars military
spending, and corporate welfare. Unlike the defense budget, federal
spending on education has been reduced from 9% in 1980, to 6% now. Mr.
Bush intends to spend some $200 million less on education than did Mr.
Reagan. {B30} After all, educated people expect a better standard
of living, and will be vocal if denied their due. In short, they are not
as easy to manage or to hoodwink.
Is it an accident that the American education system is graduating
functional illiterates, and that much needed money for education is being
diverted to benefit the super-rich? I think not.
Before the nation is forced to declare evening curfews (for youths 18
and under) in cities other than Washington DC, two facts should be
widely acknowledged. First that two-thirds of U.S. prison inmates are high
school dropouts, and secondly, that it costs $5000 per year to send a
child through public school, and $14,000 a year to keep a prisoner in
jail. {B31}
The Reality Underlying the Myth of EqualityThe previously
mentioned socially regressive behavior involving physical and economic
slavery in its various forms only persists because there are some among us
who cannot accept the concept of equality and brotherhood. Instead
they choose to take as much of the nation's wealth as they can possibly
get away with, even though other peoples' basic needs are not being met.
Even though most of us are richer than serfs of some other countries,
we are still serfs within our own society.
- When I see beggars on the streets, I see serfs.
- When I see lineups for grocery handouts, I see serfs.
- When I see people who can't afford dental, medical, or legal
services, I see serfs.
- When I see heads of households who are involuntarily unemployed, I
see serfs.
- When I see workers on minimum wage, I see serfs
- When I see working people who can't afford to buy a home, I see
serfs.
- When I see families who still don't own their homes after 20 years
of payments, I see serfs.
The bottom 90% have been sold, and
continue to be sold a severely distorted image of America through the
media. The image of themselves as a huge middle class simply does not
concur with reality. To assist in the illusion, the bottom 90% have
been encouraged to believe that doctors, dentists, engineers, etc.,
comprise the "upper class". Not surprisingly, working professionals have
also been encouraged to think of themselves as the upper class. The fact
of the matter is that these working professionals statistically fall into
the bottom 90% of society. They may be, relatively speaking, upper class
compared to the non-professionals, but in the overall wealth distribution
picture, they are still "working class" when compared to the "real upper
economic class". The average person who belongs to the bottom 90%,
professional and non-professional alike, needn't blame himself or herself
for missing the boat, because the economic elite of former generations
used their power and influence to set up a complex system whereby just
enough wealth is doled out using tax laws and tax shelters to produce just
enough YUPPIES and comfortably off people (like many of our "so-called
upper class" doctors, engineers, etc.,), to keep alive the totally
erroneous notion that these individuals constitute the upper economic
class. The secret, completely understood by the elite, is that by
providing a fairly comfortable living for the educated professional, they
could completely remove the threat of widespread dissension, by
appeasing the class of citizens most able to spearhead a movement to upset
Feudal conditions. ...Throw the family dog a steak, and you can rob
the house in peace.
Recognizing the Feudal Aspects of CapitalismFor the most part,
the non-professional's income just meets the cost of a basic standard of
living. Taxes, interest rates, wages, and the cost of living are all
monitored and juggled very carefully so that government can tax away the
bulk of income which exceeds the cost of living. Non-professionals who
form the bulk of the bottom 90% are kept in check by the illusion that the
upper class is in view, but just out of reach. The shocking truth is
that American society is based on a FEUDAL wealth distribution system,
wherein the richest one percent are equivalent to the Feudal monarchs, the
next nine percent are equivalent to the land owning aristocracy of Feudal
times, and the bottom 90% are still being exploited as serfs to supply
cheap labor so that the wealthy can exploit the nation's resources for
their own personal benefit. What's worse is that the bottom 90% have been
successfully and cunningly kept ignorant of that situation. Anyone
making less than $40,000 is relatively speaking one of the SYSTEM'S WORK
HORSES. Anyone on minimum wage is a SLAVE WITHOUT CHAINS. Any
family bread winner not purposely unemployed is a VICTIM. So many
aspects of modern Western society trace directly back to Feudal society,
that an appreciation of our problems would be incomplete with briefly
reviewing how and why Feudalism arose.
The Origins and Nature of Feudalism>From the dawn of time, the
strongest animal or animals within an animal group have spearheaded the
group's defense. Normally this service is acknowledged by the rest of the
group's members, and rightly so. But, while we can acknowledge
indebtedness to our ancestors whose success at "dominating" made possible
our survival as a species into the 21st century, it is important to keep
in mind the distinction between "domination" and
"leadership". By domination, I refer to the case where those in
power abuse their power to exploit those with less power than themselves.
Even back in our cave dwelling days, the need to cooperate for
survival sake probably kept domination within a group to a minimum. Cave
dwelling leaders almost certainly acted to protect their family groups,
and heads of family groups no doubt bonded together to defend whole
communities. However, as the danger posed by other species gradually
tapered off, the survival of the fittest quality of "domination" should
have tapered off as well. Unfortunately, the trait persisted in the
absence of predators. Feudal monarchs provide an excellent example of
this type of domination. They certainly assumed absolute authority for the
defense of their empires. But as Lord Acton pointed out, power corrupts,
and absolute power corrupts absolutely. Somewhere along the way, the
power and responsibilities of the role were abused to the extent that
society's defenders took it on themselves to extend their dominance to
include ownership of all communal assets. At that point ...
ECONOMIC FEUDALISM WAS BORN! >From defenders, they became
rulers who personally claimed all the communal property except that which
they chose to give away to buy loyalty. In effect they dominated their
subjects in much the same way as dictators do today. In order to maintain
their position of dominance, the monarchs divided their kingdoms into
feudal states and gave away large tracts of land within each of these
areas to relatives and trusted friends to gain their loyalty and military
support when needed. To defend their new domains, these wealthy
landowners assembled armies, and built fortified castles, over which they
ruled like MINOR KINGS in their own right. Needless to say, the monarchs
only gave away as much land and delegated authority to the degree they
thought was necessary to ensure their own dominance. In a similar way
but to a lesser extent, the landed aristocracy had to do the same within
their own castles to also ensure their continued domination over the
subjects under their control. Throughout the country, the social order was
based rigidly on class differences. Within the landowners' castle walls
lived the landowners, their relatives, and their most valuable subjects.
(the law enforcers, the merchants and the craftsmen) However, the landless
peasants were forced to live outside the walls where they served as
watchdogs in case of sneak attacks by the landlords' enemies.
Authority from the king allowed the aristocracy to exploit the serfs by
putting them all to work and then taxing away the fruit of their labor. By
making the landless peasants conform to a rigid pattern of subservience,
the aristocracy could use them to perform any and every function that
might enhance their own well-being, while only minimally meeting the
serfs' basic needs. In other words, they used them in much the same way as
their other beasts of burden. After taxes, many
subjects like the peasant farmers, were left with only a minimum of food
and provisions to carry on their lives of servitude. The horses and cows
usually ended up with a greater share of the harvest than these poor
clods. Dust unto dust seemed to more accurately describe their fate. So,
if you belonged to the top 5 percent of feudal society, chances are you
had gold pouring out of your ears. If you didn't, it was the equivalent of
being dropped on your head at birth. As the landed aristocracy grew
stronger, the power of the monarchs diminished, but both the monarchs and
the aristocracy continued to act as social parasites by taxing the serfs
to the brink of poverty, thus keeping peasants basically powerless and
subservient.
Eventually though, to avoid a revolt such as the French monarchs
experienced, the ruling class had to introduce laws that appeared to
recognize some rights of the peasants. But despite the introduction of
democracy, the monarchs and aristocracy exerted their power and influence
in parliament to have legislation passed that ensured their fortunes
remained intact, which in turn kept most of their power intact.
Interestingly enough, there still seem to be quite a few class
conscious, and very wealthy Kings and Queens hanging on, who are actually
the direct descendants of the monarchs of feudal days, and who seem to
have kept their fortunes relatively intact. Queens still reign in Britain,
Denmark, and Holland, while Kings still reign in Belgium, Spain, Norway,
and Sweden. Although most look on modern day monarchs as figureheads,
their wealth and influence must not be underestimated. Queen Elizabeth is
still the richest woman in the world. The South Africans and the Irish are
both actively trying to cast off the burden of Feudal overlords.
From English Feudalism to American FeudalismAmerica on the other
hand chose not a monarch but a President who can veto the will of a
popularly elected Congress. Ironically or not, George Bush is nevertheless
the 13th cousin (twice removed) of Queen Elizabeth. In Western society
today, billionaire power wielders determine both the domestic and foreign
policies, but they do so from behind the scenes, and of course like the
kings before them, they feel justified in claiming as much of the communal
wealth as they wish. As far as the economic elite are concerned, national
wealth is not treated as communal wealth. Many are the descendants of
the great landowners of old, and of the super wealthy merchant class. The
distinction between these two groups has largely disappeared, and we seem
to be left with a hybrid group which embraces international commerce,
while holding vast fortunes in real estate.
For the most part they are comprised of the majority
shareholders who serve on the board of directors of large corporations.
The mega-rich can serve as board members on numerous corporate boards
simultaneously, thereby creating interlocking relationships and interests
among the corporations. This low profile elitist community maintains a
highly efficient, interconnected, local and international network of
communications and control that, for all intents and purposes, completely
avoids public scrutiny. Corporate America meets behind closed doors to cut
secret deals and formulate powerful chess-like strategies that affect the
daily lives of everyone in society.
Moreover, they have seen to it that a range of special privileges
exists, not only for their own benefit, but as a means of winning
political support from all those who envy their lop-sided share of the
nation's wealth. Such privileges, (memberships in exclusive country clubs,
unlimited travel, vehicles, planes, business subsidies and loans, tariff
protection, price guarantees, etc. etc.) are all made accessible in
addition to tax avoidance methods, and tax shelters, that the bottom 90%
don't even make enough money to use.
NeocolonialismIf a country's wealth is divided amongst its
citizens along Feudal wealth distribution lines, then that country
functions as a Feudal domain, whether or not it attempts to conceal the
fact with a democratic veneer, or any other veneer for that matter.
Colonialism is really only Feudalism practiced abroad.
In response to a wave of independence movements which swept the globe
in the late 40's, the great colonial powers were forced to withdraw many
of their political representatives as well as their military occupation
forces. Because this occurred, historians and the media were quick to
announce that the colonial era had ended.
However, the more determined colonialists simply installed puppet
governments in the 3rd World countries which gladly signed defense
treaties which allowed the colonialists to re-install their military
occupation forces. Despite the superficial changes, both Feudalism and
Colonialism are very much alive and well today.
However, colonial exploitation did, at least for a time,
decline. This decline triggered off a decline in the standard of living in
the West for a couple of reasons. First of all, as the level of colonial
exploitation was reduced globally, the spillover benefits of colonialism
were reduced for all Western citizens. Even more importantly, the
colonialists (i.e. the Feudalists) increasingly redirected the focus of
their exploitation toward their own populations in an effort to
make up for lost colonial revenue! Not only is exploitation in the 3rd
World now worse than in the 40's, it's worse in the 1st World too!!
Since the 50s, the planet has in effect, been enduring
an era of social regression caused by the widespread proliferation of the
new and more subtle forms of both Feudalism and Colonialism.
It is also extremely important to keep in mind that the conditions
referred to throughout the book pertain not just to America, but to
virtually all the capitalist democracies, ...England, Canada, Israel,
Scotland, West Germany, South Africa, Ireland, India, Australia, New
Zealand, Japan, etc., as well as to all the other countries ruled by
economically elite minorities. They are all functioning like separate
Feudal empires.
A Look At 10 Western NationsTo show how widespread feudal wealth
distribution conditions are, we will compare the wealth distribution
statistics for ten (10) Western nations. The data was extracted from data
submitted to the Royal Commission on the Distribution of Income and Wealth
prepared in 1979 for the British Monarchy.{B32}
The distribution patterns of the 60's and 70's have been chosen
to provide a valuable yardstick with which to begin an evaluation of our
present condition. The statistics will show how things were in the 60's
and 70's, and then by knowing what has happened in the last decade,
it will be perfectly clear not only where America is headed, but why
immediate action is so necessary.
When the comparative study was carried out in 1979, the information
gathered was the latest available from each country. The studies have
traditionally been carried out infrequently probably to avoid any
unnecessary risk of the information becoming part of the public awareness,
and hence a topic of popular concern.
During the 60's and 70's, the richest 1% owned an average of 25% of
the total national wealth; the richest 5% about 45% of the wealth; and the
richest 10% about 60% of the wealth; ...in virtually each of the
Western nations.
Although statistics were not available for larger
percentages of the population for each country in the study, another even
more startling picture emerged from the data that was available. That data
is shown below.
- In Belgium the richest 50% owned 90.8%
- In France the richest 50% owned 96.3%
- In W. Germany the richest 50% owned 79.2%
- In New Zealand the richest 55.5% owned 99.9%
- In Ireland the richest 30% owned 97.4%
The shocking truth is
that the poorest 50% of the citizens of Western societies share little
more than the elite's table scraps, with the evidence pointing to often
even less than 5% of the total wealth.
The New York Times reported that a recent study found the top 1%
have increased their share to about 35%, whereas the share of wealth
COLLECTIVELY belonging to the bottom 90 % had dropped to about 34%!!
However, a similar study carried out by the University of Michigan
estimated the richest 1% now own 50%, and the bottom 90% get to share only
a meager 16% of the nation's total wealth!! This latter study
translates into the fact that the top 1% may now own three times as much
as the bottom 90% own collectively!! To make things worse, the
rate at which the rich are getting richer and the poor get poorer, ...is
accelerating.
To help the reader appreciate that the economic problems discussed are
by no means unique to America, we will briefly refer to Canada instead of
America to continue the study. Canada provides a dramatic example of
profit disappearing into the woodwork, or more accurately into the bank
accounts of the richest one percent.
Canada (Another Typical Feudal Economy)Being the largest country
in the world, Canada has an enormous amount of natural resources. Her vast
reserves of forests have been logged repeatedly. Her uranium resources
have been tapped for nearly half a century. Much of her mineral resources
have been extracted already, not to mention the Alberta oil wealth and the
prairie wheat, and of course the untold fortunes of fish hauled off her
East and West coasts. The country has an abundance of hydroelectric power,
and exports nuclear technology. She has a thriving industrial base, and
her resource of fresh water should soon become an unexpected gold mine.
Incidentally, Canada has plenty of excellent gold mines, and untold
amounts of nickel have been extracted as well. I could go on but it should
be clear by now that Canada's vast resources have already been well
exploited. A person from any 2nd or 3rd world country would expect our
streets to be paved with gold, because Canada's population is only 25
million!
Instead, the prospect of owning a home is growing steadily more remote
for many young people. You'd wonder why, because there exists such an
abundance of forests. The truth of the matter is that Canadians have to
pay world prices for the timber products. Not only that, the best timber
is exported (to enrich the wealthy few), so the wood used inside Canadian
homes is more often than not the dregs of the industry. Some young
families with two incomes are even battling to afford an apartment. Many
don't even own their own cars, and some have serious debts. Like gas stations, the local Macdonald's fast food outlets
are never very far away. But very few Canadians are even aware that with
1100 charity food banks nationwide, Canada has twice as many food banks
as Macdonalds fast food outlets!!
Plenty of people line up each week at special grocery handout centers
that are often conveniently located off the main streets, where the
long lineups won't interfere with pedestrians or traffic, and where this
shameful show of wealth distribution won't be too readily observed. In the
large cities there are plenty of people who sleep in doorways and parks,
and can be seen pushing around their life's possessions in supermarket
buggies. How is this possible? What has happened to the past profits
generated in our Western countries?
Fortune magazine's 1988 list of the world's top 10 billionaires
indicates that three of the 10 richest families in the world are
Canadians. Furthermore, it indicates that Toronto's Reichmann family alone
increased their wealth in the preceding year from 5 billion to 6.3 billion
dollars, a staggering increase of 1.3 billion, which represents a 26
percent increase in assets during that one year period. {B33}
When the Queen of England, the world's richest female billionaire who
has also derived wealth from Canada, is taken into consideration, then the
number of the world's top ten billionaires who have directly exploited
Canada's resources for their personal benefit increases to 4 out of 10.
And last but not least, we ought to give mention as well to another
billionaire Sir James Goldsmith, of London England, who owns 2.5 million
acres of North American timberland, which is just a half million acres
less than the 3 million acres owned by the Canadian billionaire Kenneth
Colin Irving. {B34} {B35}
Globally, the speed at which wealth and power is being concentrated in
the hands of a very small minority of economic elite has intensified at an
alarming rate. Does anyone need to hire a financial analyst to see a
correlation between the wealth accumulated by billionaires, and the
grocery handout centers and soup kitchens?
Keep in mind that the same story is being played out in all the other
countries dominated by an economic elite. The bottom 90 percent are being
systematically milked, and the cream is being skimmed off by the folks at
the top. We need to take steps to homogenize the economic classes.
The inequities in wealth distribution that originally
prompted the formation of trade unions are now being overlooked in the
rush to say unions today have gotten too powerful and are demanding too
much. Don't forget, it would still have taken 433,000 so called "greedy
unionists" to have been able to save $3,000 each in 1987, to have
collectively benefited as much as the Reichmann family.
Feudalism...A Progress ReportIn case there are any readers left
who doubt that the rich are getting richer while the poor are getting
poorer, information from the US Census Bureau should remove any doubt
whatsoever. The following statistics bear mute witness to the feudal
realities that have taken place during the 80's.
SINCE 1979, Reagan's pro-elite administration increased the inequities
dramatically. The top 20% of the population increased their income by
approximately 10%, while the bottom 20 % of the population saw their
income decline by approximately 22%!!
The reality suggested by these statistics is so
alarming, that it may for some even appear untrue. Because of this, some
previously mentioned facts deserve being retold.
- There are now about 140 million Americans between the ages of 20 to
64, and a staggering 30 million of these individuals are not working!
{B36}
- Since 1980, the blue-collar work force has decreased by 11%.
{B37}
- In 1988 alone, spending by overseas subsidiaries of American firms
increased by 23% to $42.3 billion!! {B38}
- Less than a third of the 32.5 million Americans living below the
poverty level receive welfare assistance. {B39}
- Of the 37 million Americans who entered 1990 without medical
coverage, over half were employed!
- In 1986, two million adults living below the poverty level held
full-time jobs. {B40}
But despite all this, Mrs.
Dole, Bush's Labor Secretary, is trying to introduce a compulsory
six-month "training period" during which a "new hire" would receive a
sub-minimum wage!! {B41}
How The Elite Exploit The NationTechniques such as exporting
America's manufacturing base, and importing labor willing to work for the
minimum wage or less, are but the tip of the iceberg of methods used by
the elite to make themselves richer while at the same time actively
keeping America's bottom 90% unorganized, subservient, and basically poor.
Let's begin by discussing by far the most important method used ...that of
controlling the laws affecting taxation.
Tax Laws - The Key to Wealth and PowerTo the degree one would
wish to help improve the quality of life within Western society, one must
acknowledge the role played by the existing laws, and in particular the
tax laws.
Tax laws, more than any other factor, determine the socioeconomic
nature of a society. They determine the economic hierarchy of wealth and
power just as surely as chess rules govern what occurs in a game of chess.
A king always wins in a game of chess, and in Western society, the top 1%
always own more assets than the bottom 90%. Tax laws ensure that Western
society remains securely locked into a social structure based on wealth
distribution inequities that have changed little since the Middle Ages.
Presidents now avoid the nation's scorn by raising payroll taxes instead
of income taxes. By 1990, payroll taxes will have risen by 30% since 1978,
and the majority of the country will be paying more in payroll taxes than
they do in income taxes. Of course, the bottom 90% as usual are hit the
hardest, but they are generally not yet wise to the switch that has taken
place, so the deceit continues at full bore. {B42}
Robbing The Poor by Not Taxing The RichIn Feudal society, the
most successful of the feudal merchants went outside of their lord's
territory to secretly hide a portion of their profits in foreign lands,
mainly to avoid taxation. They were clever enough, however, to leave store
front businesses running at home to keep up appearances. Our present day
corporation owners do exactly the same thing. It takes little imagination
to realize that the same methods to avoid taxation have gone on without
interruption from Feudal times.
With regard to the previously mentioned exodus of industry from America
to 2nd and 3rd World countries, the fact that American corporations choose
to carry on modern day colonial exploitation is not even the
issue. The real issue is that corporate America
built, and continues to build its foreign factories with the help of
corporate tax deduction laws, ...at the American taxpayers expense, and to
the detriment of the taxpayer's standard of living.
To add insult to injury, the head offices of many business entities are
located in playboy tax havens such as the Bahamas to avoid taxation,
thereby depriving the American taxpayer of getting any benefit from having
initially paid for the foreign factories. The fact that so many oil
tankers owned by the elite are registered in Liberia and not in America
(to avoid taxation) should be a topic of concern to those who are being
forced to take pay cuts and tighten their belts, ...but it isn't.
Americans have been desensitized to this issue and countless others like
it.
However, to get an idea of the quantity and nature of tax avoidance
loopholes that exist in America today, one has only to read a few issues
of Forbes, a magazine which caters to the needs and interests of
the nation's economic elite.
Incidentally, every year Forbes magazine compiles a list of the
world's richest people, as well as a list of the 400 richest Americans. In
its July 24th 1989 issue, the magazine clarified some of the methods it
used in determining the wealth of those who qualified to be included in
its listings. Part of the explanation it provided is worth quoting:
"Since wealth abroad is sometimes held in complicated ways
designed to retain control or bypass various taxing authorities, we
count property owned if it is involved in obvious devices for ownership,
like family holding companies, or cross-ownership, and sometimes less
obvious ones, like certain foundations designed merely for tax
avoidance." {B43} In practically every issue, Forbes
"exposes", or at any rate acquaints the reader with, one or more
additional schemes devised by clever tax accountants or investment
managers to avoid taxation. No doubt each issue must send the super rich
scurrying off to call their accountants to ensure that they are not
missing out on the very latest loopholes.
One would expect that reading about tax avoidance loopholes for the
privileged class could very well upset or anger the average American who
for the most part doesn't make enough money to take advantage of the
loopholes discussed. But there is little danger of that. Editors in charge
of mass media information sources like newspapers and TV news shows very
rarely devote any attention at all to this type of material. In contrast,
Forbes editors obviously feel free to flaunt it because the magazine is
read almost exclusively by the economic elite, and those who aspire to
join their ranks. It is alleged that the average worth of
Forbes readers is 1.4 million dollars, and that at least 250,000 of its
750,000 subscribers are millionaires. {B44}
It is beyond the scope and intent of this book to launch into a
detailed discussion of the tax loopholes currently available, but as was
mentioned above, even a subscription to Forbes magazine would serve as an
introductory primer. One need only read the article "The bad news about
estate taxes", on page 238 of the June 26 1989, or the article "Tax
strategy" on page 186 of the Sept 4 1989 issue to see why the magazine is
so popular among America's economic elite. {B45} {B46} Due
to the extremely complicated nature of tax laws, tax avoidance will remain
the exclusive and somewhat secret domain of those who earn enough money to
hire the services of a tax specialist. This book will attempt, however, to
make the reader acutely aware that tax avoidance privileges enjoyed by the
rich, are the root cause of the nation's economic inequities.
A perfect example of class oriented tax legislation, that exacerbated
the wealth distribution inequities, occurred during the Reagan
administration. With inspiration lifted straight from Sherwood forest,
REAGAN HOOD (the well known American folk bandit who can't normally see
the forest for the trees) took it on himself to take from the poor and
give to the rich. In 1981, he instituted new taxation legislation which
dramatically decreased corporate taxes and transferred the burden to the
bottom 90 percent. (salary and wage earners)
It is not as important to discuss what the tax changes were, so much as
pointing out that the changes were part of a continuing policy to free the
rich from corporate taxation.
Statistics taken from the Historical Tables of the Budget of the
United States Government, Fiscal Year 1986, table 2.1 indicate that
the proportion of Federal Income tax derived from Corporate income tax
declined steadily from 32% in 1952; to 23% in 1960; to 17% in 1970; to a
low of 9% in 1985.{B47}
It should come as no great surprise then that George
Bush has openly voiced his intention to continue adding to corporate
welfare legislation by reducing the capital gains tax by more than 50%.
The Joint Committee on Taxation said that the capital gains tax proposal
passed by the House on Sept 28 1989 would cost $35 billion dollars in lost
revenue over the next 10 years. This largesse would go almost exclusively
to the richest 10%. {B48}
Both the graph and the previous statement ought to give you a chilling
appreciation for the continuing success of the super rich, in their drive
toward total immunity from taxation.
On General Motors' 1987 Income Statement, a footnote indicated that the
federal tax for 1987 was minus $1.3 billion, thus intimating that the
automobile giant may have received a tax rebate for that amount. Citizens
for Tax Justice had figured that GM would end up getting a tax rebate for
$742 million. In any case, it should be a little clearer just where the
money comes from that enables car manufacturers to offer such huge cash
rebate incentives for new car buyers. {B49}
Citizens for Tax Justice (a group backed by Ralph Nader, which
monitors tax abuses and lobbies the government for fairer taxation)
pointed out that the average reader paid more tax last year than AT&T,
Du Pont, Boeing, Merrill Lynch, Dow Chemical, and Walt Disney paid
collectively from 1982 through 1985!!
Do yourself a favor and reread the above paragraph.
In fact, of the 250 companies that they were monitoring, 108 of them
had an average tax rate of 1.6%. {B50}
Neither government nor economic smooth talkers are now able to mask the
social effects of taxation changes favoring the richest 1% introduced
during the Reagan administration. As a result of fiscal policy initiated
by Paul Volcker and James Baker, the number of billionaires began
skyrocketing. From a relatively stable 13, their numbers all of a sudden
doubled in 1986, quadrupled by 1987, and have (since 1987)
increased an additional 50 to their present level of 99. This unethical
shift of wealth from the poorest to the richest 1% simultaneously caused
shelters for the homeless and grocery handout centers to spring up in
practically every city in the nation. The more the reader appreciates the
tremendous scale of corporate welfare, the less apt he or she will be to
blame the deficit on the increasing numbers who are forced to collect
unemployment or welfare. The crime and drug abuse epidemics are additional
visible manifestations of the anger and desperation felt by the policy's
victims.
In case you had noticed that the Reagan administration
seemed virtually unconcerned with the huge national debt. Here's why:
The ballooning deficit, which can only be paid back through taxation,
will continue to translate into a declining standard of living for "those
who pay the taxes", and most for those who are hit hardest by taxation.
Contrary to their continued displays of concern over the increasing
deficit, the elite and their functionaries in congress will in reality
become less and less concerned about the growing deficit because their
share of the tax burden diminishes with every new tax reform!! In
future, billionaires and multimillionaires will accumulate ownership of
the national wealth at an even faster rate than at present. For
those who pay little or no taxes, the growing national debt is scarcely a
concern! The elite are not at all affected by cuts to social
welfare programs. The only social welfare that affects them is corporate
welfare and it has been increasing non-stop since the 50's. However, for
the so-called working middle class and their children, the
ballooning deficit will translate into a significant loss of social
benefits, poorer education and health facilities, etc., in short, a
continuing drop in standard of living.
If the corporations and wealthy elite don't pay their share of taxes,
why should the working class?
The three trillion dollar Star Wars military expansion program is
being funded directly out of the taxpayer's pocket. There is simply no
rationale for the so-called middle class taxpayer to pay the bulk of the
defense bill, when the majority of the wealth and property being defended
belongs to the economic elite, who take every opportunity to excuse
themselves from sharing the tax burden.
In case you have wondered why the deficit is ballooning so rapidly,
here's at least one atrocious reason.
Undermining America with Leveraged BuyoutsOne of the most
scandalous causes of lost tax revenue (from corporations) is
currently sweeping the nation, and is referred to as the leveraged buyout,
also known in the industry as an LBO. During the 80's, LBOs have been the
focus of Wall Street activity. To understand how they work, let us begin
by considering a recent LBO.
The RJR Nabisco corporation was purchased for a sum of about 25 billion
dollars. Prior to its takeover, Nabisco made an annual profit of about
$2.5 billion dollars, on which they pay about $700 million in taxes.
{B51} As a result of the buyout, the new owners will most likely pay
NO TAXES. Not only that, they will probably claim
billions of dollars back (from the government, i.e. the taxpayers) in tax
rebates! Surely this is not possible, you might be saying to yourself. As
unbelievable as this sounds, it is true. START GETTING CONCERNED. The new
owners will still produce their shredded wheat and cigarettes, etc., at
the same prices and with the same manufacturing costs. Right? ...Right! So
their profits should be expected to remain around 2 and a half billion
dollars. Right? ...Wrong! The new owners are now eligible for tax
deductions that the former owners did not have. The new owners
borrowed most of the $25 billion dollars to purchase Nabisco. Why?
...because the interest (that they pay on the money they borrowed to buy
the giant) qualifies as a tax deduction! (Thanks to Section 163 of the
Internal Revenue Code)
Tax avoidance rears it's ugly head. The cost of borrowing the $25
billion could quite conceivably be around $3 billion dollars per year, but
the operating profits, as before, would be only 2 and a half billion.
Are you sitting down?
As a result of a leveraged buyout, a firm like Nabisco can be
transformed from a profitable company making 2.5 billion dollars profit,
and contributing $700 million annually to Federal and state tax revenues,
...to a firm which could draw billions out of the Federal tax pot because
it would be "technically" operating with an annual loss of a half billion
dollars due to the tax write-off for money borrowed to purchase the
giant.
With no taxable income, the new owners would pay no taxes!!!
There's $700 million a year that won't get used to repair the roadways
they buckle when delivering their goods. There's also $700 million per
year that won't help to clean up the rivers and lakes corporate America
has polluted, and continues to pollute.
Taxpayers must come to appreciate that their standard of living will
progressively worsen as unemployment rises, and corporations contribute
less tax in future than they have in the past. Even though the taxpayer
has been secretly robbed (thanks to the gagging of the press), the
corporate raider has just begun his assault.
As unbelievable as it may be (that elected congressmen would allow
corporations to stop contributing taxes), they even allow the taxation
avoidance to be retroactive! Here's how.
Tax losses can be carried back 3 years, and forward 15 years. In other
words, corporate raiders who make their new companies run in the red are
able to claim back as a tax refund the legitimate taxes previously paid in
the previous three years by the former owners. In a case like Nabisco's,
this could amount to billions. The LBO tax avoidance
loophole must be the single most significant cause of reduced Federal and
State tax revenue from corporations for at least the last decade.
Because it is so important for the average person to fully understand
LBOs and their destructive social consequences, and because many readers
may be unfamiliar with the world of stock trading and Wall Street jargon,
a more in-depth explanation is in order.
First of all, a leveraged buyout refers to the transaction that takes
place when an individual or group of investors (outside a corporation)
manages to take over the decision making function of a corporation by
buying up enough shares of the company to assume controlling interest. The
term "leveraged" refers to the fact that most of money used to purchase
the corporation is borrowed or on credit. In all LBOs, the purchasers
borrow as much as they can from banks, by using as collateral the equity
of the corporation to be purchased. The remainder of the money required is
normally raised through the sale of "junk bonds", which are issued by the
purchasers (the corporate raiders), and promoted and sold (underwritten)
by certain brokerage houses or investment banks which specialize in
corporate takeovers. Junk bonds can attract investors because they
normally offer a significantly higher rate of interest than other bonds
and normal bank interest. Usually the part of the operating profits that
formerly went to pay taxes, are now freed up to pay the interest on these
junk bonds, so the junk bond holders can feel relatively safe.
For example, in a case like RJR Nabisco's, the $700 million that
normally would have gone to pay taxes is now capable of paying the
interest on about $5 billion dollars worth of borrowed money. The real
significance is that the taxpayer is effectively footing the bill for $5
billion of the purchase price!
Combine that initial subsidy of $5 billion with the $2 billion they can
receive in tax rebates, and the loss of tax revenue could effectively
amount to about $7 billion on that single takeover.
In case you think this is not typical of what is happening, consider
Safeway which went from paying $122 million in taxes, to being a tax
rebate recipient of over $10 million. Macy's collected a $32 million
rebate instead of paying a normal tax bill of over $200 million. Before
its leveraged buyout, Unocal paid over $500 million in taxes. After the
leveraged buyout its tax bill dropped to $68 million. But the above is
unfortunately only half of the picture. {B52}
So far we have only discussed how LBOs have caused a drastic reduction
in taxes paid by corporations. Next we will look at how and why the
corporate raiders use LBOs to skim hundreds of millions of dollars out of the national economy without
contributing one iota to the nation's productivity.
Why do LBOs occur in the first place? To explain this, I
will resort to an analogy. A car wrecker will often buy a fully functional
(but old) vehicle, and simply junk it, because to the wrecker, the vehicle
is worth more as spare parts than it is as a fully functional car.
This is precisely the way corporate raiders look at a corporation! (as a
conglomerate of companies than can be broken apart and sold separately as
independent companies) Incidentally, those who take over another
corporation forcibly are known as "corporate raiders". When the takeover
results from the acceptance of a buyout offer, the purchase is simply
referred to as a leveraged buyout. Raiders buy corporations for the
purpose of selling off the component companies separately for more money
than what they paid for the fully functioning corporation. In other words,
the raider attacks corporations whose spare part value is greater than
their stock market share value. To illustrate the point, let's say
that a corporation has 100 million shares that are trading on the stock
exchange for $1 each. Theoretically, the market place puts a value on the
corporation of $100 million dollars. However, if a corporate raider
determined that he could sell the various companies comprising the
corporation separately for $150 million, he could theoretically make a
quick unearned $50 million by buying the stock market shares for $100
million, and then individually selling off the components of the
corporation for $150 million.
In other words, the takeover operators secretly have reason to believe
that the one million shares are therefore in reality worth $1.50 a share,
so they will approach the corporation and offer to buy enough shares to
get controlling interest. Acquiring controlling interest is
necessary to be able to initiate the "sell off" of corporate assets. In
order to be able to buy enough shares to gain controlling interests, the
takeover purchasers might try to lure the shareholders into selling their
shares by offering a premium of say 10 cents per share over the going
share market price. So in our example, the raiders could offer to pay
$1.10 per share, instead of the going rate of $1.00 per share. If enough
shareholders agree to sell their shares at this premium, the raiders could
assume controlling interest in the corporation. The corporation would
effectively be bought out. The new owners would then proceed to sell off
whatever of the corporation's companies they wished. Often, just enough
companies are sold off to cover the cost of the purchase, while the
remainder, which represent the profit of the deal, are kept. Usually the better companies, known as the "cash cows", are
kept as sources of positive cash flow to fund further takeovers.
If, as another alternative, they choose to sell off all the
companies (i.e. even the cash cows), and succeeded in doing so for $150
million, they could make a relatively instant $40 million profit,
involving no productivity whatsoever.
When corporate managers try to prevent corporate raiders from buying up
enough stock to hold a controlling interest of their corporations,
directors are usually forced to borrow heavily, or to sell off some of
their companies' assets, in a desperate move to get cash to purchase their
own common stock at the abnormally inflated stock prices offered to their
shareholders by the takeover operators.
The other alternative is for the existing directors to virtually pay
the corporate raiders what amounts to a ransom to leave the corporation
alone. This ransom, which usually involves a "buy back" of whatever shares
the raiders have managed to buy up, is known in the industry as
"greenmail", a euphemistic term for the technically legal blackmail
that takes place, and which the justice system blatantly ignores.
If the corporation gets bought out, or, if it is forced to pay
greenmail, the end result is similar; the equity of the corporation gets
replaced by debt, which lowers it's tax liability, reduces its cash flow,
and makes it increasingly vulnerable to financial problems.
Basically, raiders act as "corporation wreckers", functioning much the
same as "car wreckers". If, as a result of selling off the component
companies, the corporation's primary product stops getting produced, well
tough luck! Raiders are interested only in quick profits.
Stripped bare, corporate takeovers are, in essence, non-productive,
economically debilitating real estate flips.
Those wishing to have a clearer appreciation of the debilitating
effects suffered by companies which try to fight off takeover bids are
encouraged to read the article entitled "Invasion of the company
snatchers" in the Dec 12 1988 issue of Forbes. {B53} On the other
hand, the article on page 102 of the Sept 4 1989 issue entitled "Don't
blame me", details some of the debilitating problems suffered by
businesses that have been taken over and reorganized according to the
whims of new owner/speculators. {B54} Similarly, the article "One
man's poison" on page 38 of the Oct 16 1989 issue leaves little doubt that
businesses burdened with LBO debt are, from a competitor's point of view,
often less able to compete.
In addition, "tax loss credits" that are generated by
LBOs later encourage MERGERS with other profitable companies who use the
tax loss credits to avoid paying taxes on their own profits. A brief
discussion of this additional tax avoidance rip-off will follow later
under the topic: Mergers (Monopolies and Tax Avoidance).
Can those taking part in a corporate raid get rich milking the
economy like this? To partially answer that question, let me quote
from the July 11 1989 edition of Financial World which had an
article on Wall Street's one hundred highest paid earners.
"In general, most of the top 100 earners have two things in
common ...they are principles in their firms, and they are deeply
involved in takeovers." {B55} The answer, therefore, is
that you most certainly can, and in two distinct ways. The most profitable
way is to be the corporate raider. Example: According to Forbes
magazine, which does a yearly assessment of the wealth of the richest 400
Americans, Ronald Owen Perelman, (a leveraged buyout specialist) increased
his personal wealth by $750,000,000 (Seven hundred and fifty million
dollars) in the period between their 1988 survey, and their 1989 survey.
Start getting concerned!! He was not alone. {B56}
The second most profitable way is to help provide the funding for the
corporate raider. For this service, the banks and the junk bond salesmen
earn handsome commissions.
How much can a junk bond commissioned salesman make, who assists the
corporate raiders? Example: Michael Robert Milken. Forbes
indicates that Mr. Milken increased his own personal wealth from 800
million in the 1988 survey, to one billion, two hundred and seventy
million in the 1989 survey. His 470 million increase in one year, like
Ronald Perelman's seven hundred and fifty million dollar increase didn't
materialize out of nowhere.
One way or another the cost of his commissions will be passed along to
the consumer. {B57} The article "Who's really picking up the tab?"
in the Oct 30 1989 issue of Forbes provides enough facts and figures to
make anybody steam under the collar. {B58}
LBOs continue at great cost to society, and with far
ranging social and economic repercussions, despite the economic elite's
rhetoric to the contrary. The numerous social side effects of LBOs are
even more ethically scandalous than the flip profits or the drastic
reduction to taxes paid. The various component companies which formerly
worked together smoothly may now be convulsing under new inexperienced
managers. In fact, many managers who spend a lifetime working their way up
through the ranks are often let go, suddenly depriving them of well earned
pensions, and forcing them quite abruptly into competition with much
younger men for a diminishing number of managerial jobs. Management,
however, are not usually the only ones who face unemployment hardships as
a result of "mergers and acquisitions" (M&As), as they are jointly
referred to.
Companies or divisions of companies which manufacture items that can be
manufactured more cheaply using 3rd World slave labor, are often shut down
and relocated overseas. A recent survey of several thousand American
takeovers which took place between 1977 and 1982 has shown that firms
which had been taken over employed about 12% fewer staff in 1982
than they had in 1977, while firms which had not been taken over
had, on average, increased their staff by about 4%. Overall, wages and
benefits fell by about 12% for the staff of firms taken over. {B59}
Often a drop in product output, and/or a drop in product quality follows
on the heels of cost cutting measures introduced by new profit conscious
owners. Effectively, Americans are being fleeced, cheated, and unemployed
simultaneously.
Meanwhile, the bulls continue to run as the stock market continues to
climb from LBO buying pressure, and consequently the share prices
are once again unrealistically high. The LBO frenzy has also driven up the
cost of corporate real estate, and in the process, residential real estate
as well, to the point that buying a home seems beyond the reach of many
hard working productive Americans.
Market speculators will begin 1990 once again nervously poised to dump
their stock portfolios at the very first sign of a market sell-out, and
that is precisely what the October 1989 crash was all about. The stability
of the economy as a whole has already been seriously undermined.
A recession, or worse yet, a depression, could easily cause these
leveraged to the hilt corporations to go bankrupt due to a loss of
cash flow which could occur during a normal recession. {B60} They
could begin defaulting on their enormous bank loans and usher in a
catastrophic collapse of the banking system!
So don't let politicians convince you that a corporation based on debt
(with no reserves left to survive even minor disruptions to its cash flow), is now better equipped to compete
internationally. Remember instead the old maxim that the bigger they are,
the harder they fall. Besides, politicians are usually the first to defend
legislative gifts to the rich because they too can take advantage of the
loopholes. In the case of LBOs, William E. Simon, a former Treasury
Secretary was one of the very first to jump on the LBO gravy train. In
1981 he took over Gibson Greetings Inc. for $330,000 and within two years
made $70 million. {B61}
And just how shaky, artificial, and ridiculous have leveraged
buyouts gotten? Well, Forbes magazine pointed out that "...Duff
and Phelps, the Chicago-based bond-rating service, underwent a management
buyout early this year and issued its own junk bonds. When the deal
closed, long-term debt ballooned to $112 million from $34 million. Net
worth fell to minus $10.8 million from positive $3.6 million. Fees
and expenses in connection with the buyout ran almost $13 million, which
was more than the equity contribution of the management investors."
{B62}
Who stands to lose money if these "leveraged to the hilt"
corporations collapse in a recession, or a depression brought on by
another stock market crash? Two entities will bear the brunt of
banks going bankrupt if and when the cash poor leveraged corporations
default on their payments to the banks. If the banks get bailed out by the
government, taxpayers as a whole will end up paying for the economic
elite's gambling spree. If the impending economic collapse is severe
enough to make widespread bank bailouts impractical or impossible, YOU and
the little old lady who put her life savings on deposit will lose your
shirts. That's who! So when you hear that a huge corporation is running at
a loss, don't be too eager to get out your hankie unless you are crying
over the havoc caused by corporation wreckers who have, in the process of
milking the nation, driven it to the brink of bankruptcy.
Lest we forget: The proportion of Federal Income tax (derived from
Corporate income tax) has already declined from 32% in 1952; to 23% in
1960; to 17% in 1970; to a low of 9% in 1985. To make things even
worse, the bulk of the leveraged buyouts which ushered in a
horrendous wave of tax avoidance, have occurred since 1985. In 1988 there
were 3,500 public deals worth some $300 billion. {B63} The four
firms previously mentioned on 1-36, alone represent a potential annual
legal tax avoidance in excess of $2.2 billion.
Furthermore, Mr. Bush has been fighting for some time
to have the capital gains tax reduced even further, this time by half.
However, in the face of some congressional opposition, he has suggested
and will probably succeed in passing a supposed compromise to his original
demands. His compromise involves a significant reduction of the capital
gains tax for a two year period only. This compromise would nevertheless
effectively give all the profit takers a golden opportunity to
remove from the system whatever windfall profits they have been sheltering
from the tax department over recent years. Few concessions to the rich
have been as blatant as this impending tax scam.
The excuse has always been given that "Reducing corporate taxation
stimulates the economy." It does no such thing. On the contrary, the
proposed corporate tax reductions will free up enormous amounts of capital
for investment abroad!
In banking circles, this whole process of exchanging debt for equity is
known as the "monetization" of private wealth. It is estimated that 40% of
the $311 billion value of deals carried out in 1988 alone went into
private hands. {B64} In other words, the elite have been exchanging
their industrial equity for cash which can now be used to buy up cheap
industries overseas in order to take advantage of the remaining pools of
cheap unorganized labor.
As a result of the exodus of American industry previously described,
America's capital stock (industrial machinery, etc.) fell from 70% of GDP
in the mid-1970's, to 56% in the mid-80's. {B65} And of course less
industry means more unemployment which in turn tempts more employers to
cut wages back as close as possible to the minimum wage.
In addition, much industrial machinery is old and outdated due to the
reluctance of corporations to consider anything beyond the next quarter's
earnings. Consequently, the elite have begun to pressure employees into
buying outdated plants and machinery (through employee stock ownership
plans) with threats of plant closures.
Employee Stock-Ownership Plans (Watch Out!)Now
that the elite have removed equity from the economy and replaced it with
debt leaving a large proportion of corporations utterly vulnerable to
bankruptcy in the event of a serious recession; and after they have left
American industries uncompetitive from decades of removing profits while
allowing manufacturing machinery to become old and obsolete; the economic
elite are eagerly saying its time for the employees to share in the
ownership of the nation.
Obviously, if corporations are eager to get on the ESOP bandwagon, and
they most certainly are, logic if nothing else should suggest that despite
the lies being fed to employees all around the country, employee
stock-ownership plans benefit employers more than they benefit the
employees. And they do. Here's how.
As the ESOPs are phased in, a company's existing pension plan gets
phased out. For an increasing number of people, their retirement income
will then be tied to the fluctuating price of the company's stock. This
means that in a recession, or worse yet a depression, neither their stocks
nor the dividends from the stocks will be worth a damn. For companies that
go bankrupt, in good times or in bad times, the pensions for all current
and retired workers will simply cease to exist!!
Because post-retirement medical coverage gets phased out as well,
employees will have the option of withdrawing equity from their stock
accounts to pay for their own medical coverage. If medical costs skyrocket
in later years, and they will, employees and particularly the retired ones
will feel the pinch of reduced pension income. If stock dividends plummet
in a recession, which they most certainly would, pension income would be
reduced accordingly. Not so with the cost of medical care. With little or
no income during a recession, sickness may cause many to borrow against
whatever equity is left in their homes.
In recessions and depressions, workers who have not retired yet will be
faced with the option of allowing their company to go bankrupt, and in the
process losing both their jobs and their pensions, or they could keep
the company going, at any and all costs, by working for wages that would
at last compete with 3rd World labor costs!!
In bad times many workers would be forced to sell off their company
stock for additional income. However in bad times, dividends from the
stocks would most likely cease as well. If many people are forced to
desperately dump their shares on the market for survival income, the stock
market could once again easily collapse.
The prospect of getting rid of existing pension liability is so
lucrative to the elite that the current administration is providing no end
of tax incentives to corporations to get them to participate in ESOPs.
Even the banks and Insurance companies are being given irresistible tax
incentives to provide corporations with loans to set up their ESOPs. They
only have to pay tax on 50% of the interest revenue from ESOPs!! Next, the
corporations can write off not only the interest they pay on these loans,
but also the principal! In addition they can write
off the dividend payments on the stock. The tax incentives alone are so
lucrative that last year over $18 billion was borrowed by corporations to
set up ESOPs. In short ESOPs are simply another vehicle designed for the
economic elite to reduce worker benefits, and withdraw their money
completely by selling the country's debt laden industrial carcass to
gullible workers. On the other hand, the mega-rich minority would be fewer
and richer than ever. Many have already taken their wealth out of America
and invested it in 3rd World countries. During recessions and depressions,
their wealth will, relatively speaking, escape the losses suffered by
capital invested in the 1st and 2nd World countries. {B66}
What makes the whole ESOP scheme transparent and laughable is that,
almost without exception, when companies are 100% owned by the employees,
the employees have little or no representation on the company's board, and
subsequently little or no influence over supposedly their own company's
policy.
Studies carried out by Michael Conte at the University of Baltimore, by
Jan Svejnar of the University of Pittsburgh, and by the General Accounting
Office (GOA) itself, have all reached the same conclusion. ESOPs do not
improve either profits or productivity. They have however reduced Federal
tax revenues by billions, and suckered many workers into jeopardizing not
only their present well-being, but their retirement security as well.
{B67}
Mergers (Monopolies and Tax Avoidance)Another flurry of Wall
Street activity has involved mergers. Why? ...because each LBO can spawn a
further proliferation of tax avoidance involving mergers. To explain how,
let's use RJR Nabisco again as our model.
Let's assume that Nabisco operates with an operating loss of $500
million per year. Theoretically, this operating loss can be prorated out
to each of the companies forming the corporation, all of which can begin
accumulating tax loss credits. This means that an outside company which is
running with a profit of $100 million per year could approach Nabisco and
arrange a deal to buy up a portion of Nabisco's companies that account for
a loss of $100 million per year.
After the merger, the new hybrid company would now theoretically pay no
taxes either, because their previous $100 million profits would be offset
by the $100 million tax loss of the newly acquired companies from Nabisco.
And so another $100 million dollars in taxes would
not get paid in taxes. In this way, unsold companies that run in the red
can accumulate their tax losses for 15 years, thus becoming even
more lucrative to the diminishing number of companies that have not yet
jumped onto the tax avoidance bandwagon.
Congress goes through the motions of "preventing the trafficking of tax
loss credits", however, loopholes are left to effectively get around the
weak legislation. I could elaborate on the loopholes, but enough has been
said about the topic of tax avoidance already. Those wishing to know how,
can read "Guess which shell has the loss" on page 215 of the Nov 14 1988
issue of Forbes.; "It's the right thing to do", on page 104 of the April
17 1989 issue.; or "ESOP fable" on page 98 of the June 26 1989 issue.
In general, Congress defends its "hands off" policy with regard to
mergers and acquisitions on the grounds that bigger corporations
are necessary to compete internationally. This would have been an
acceptable argument back in the old days when mergers used to occur
between companies which produced components of a finished product.
However, it is precisely these massive corporations that are being
bought up by the takeover raiders and broken up to be sold off in
bits and chunks to the highest bidders!
In any event, the fact that some genuine mergers are producing virtual
monopolies is being casually overlooked amidst the circus of ongoing
business abuses currently taking place. Reagan began taking the heat off
of big business monopolies by cutting the government's anti-trust staff by
about 60%.
An additional generous loophole was provided in 1984 with the
introduction of the National Co-operative Research Act which provided
exemptions from anti-trust lawsuits for companies engaged in joint R&D
projects. Those most concerned with antitrust suits are now involved in
joint R&D projects at least in a token way! {B68}
Society's Parasites (The Speculators)If prostitution is the
oldest profession, gambling is certainly one of the runners-up. The
practice of increasing one's wealth without having to expend one's energy,
or be productive in any way, has attracted followers from the dawn of
time. In the West, individuals who do so as a career, have percolated to
the top of the economic and social ladders because their predecessors have
successfully lobbied for the legislation that makes it all possible.
Regrettably, the message being broadcast by the yuppies and the super
rich is that putting in an honest day's work for an honest day's pay is
reserved for suckers and those afraid to take risks. Accordingly, the fever to get rich quick, without really
working, is causing countless lower class entrepreneurs to choose drug
trafficking as an elevator to their financial success, just as stock
market and real estate speculation is chosen by the upper class
entrepreneurs. To put it mildly, Wall Street scandals are becoming
commonplace, and stock markets seem more and more to be the playing field
for inside traders and stock price manipulators. Legitimate balance sheet
acrobatics makes it increasingly unwise for all but seasoned market
professionals to invest in America's potential. The article on page 46 in
the Jan 9 1989 issue of Forbes, entitled "Never, but never, give a sucker
an even break", exposes just how easily the unwary can be parted from
their money.
Although the stock market has always had a casino-like atmosphere
attached to it, the contagious "get rich quick" fever, now seems to have
pervaded virtually every aspect of legitimate business. Corporations are
spending more time and effort on making profits through balance sheet
maneuvers than through anything even remotely related to efficiency or
productivity.
The investment departments of corporations have usually preferred to
gamble on the stock market, and banks on real estate. But in reality they
each gamble in both speculation games simultaneously, converting assets
back and forth from real estate to stocks whenever they think one or the
other of the speculation games is ready to crumble.
The October 1987 stock market crash was to the stock market speculation
game, the equivalent of a national run on the banks in the real estate
market speculation game. Stocks across the board had been traded back and
forth until they were hopelessly overvalued, at which time the gamblers
who did not get out in time, took their losses, and passed them on to
their customers in the guise of price inflation. Of course there were the
usual bailouts, but some of the brokerage houses still went bankrupt.
The key, to understanding why the public at large should be concerned
about market and bank failures, centers around the fact that speculators
rarely gamble with their own money. They normally borrow the money from
someone else. To appreciate the magnitude of this problem, let's examine
why so many banks and savings and loan thrift institutions have gone
bankrupt.
Why Banks and S&Ls Go BankruptThe banking world, which has up
to now enjoyed a reputation as a trustworthy, stable cornerstone of
society, no longer merits either the respect or the trust which most
citizens, in ignorance, continue to ascribe to it. One of the oldest jokes
in the banking industry wryly acknowledges that "The easiest way to rob a
bank, is to own one."
And in a nutshell, this is precisely why hundreds of banks and S&L
thrift institutions have recently declared bankruptcy.
A knowledge of the root causes of S&L failures is so fundamental to
an overall appreciation of society today, that a synoptic description of
the scam behind the failures will now be outlined.
Most important is the fact that banks and S&Ls were, and still are
today, vehicles for acquiring money to gamble with. Most depositors who
deposit their money in a savings account, or on fixed term deposit, tend
to think of banks as giant vaults in which their money can safely reside
free from the ravages of fire, theft, and accidental loss. Even the
massive amounts of money that flow into banks from pension funds are put
on deposit basically for safekeeping. Decades ago, when interest rates,
and property values were relatively stable and comparatively fixed, the
image of banks as vaults was not that far off the mark. Most institutions
made their money from the spread in interest rates between what they paid
to their depositors, and what they received from those who borrowed from
the bank. Times have changed.
With speculation profits as the lure, S&L thrift owners have
been using depositors' money as their personal gambling stakes to engage
in real estate speculation. They bought up plenty of actual
properties, and also issued mortgages on others. Some of these mortgages
were assigned, at preferred interest rates, to friends, relatives, and
business partners, etc. In this way, a network of chosen insiders could
also use depositors' money to engage in real estate speculation!!
As prices continued to rise, the speculators were free to sell their
properties for profits. The mortgages could be paid out or passed on to
the new real estate buyers, in which case, new properties could be
purchased and new mortgages taken out. The profits for many were enormous.
Prior to the real estate slump, prices had skyrocketed. Although much of
the speculation involved commercial real estate, the price of residential
real estate was also inflated in the process. Meanwhile, the innocent bank
depositors were still only being paid their measly fixed low interest. The
profit difference, which for some has been instant millions or hundreds of
millions, was pure profit involving absolutely no productivity whatsoever,
and for that matter, little or no risk either. Why little or no risk?
Well, when the real estate market inevitably collapsed, the banking and
corporate gamblers start dumping their real estate holdings on the
declining market. Almost instantly, there were no buyers in sight. The gambling bankers were left with overvalued properties,
and overvalued mortgages whose holders predictably chose to default on.
Hundreds of bank and thrift owners knew the party was over, and that they
were on the road to bankruptcy.
Were the speculators now going to lose all the profits they had made on
the way up? Not a chance. They were all capable of walking away from their
institutions relatively unscathed, and here's how.
Between the time the gamblers know they have lost, and before a bank or
thrift actually declares bankruptcy, the insiders purposely maintain
appearances and keep the institution afloat as long as possible to buy
time to carry out some or all of the following remaining steps of this
much used scenario.
- 1) Maintain the institution's cash flow, often by offering higher
interest rates than its competitors to attract "brand new" depositors.
These new depositors are in effect unsuspecting victims right from the
start!! This tactic allows time for the insiders to withdraw as much of
their own capital as possible, and leave the new unsuspecting depositors
as victims to absorb the losses, and/or have their money tied up during
the bankruptcy or bailout delays.
- 2) Pay themselves out as many dividends, bonuses, private country
club membership dues, etc. as is possible.
- 3) Transfer the bulk of their entire personal wealth into their
wives or children's names, (if they hadn't already done so), and stash
away some extra cash in foreign banks, in case they later get sued.
- 4) Issue low interest or interest free loans to their family
businesses, friends' corporations, and even their own healthy subsidiary
businesses, etc. Needless to say, when the bank goes into bankruptcy,
these loans will start defaulting too, and will probably eventually be
written off as bad debts by the liquidator or receiver.
- 5) Operate the last few months strictly on credit, running up the
tab to the hilt.
- 6) Apply for a government bailout. Even if a bailout is denied,
individual investors may be repaid through deposit insurance plans. Here
again, it is not the gamblers who end up covering any of their losses.
Either directly or indirectly, it is the taxpayer who pays for the
gambler's winnings and losses.
- 7) Failing a successful bailout bid, they declare bankruptcy, and
walk away from the carcass leaving countless "depositors" (victims)
innocently holding the bag.
The present and future taxpayers,
whose standard of living will be reduced in the process of paying back the
two to three hundred billion dollars in S&L bailout money, are simply
paying for all the profits taken out by the speculators who now pose as
the nation's most successful entrepreneurs, and respected community
leaders!!
It should be noted that the same sort of scam can be
carried out in a period when the real estate market is relatively stable.
Properties can be purposely sold back and forth between corporations or
individuals in an effort to leave a plausible but totally artificial
inflationary sales track record for the property. For example, Individual
# 1 can sell a piece of real estate with a current market value of $10
million to Individual # 2 for $20 million. Individual # 2 then sells the
same piece of property to Individual # 3 for $30 million.
Then after the value of the property has been sufficiently pumped up
through artificial sales, the S&L owner or bank manager, who is also
in on the scam, either buys the property or issues a mortgage on the
property as if the property were worth $30 million. So now the bank
depositors in effect own the unrealistically overvalued property!
After all, it is the mortgage payments that are used as money to pay
the depositors' interest, and it is the sale of the overvalued properties
that is used to pay back the depositors' principal. Needless to say, the
true market value is still only $10 million! The $20 million difference is
then split amongst the S&L owner and his associates. When the S&L
has been milked sufficiently using this or other scams involving leveraged
buyouts and junk bonds, it is cast aside for the taxpayers to bailout the
exploited depositors.
Don't be fooled into thinking your money is automatically safe, just
because it is in the bank. The phrase "safe as a bank" is an anachronism.
In 1937 a record number of banks went bankrupt, and that record number
lasted as an unbroken record for almost a half century until 1984! The
number of bank failures since then is as follows: 79 in 1984, 120 in 1985,
138 in 1986, 184 in 1987 and finally 200 in 1988!!! Furthermore, the
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation disclosed that in 1986 there were
1484 banks around the country which it officially listed as "problem
banks". In 1988 this number had declined by 69 to 1415. Normally this news
would be good news providing one doesn't take into account the number of
banks that failed in the same period. {B69}
And don't forget, these figures are for banks only! The figures for
"problem" and "failed" Savings and Loan thrift institutions are even much
worse.
You also ought to be aware that, thanks to Emergency Banking
Regulations, your bank deposits can be frozen and dribbled back to you on
a fixed limit per month if your bank's doors get locked some day for a
liquidation party. Don't assume you will
automatically have access to your safety deposit box, because you probably
won't, not unless you are wealthy enough to pull the right strings.
The reason that owners of banks and thrifts can afford to gamble in
this way and risk having their own bank go bankrupt, is that they only
have to cover the depositors money by 4%, and 3% respectively of their own
capital; and that money itself could no doubt have been borrowed for the
investment, and this can be debt equity.
So what did the thrift owners lose? Practically nothing. As paltry as
the 4% and 3% amounts may seem for the privilege of gambling with
depositors' money, much owner equity was in the form of business
"goodwill"!! The balance sheet intangible called "Goodwill" is being used
increasingly as just another tax avoidance loophole. Because goodwill has
to be amortized over thirty years, earnings, (i.e. profits) can be
artificially reduced to zero with a sufficiently large "goodwill". When
Philip Morris bought out Kraft foods, $11.6 billion, or 90% of the
purchase price of $12.9 billion was "goodwill". In the process, Kraft
passed on the valuable profit-reducing "goodwill" to Philip Morris.
Although theoretically its profits and therefore its taxes will be reduced
substantially, (it may even run at a loss) its dividends paid to
stockholders may not be affected at all. The mania for mergers and
acquisitions is fueled by tax avoidance opportunities. In other words,
some bank and thrift owners risked practically none of their own money.
{B70} The abuse of depositor's savings could virtually be
eliminated if banks could only take in deposits equal to say twice the
value of their own shareholders' participatory equity, not just a
ridiculous 4 percent. The safety and value of all bank depositors' money
has been seriously undermined.
Not only have the life savings of many unsuspecting bank depositors
provided gamblers with their gambling capital, to add insult to injury, in
the process the real estate values for the whole community have been
artificially pumped up to the extent that, for an increasingly large
number of modern day workers, the prospect of owning a home is becoming
only a pipe dream. Many young couples now have difficulty even saving the
10 percent down payment necessary to qualify for a lifetime of mortgage
payments.
But the consolidation of real estate ownership is not a new phenomenon,
it has been going on relentlessly since the 50's. Mr. Joseph Minarik of
the Urban Institute shed plenty of light on the issue. He pointed out that a typical 30 year-old purchasing the
median-price home under typical mortgage terms would have incurred
carrying costs equal to 14% of his pretax income in 1949, 15% in 1959, 21%
in 1973, and 44% in 1983. {B71} Needless to say, this trend has
worsened significantly since the start of the 80's. In fact, the Joint
Center for Housing Studies at Harvard University have disclosed that
between 1980 and 1987, there has been close to an 8% decrease in home
ownership for the 25-34 age group. {B72}
Whitewashing and Hiding the Rip-offsIn the headlong rush for
quick profits, owners of banks and S&L thrifts that won, won big
...(millions and hundreds of millions). Those that lost, simply walked
away and made the taxpayer pick up their gambling debts. At present, the
government's official estimate (from the General Accounting Office)
is that the thrift bailout will cost $285 billion over 30 years (no doubt
a gross underestimation).
While the effects of the S&L bailout will certainly be felt by the
bottom 90%, neither the President nor the Congress is keen on the topic
being too visible to Americans or the rest of the world for that matter,
so the initial 50 billion of bailout money will not even be part of the
government's budget. Instead, the Gramm-Rudman deficit cutting law will be
purposely avoided by taking $20 billion from this year's already
budgeted and allocated money, and by having the remaining $30 billion
borrowed not "on budget" by the Treasury, but "off-budget" by a newly
formed government agency called Refcorp which will sell bonds which pay
higher rates of interest than normal treasury bonds. Because the revenue
from the sale of Refcorp bonds are treated as budgetary receipts, the
S&L bail-out will appear to actually generate revenue this
year!
As Charles Bowsher, the Comptroller-General of the United States put
it,
"By conventional wisdom, the U.S. federal budget deficit in
1990 will meet the Gramm-Rudman-Hollings target of $100 billion. Why,
then, will the federal debt rise during the same year by about $280
billion? Because the federal government has cooked the books. The
American public is being led to believe that the deficit is falling when
it is actually rising" Mr. Bowsher also pointed out that
Bush's S&L plan will cost the taxpayer tens of billions in extra,
unnecessary interest, just to hide the S&L losses "off budget".
{B73} This practice of hiding deficits "off budget" is done
strictly for political public relations, and therefore is blatantly meant
to deceive and manipulate the public.
Just as the bailout of the Federal Savings & Loan
Insurance Corp. (FSLIC) will cost the taxpayer nearly $300 billion, so the
following organizations are potential bombs that have the autonomy to
borrow money without government approval, but whose debt does not get
added into the Federal Budget deficit, and whose debt is not therefore
subject to Gramm-Rudman constraints: The Farm Credit System; The Federal
Home Loan Mortgage Corp.; the Federal National Mortgage Assn.; and the
Student Loan Marketing Assn. {B74}
While the government's formally recognized debt amounts to $2.6
trillion dollars, the "off budget" hidden deficits such as government
credit, insurance and loan-guarantee commitments have grown in the last 20
years from $400 billion to more than $5 trillion - nearly twice the
national debt, and five times the annual level of federal spending!
{B75} The general public has been successfully kept in the dark
regarding the future hardships that these off-budget deficits will cause.
{B76}
Congress is responsible for going along with this type of deceit. Says
Lee Hamilton (D-Ind.), Chairman of the Joint Economic Committee, "We have
developed considerable skill and sophistication in meeting
deficit-reducing targets ...without reducing the deficit.
Corporations and Insurance CompaniesFor the purposes of insight
and perspective, it is relevant to point out the similarities that exist
between corporations and banks. In many respects, corporations can act as
banks. Effectively, their "depositors", so to speak, are their
shareholders and those people who buy their corporate bonds. Their
investment departments can get involved in many of the same type of real
estate speculation as banks. In fact, the convoluted transactions that can
occur between parent and subsidiary companies within a corporation make
"following a bank's audit trail" appear like a kindergarten exercise
compared to their own.
Don't be fooled into thinking that when a corporation fails, some big
player has lost a fortune. In the corporate version of the S&L scam
previously described, corporations, which more often than not are holding
companies, can purposely set up a separate subsidiary investment company
to go bankrupt if the gamble fails.
Insurance companies too have speculated in real estate with their
policy holders' funds, in the same way that S&L thrift owners and
the investment departments of corporations have speculated.
Similarly, many insurance companies have suffered
massive losses through real estate speculation and through extensive
investment in junk bonds. However, accounting conventions in the
insurance industry have allowed the losses to go largely unnoticed and
unreported. Consequently the significance of losses incurred by this
industry have not received the media attention that they so justly
deserve. No doubt the insurance industry lobbyists have assisted in
preventing the information from being publicized too widely mainly because
(unlike the S&L thrift industry) the insurance industry is not
backed up by government guarantees!! In addition, clever accountants
in this industry too have found methods of bypassing legislation put in
place to ensure there is always enough capital surplus to pay out claims
as they come due. {B77} The industry's deteriorating capital base
is being disguised in part through reinsuring part of their liabilities
with offshore insurers in places like the Bahamas which do not require the
same level of controls or safeguards. {B78} Since eight out of ten
Americans own life insurance, a recession causing junk bond defaults or
widespread business and bank bankruptcies would almost certainly cause a
related general collapse of insurance corporations on a scale that is
perhaps under present circumstances difficult to imagine. {B79}
Bank Losses From 3rd World LoansWhile the savings and loan
thrifts were going broke as a result of making too many millionaires
wealthier, the big major banks were even more seriously going broke due to
defaulting foreign loans. It's no secret that the major U.S. banks have
loaned vast sums of money to 2nd and 3rd World countries. Most of the
underprivileged debtor countries holding "floating interest rate" loans
were virtually bankrupted by the developed nations when the major Western
banks pushed their interest rates into the 15-20% range. Debtor nations
faced the situation where their interest payments to the developed nations
exceeded their national revenues.
Not surprisingly they were left with little alternative but to default
on their loan repayments unless they received additional loans to be able
to repay even the interest portion of the debt. Just be aware that the 3rd
World debt is now over $1,200,000,000 and the repayments have almost
stopped. {B80}
The country has yet to suffer a national run on the banks like what
happened in 1929, but the writing is on the wall. Many have gone bankrupt already and the government has
arranged for hundreds of billions of taxpayer dollars in bailout money.
But that's only the tip of the iceberg; there are hundreds of banks
waiting in the wings. In 1986, the FDIC listed over 1,500 U.S. banks on
its problem list, up from a little over 600 three years earlier. Their
losses are very conservatively estimated to be well above $200 billion
dollars. Those closest to the facts put the figure over $300 billion.
To put it mildly, debtor nations can barely repay the interest, much
less their loan principal. Logically, these facts should spell big trouble
to the shareholders of the major banks (many of whom belong to the
economic elite). That might ordinarily be the case if they were not the
ones who pull government strings, ...but they are.
Getting the Taxpayer to Buy the 3rd World DebtInitially, David
Rockefeller, using the power of the Trilateral Commission lobbied for
taxpayer money to be given to the International Monetary Fund and the
World Bank so that potential defaulters could be loaned at least enough
money to make interest payments on the money they owed. This prevented a
coordinated revolt of international loan defaulters. Subsequent to that,
the BIG BANKS successfully lobbied for and obtained various other ways of
transferring their losses directly back to the taxpayer.
Taken together, the various methods provided what amounted to free
banking insurance for the bankers.
To begin with, a piece of legislation was passed through Congress in
1980 that the public didn't even really get to hear about. It was called
the Depository Institution Deregulation And Monetary Control Act and it
gave the Federal Reserve the right to purchase any bad debt. The sentence
doesn't sound all that menacing, until you realize how that power can be
used to perpetrate one of the great superscams.
The government has already indicated that there are certain major banks
that it would not allow to go bankrupt, in the national interest. How
might the Fed prevent the bankruptcy of major banks who have literally
hundreds of billions of dollars of foreign bad debt that they would
otherwise be forced to write off? ...simply by buying or "guaranteeing"
the foreign bad debts from the banks.
What is currently happening? America's Treasury Secretary,
Nicholas Brady, is encouraging the major banks to give new loans to the
debtor nations in order to keep the interest payments flowing. How could
the banks possibly be enticed to supposedly throw more good money after
bad? Well, when the original loans come up for renewal,
the government is offering to "federally guarantee" the new loans (with
your hard earned tax dollars), provided they are channeled through the
International Monetary Fund. The government's excuse is that it can afford
to risk taxpayer money because of the stipulations and provisions (imposed
by the International Monetary Fund) that a debtor nation must agree to, as
a requirement for getting the new money. Interest on these bonds is now
guaranteed by the US Treasury, and the principal is covered by zero-coupon
Treasury bonds. {B81}
The reality of the matter is that one by one, the shaky defaulting
loans, which the banks are liable for, are slowly being replaced by
new loans in the form of bonds which the taxpayer is now indirectly
liable for. Increasingly, YOU own "the pieces of paper" from the 3rd
world country that says that it owes you 100 million dollars.
In other words, taxpayers are being covertly and periodically
fleeced of billions of dollars instantly, and without a consultation!!
The banks and their shareholders who incurred the original debt will end
up with crisp new bills to start off another exciting and lucrative round
of real estate inflation, just for a change of pace. Although there is now
slightly more chance of the principal being repaid, the likelihood of this
happening is still remote.
On the other hand, the economic elite are, through the IMF and World
Bank, able to maintain and exercise political and economic influence, if
not domination, over the 2nd and 3rd world debtor nations by making the
loans conditional to their agreeing to all sorts of fiscal policies such
as "privatization of national resources" which consolidates political and
economic power into the hands of a wealthy few who are eager to make
future deals with the Western elite to increase their wealth and power. By
accepting these conditions, the 3rd World economies are kept vulnerable to
exploitation by the Western superpowers. (i.e. ...political and economic
slavery, as opposed to physical slavery)
For example, in exchange for a recent $500 million loan, the World Bank
bargained with Brazil to allow American banks like Citicorp to engage in
buying Brazilian real estate. Just as America's manufacturing base left
America for cheaper labor abroad, American banks are eyeing the virgin
lands of the 2nd and 3rd World as the next real estate speculation
arenas!! Brazil got the loan all right, but has so far reneged on the new
banking arrangements. Lucky Brazil! The vultures are circling.
{B82}
So far, the government has "guaranteed" more than $30
billion of the World Bank's 3rd World debt, but IMF board members have
begun lobbying to have the IMF funds increased by 80%. Chances are they
will be successful. Additional debt for America's unborn. {B83}
But that's not all.
Besides the new loan "guarantees", there are the additional billions
written off by the banks as bad debts. These "write-downs" are business
expenses which reduce their profits and hence their taxable income. In
1988, Latin debt was written down by about $17 billion.
The above-mentioned measures, and others, were used to insure that the
interest payments kept flowing. This after all is primarily what the
bankers are interested in. Interest payments are the source of their
profits. Most bankers couldn't give a damn about the security of the money
in their banks. Mind you, even though only 3% or 4% of the banks' assets
belong to the bankers themselves, they are still not eager to see a
national run on the banks because bankrupting the banks would ultimately
cut off the source of their income. Consequently bankers have lobbied to
have the bottom 90% encouraged to save, and thus get workers to inject
some equity into the banks to help keep some of them from going bankrupt
due to their gambling losses.
Not surprisingly, the Bush administration is about to launch an
extensive campaign to get the working class to start placing more of their
money into banks. Why? Like the corporations who are trying to sell
corporate debt through ESOPs, bankers want to bail out the banks by
selling their 3rd World debt to unsuspecting depositors. In addition, the
banks want a fresh injection of money to gamble with. Don't forget that
bankers had little or no qualms about using depositors' hard earned cash,
in addition to workers' pension fund money to finance leveraged buyouts.
To them, the money is there to gamble and invest with.
Note well that much of the corporate debt owed by the "leveraged to the
hilt" corporations is currently held by banks, and it is the bank
depositors who will stand to lose their money if the corporations collapse
en masse in a depression.
Fleecing the Social Security and Pension FundsThe only difference
between squirrels who rely on the nuts they have stored away to see them
through the winter, and workers who rely on their pension funds and Social
Security to see them through their retirement years, is that the nuts will
be there, but the Social Security money and Pension
Funds may not be. They are being heartlessly milked by an elite who are
consumed with selfishness and greed. Do you think that sounds a bit harsh?
Well, you be the judge.
Although both the stock market and real estate speculation games are
basically gambling, which involves and risks someone else's capital,
fleecing the Social Security and Pension Funds is barely distinguishable
from outright theft.
Over time, pension funds have a way of increasing in value
substantially, and many private companies hold vast sums of worker's
pension fund money which they invest, and collect interest on. One reason
that pension funds have increased in value so quickly is due to the fact
that their investment income is non-taxable.
However, when one company buys up or takes over another company, the
resultant merger allows the management of the purchasing company to form
a new hybrid company and restructure or reorganize many aspects of
both of the original companies to form the new hybrid firm. The problem is
that the owners of the hybrid firms are allowed to create a "new"
pension fund and in the process, strip off all surplus value that had
accumulated over the years. This siphoning off of surpluses is known
in the industry as "pension reversions". It's probably a moot point
whether the "reversion" refers to the wealth of the pension plan, or to
social progress itself. In any event, money that theoretically belonged to
the workers, has easily been skimmed off to create instant billions for
the hybrid firms' owners. This type of merger leaves in it's wake, a trail
of brand new "virtually poor" pension funds.
Even under normal circumstances, when an insured employee dies, a
corporation is free to pocket the surplus that has accumulated tax free
over the life of the policy. {B84} Here again, value that should
have been paid to the policy holder in compensation for the loss of value
through inflation gets swiftly pocketed by the corporations.
In the last decade alone, huge corporations like Exxon Corp., United
Air Lines, TWA, Union Carbide, and close to 1900 other companies have
stripped off about $20 billion in pension fund surpluses. Exxon siphoned
off $1.6 billion from its employees' $5.6 billion pension fund.
{B85} Currently there is a backlog of over 600 companies waiting
for government approval to do exactly the same thing. {B86}
Under current legislation, if a pension plan is closed down
prematurely, the new owners are only obliged to pay workers what they have
accrued up to that point in time. The normal pension arrangement of
"retiring with a percentage of your salary at retirement time" has been
robbed from countless workers who had served decades of loyal service.
According to a Federal body called the Pension Benefit Guarantee
Corporation which currently underwrites America's pension commitments,
over half of the reversions that have taken place have been replaced
with either vastly inferior pensions, or else the pension plan has been
discontinued entirely!! In 1988 alone, one third of the 230 pension
plans which were closed down, were not replaced! {B87}
These pension plan closures always leave their victims stunned because
few workers can predict who will be next. The majority of workers do not
even anticipate the possibility because the tragedy is seldom if ever
given any attention in the media. This media silence is of course not
accidental.
Most workers expect to retire with pensions, but very few are aware
that no more than 1 in 6 end up collecting them. Too often workers
have retired and submitted a claim for pension benefits only to discover
that for one reason or another, they have been disqualified from receiving
pension benefits by some minor technicality. Many have become victims to
commonly occurring events such as changing union locals; temporary
interruptions to service caused by an industrial accidents or work
shortage layoffs; company bankruptcies; and pension plan terminations.
In fact, the pension problem is so ludicrous that a government official
once put it in these words, "In all too many cases the pension promises
shrink to this:
"If you remain in good health and stay with the same company
until you are sixty-five, and if the company is still in business, and
if your department has not been abolished, and if you haven't been laid
off for too long a period, and if there's enough money in the fund, and
if that money has been prudently managed, you will get a
pension!" What protection does the Federal government
provide for workers' private corporate pension funds? For
starters, the government is by its actions encouraging corporations to
eliminate private pensions plans! The $1.6 trillion dollars of pension
funds still theoretically insured by the Federal government's Pension
Benefit Guarantee Corporation, is being reduced at an alarming rate by
pension plan terminations. Incidentally, the term "theoretically insured"
was used because the PBGC is already carrying on in the red, with a
deficit of $1.5 billion! {B88}
Mr Charles Bowsher, the comptroller-general at the government's General
Accounting Office (GAO) estimates (probably quite conservatively) that
losses in the private pension fund area alone may amount to from $100
billion - $150 billion! {B89} Even if PBGC were not running in the
red, it would not help those folks whose companies closed down their
pension plans and paid out their employees with annuities. First of all,
annuities are not by nature indexed to inflation, but worst of all, the
PBGC does not provide insurance for annuities. If an insurance firm
responsible for the management of the annuities goes bankrupt, and there
are plenty of likely candidates, pensioners would be left completely out
in the cold!
Perhaps you are confident that the Federal government's Social
Security system will come to your rescue? Well, there is ominous
news even there. As with private pension schemes, tax-free interest
generated from the invested pension payroll deductions generates
substantial surpluses each year. The surplus for 1989, which should be
used to index the social security to inflation, amounted to about $56
billion dollars. Although this trust fund is theoretically "off-budget",
the Treasury not only counts the "surplus" as "on budget" for the purposes
of Gramm-Rudman jiggery-pokery, but spends the surplus and hands back to
the social security trust fund some Treasury securities (i.e.IOUs) which
don't increase the nation's acknowledged budget deficit, even though when
it comes time to pay the money out to pensioners there will be IOUs and
not money. {B90} As recently as May 1989, the House Rules Committee
rejected a resolution submitted by Marty Russo (D-Ill) to correct
this very deceit. {B91}
Will there be pension money left for the retiring baby boomers 10-15
years from now? Probably not, if the bottom 90% continue to allow
the economic elite to milk the economy dry. Pension funds will have been
literally skimmed off or terminated to make countless millions for
existing multimillionaires (and of course billionaires). Keep in mind too,
that much of the pension fund money held by corporations on behalf of
their employees is invested with banks. Also be aware that this pension
money is precisely the money that was extracted by the elite through their
"debt for equity" swaps.
Have we been fleeced in any other major way? Sure. The
travesties to economic justice previously discussed have merely been the
ones which seemed most relevant. There are many others. We will however
look at one more. Monetary devaluation.
Monetary DevaluationI hope the following explanation will shed
some light on this seldom discussed but extremely important topic. To do
this we must start with a discussion of how and why bits of paper used as
currency have come to be valued for more than their intrinsic paper value.
Let's start out by saying that everything has a trading value. Since
ancient times, people have traded their labor and possessions for other
people's labor and possessions. Cars, ball-point pens, even old shoes, you
name it, practically any object can be taken anywhere else on the planet
and exchanged for something that the other trader considers to be of
equivalent value. Most things have an obvious value due to their
usefulness, like tools, furniture, real estate, watches, or tractors.
Other objects, like paintings can be valued almost entirely for their
beauty. Gold bars on the other hand are neither functional nor beautiful
in the strictest sense of the terms.
But because gold has always been looked upon as a precious commodity by
practically every social community on the planet, it has been used as a
trading medium for millennia. In fact the longest lived form of tradable
and transportable wealth has been gold in the form of coins. Unlike
livestock and other perishable goods, gold has an intrinsic value because
it does not decay or corrode, and because it has always been a somewhat
scarce commodity. Over time, gold became a symbol for permanent value.
Gold coins "became money" simply because the gold that formed the coins
was valued practically everywhere. Not surprisingly, gold became popular
as a means of transferring large sums of wealth from one country to
another.
In fact, until relatively recently, the value of all coins was based on
the intrinsic value of the precious metals from which they were made. In
other words, coppers had the value of the copper from which they were
made, nickels were worth the value of the nickel they were made of, and
dimes, quarters, and dollars for the silver. Theoretically the quarter
should have weighed two and a half times as much as the dime, and a silver
dollar should have weighed four times as much as a silver quarter. Because
pure gold is a relatively soft metal, people used to bite their gold coins
to see that they were not counterfeits. Slowly but surely, people came to
trust coins as a form of tradable wealth because the governments
guaranteed that coins had a real value based on the value of the precious
metal they were made of.
Now, what about paper money? Paper money supposedly had
value because the governments (those in power, the elite) gave their
guarantee that at any time the paper could be converted into real wealth.
Citizens could exchange a dollar bill into coins which supposedly
contained real wealth in the form of actual silver,
nickel, and copper. It was solely this guarantee that supposedly prevented
the elite from running the paper money presses in the middle of the night
to print as much money as they needed to pay for wars or imported goods.
On some American money you will read the words "In God we trust", but it
is not God in whom we trust to maintain the value of the money, it is the
elite who are in charge of printing the bills and minting the coins.
On July 1 1944, as part of what became known as the Bretton Woods
Agreement, the American government gave its word to the American people
and to the world that in exchange for $35 US paper dollars, the American
government would hand over an ounce of real gold. That was the promise
that gave the American paper dollar its value!! In fact, the vast
warehouse of gold stored at Fort Knox came to be acknowledged and accepted
as the tangible proof of that promise. The American people have had to
trust ever since, that the government would not print any more paper money
than there was real wealth to redeem the bills. That is the understanding
and the promise upon which the value of American paper money has been
based. {B92}
However, neither the government (the elite), nor the media (the
elite) saw fit to make it clear to the American people that the
real wealth and value (upon which the American paper money was based), was
systematically being removed!
Here's how.
As long as a gold coin is made of gold, it can theoretically be taken
to any other country in the world and melted down for the value of the
gold it contains. However, while the US government has exercised exclusive
control over the minting of coins, they have slowly devalued the
currency by minting coins which looked somewhat the same, but which
contained less of the precious metal than they were supposed to contain.
Now the majority of coins in America have scrap metal value only. The
dimes, for example, are no longer made of silver, the quarters are now
made of sandwiched alloys. In other words, over time, the real value of
coins has been stolen!! In case you are wondering, the gold and silver
that used to be in the coins has not disappeared or corroded, it's
weighing down the Swiss vaults like never before.
During the Vietnam war, there were over 500,000 military personnel that
had to be fed, housed, paid, hospitalized and entertained while they
weren't busy dropping expensive bombs, and chemicals on a barefoot peasant
population. This was indeed a very costly war. But the American elite
simply spent, and spent and spent. Of course the elite knew that the
American people would have cut off funds for the war if they had been
given an opportunity to do so. Instead, the elite used the treasury's
printing presses to pay for the Vietnam War. The American government
secretly printed as much paper money as it wanted or needed to carry on
the War. Eventually, foreign bankers, who suspected this might have been
going on (i.e. that paper money was being printed without actually
creating the real wealth to redeem it), called America's bluff by
demanding to redeem their American paper dollars for actual gold.
Finally, on August 15 1971, Richard Nixon refused to redeem 35
American paper dollars for an ounce of real gold!! The deceit had at last
been exposed.
Immediately, the price of gold skyrocketed. Most Americans went to bed
that night knowing that the price of gold had skyrocketed but few knew
why. In reality, it was not the value of gold that rose that fateful day,
it was the value of the American dollar that had taken a nose dive to
adjust to what the world considered the paper dollar was really worth in
relation to an ounce of gold.
The fact that the American government had prevented its citizens from
buying and holding stocks of gold had been no accident, it had wished to
prevent its citizens from ultimately demanding to exchange their own paper
dollars for the gold in Fort Knox. Americans have been purposely kept in
the dark about the systematic devaluation of their money.
The move quickly ushered in a decrease to the American standard of
living second only to that caused by the great market crash of 1929. And
yet few still appreciate what actually happened that day.
It did not take long for the cost of living in America to begin
escalating because Americans had an insatiable appetite for imported
goods, the prices of which had been raised (like the price of gold) to
compensate for the now publicly acknowledged devalued dollar.
Incidentally, insiders who knew that the government was going to
abandon the gold standard (i.e. refuse to sell its gold for $35 dollars an
ounce) made instant fortunes by secretly buying gold abroad before it
happened, and then buying back American dollars once the dollar had been
devalued. And this could very well have been what finally tipped off the
foreign banks to start redeeming their U.S. paper dollars for the real
wealth of gold. The prohibition on buying gold in America prevented a run
on American gold by forcing the insiders (who wished to capitalize on the
inevitable devaluation) to purchase their gold from foreign countries. In
fact, the America elite had for some time been effectively cheating 2nd
and 3rd world nations, by knowingly buying their raw materials and foreign
products with devaluing money.
Americans were already feeling the pinch of expensive European imports
by the time the OPEC nations raised the price of oil. Ironically, this
came as a welcome relief to the American elite, not only because it made
oil in America, both above and below ground, worth billions more for the
oil barons, but because the elite now had a scapegoat on which to focus
blame for the dropping standard of living. Even the higher cost of goods
from abroad could now be totally blamed on the increased cost of Arab oil.
Moreover, because the American people remain virtually blind to this
style of thievery, it has continued unchecked. In the last two years, the
American dollar has been devalued more than 40% against the Japanese yen
and most other foreign currencies!!!
Just remember at all times that the majority of politicians are
actively cooperating to deceive the American people on this and countless
other issues. It is no wonder that the rich don't wish to hold their
wealth in banks where the dollars can be devalued, Instead, they buy real
estate, and real gold, that can't be devalued in this way. Or else they
have their money salted abroad where economies are growing and where
devaluations are most unlikely.
Should anyone be surprised that Mr Bush is about to encourage the
bottom 90% with tax advantages (that only come collectible when withdrawn
upon retirement), to invest their money in banks via Investment Retirement
Accounts (IRAs), and other similar savings instruments such as the "Family
Savings Account" that will lock their money in for the next devaluation
theft. {B93}
Before leaving the topic of economic travesties altogether, the reader
should realize that with the exception of monetary devaluation, the
techniques mentioned in the book have all involved taxation avoidance
perks and incentives. Although the book has described their
disastrous effects within America, the reader should be at least be
partially aware that some of the effects are also felt around the globe,
and especially by the poor in the 3rd World nations.
Repercussions in the Third WorldPerhaps the worst aspect of the
3rd World Debt crisis has been what is referred to in the banking circles
as "flight capital", which refers to the net outflow of money from a
country. First of all, it is commonly acknowledged that despite the
obvious moral implications, money flows North. In other words, more money
flows from the poor 3rd World nations mainly located in the Southern
hemisphere, to the rich 1st World nations primarily located in the
Northern hemisphere, than vice versa. The drain of capital from the
poorest nations to the richest nations is caused by two main factors. The
first reason is the net outflow of interest payments to 1st World banks.
The crux of the problem for these countries lies in the fact that the
amount owed in interest payments quite regularly exceeds a country's total
revenue from exports. (i.e. the country's profits) By not being able to
use their profits to stimulate economic growth in their own economies,
most 3rd World countries are kept on the brink of bankruptcy. Since 1982,
this net outflow of capital from the poor to the rich has amounted
to over $160 billion dollars. But that is only half the tragedy!
More importantly, because the economic elite running the 3rd World
nations realize they cannot milk too much more wealth out of their
bankrupt economies, and because they fear for the safety of the wealth
they have already accumulated, vast quantities of cash have been sent out
of these nations for safe keeping in Swiss and American banks.
Astoundingly, the $300 billion flight capital from Latin America has
already exceeded the total Latin American debt of $257 billion!
Without too much imagination required, one can speculate that much of
the money loaned to the elite went straight into the hands and bank
accounts of the very people who have shipped money out of the country for
safe keeping. While the rich ride out the economic turbulence on their
yachts, much of Latin America has been thrown violently into poverty and
hunger. Argentina's inflation rate, for example, is over 1000%. No wonder
the frustrated workers in 3rd World countries are so quick to loot from
the wealthy when opportunities arise. {B94} In fact, looting occurs
in America with increasing regularity, and probably because poor Americans
too watch helplessly with frustration and anger as the rich get richer and
the poor get poorer.
Just as the American elite are causing hunger and poverty in the 3rd
World nations, the selfish behavior of the economic elite in some 3rd
World nations affects Americans in no less a fashion, and not
surprisingly, due to their taxation avoidance laws.
The destruction of the Brazilian rain forest is a very important case
in point. Tax laws favoring the Brazilian economic elite are affecting the
air the planet breathes, and here's how simply it is happening. The
Brazilian government has for all intents and purposes exempted
agriculture from taxation. This has led businessmen who have
little or no interest in farming to buy as much farm land as they could
from farmers, in order to be able to falsely declare their non-farm income
as farm income to avoid taxation. Needless to say much of the best
agricultural land, that was formerly used to grow food for Brazil, is now
lying fallow. The displaced farmers then had to compete with businessmen
for a share of the remaining rain forest land, which incidentally, is
practically unusable for growing crops. However, because there is a tax on
unimproved land (i.e. land with forest on it), the trees are being chopped
down to avoid taxation. Additional tax credit schemes favoring the cattle
ranchers are further speeding up the process. A handful get rich while the
planet's air supply is jeopardized. {B95}
Yet another planetary rip-off for the feudalists in pinstripes!
A Quick Recap
- 1) We have seen how the elite have used mergers, acquisitions,
takeovers, and leveraged buyouts to undermine the entire U.S. economy by
extracting equity from American Corporations to reinvest overseas. We
have also noted that as a result, the bottom 90% are now being pressured
into buying up America's obsolete, non-competitive, debt-ridden
corporations through ESOPs. In other words, invited to replace the
corporate debt with fresh equity once again.
- 2) We have seen how bank and S&Ls thrift owners use workers'
savings as gambling stakes to make instant fortunes with very little
risk to their own money. And we have seen how taxpayers are subsequently
forced to pay inflated real estate prices and/or to pick up the tab for
their gambling losses.
- 3) We have seen how the banking elite have arranged to have their
defaulting 3rd World loans replaced with federally (taxpayer) guaranteed
loans issued through the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank,
and have seen how tax revenue from banks has been drastically reduced as
a result of the bad loan "write-offs".
- 4) We have seen how the Pension Funds have been milked by skimming
off the surpluses, closing down the pension funds, and forcing the
workers to provide their own pensions with ESOPs.
- 5) We have seen how the interest earned on the Social Security money
paid in by the nation's workers has been quietly siphoned off, spent,
and replaced with I.O.U.s, thus diminishing the old age security
benefits for today's baby boomers.
- 6) We have seen that the elite have even robbed the real value out
of the currency itself and caused Americans' bank savings to be
repeatedly devalued
Arranging The GetawayBecause the elite have milked the
corporations almost dry, run up horrendous bad debts in the banking
system, and siphoned of both the Social Security and private corporation
Pension Funds, it should surprise no one that they now wish to bail out
with the profits.
With all the capital gains recently made from the current wave of "debt
for equity swaps", an immediate need has arisen for the elite to be able
to temporarily bypass taxation on capital gains.
As the ultimate insult, George Bush and his friends are trying to pass
legislation that would drastically reduce the Capital Gains Tax for a
brief two year period. If they succeed, it will allow the super-rich to
take their quick and dirty profits out of the system, and ultimately out
of the country and into the 3rd World to inflict the same exploitive
tricks and measures on less sophisticated victims. Economically rape a
country, and then head off for virgin territory to do it all over again.
Do the elite care who follows in their wake to buy up the bankrupt
banks and corporations? Not really, their allegiance is not to any
country, but to profits. And at this stage of the game, they can make more
profit abroad, especially because the American taxpayer has already paid
for their existing foreign factories.
On September 14 1989, the House Ways and Means committee voted to
approve a temporary cut in the capital gains tax. {B96} The
potential cost to taxpayers in lost tax revenues will be horrendous. In
the wake of a decade of leveraged buyouts, George Bush's intention of
drastically reducing the capital gains tax for a two year period is
somewhat equivalent to his saying "...let's show some goodwill to
society's thieves by leaving the prison gates half open for about
five minutes". {B97}
The bottom 90% have been fleeced and will continue to be fleeced in any
and every way the elite feel they can get away with, without provoking an
out and out popular revolt.
Sooner or later, wage earners must learn to equate the
dollars they pay into the tax kitty, with dollars that the banks and
corporations don't pay into the same kitty. A dollar is a dollar! Every
billion dollars not paid in taxes by the corporations or banks will have
to be made up by the wage earners, ...or else additional health
benefits, education benefits, or retirement benefits will get
axed!! And that's the bottom line!!!!
What can be done? Plenty. The following ideas are provided as a
springboard for discussions or reforms.
Possible Corrective ActionFrom Feudal times, the taxation system
has been at the very heart of economic inequities. By using their
influence to shape taxation policies, the economic elite have not only
maintained, but are currently dramatically increasing their concentration
of wealth.
Radical Tax Reforms are RequiredWe are faced with the situation
today, whereby tax avoidance opportunists have reduced the government's
revenue mechanism, based on "taxable income", to a shameful display of
contempt for social equality and fair play.
Just 4 of the 300 companies involved in leverage buyouts and takeovers
(Safeway, Macy's, Unocal, and RJR/Nabisco), represent a potential annual
loss of Federal and State tax revenues amounting to roughly $2.2 billion
dollars. Additionally, they represent billions more in scandalous tax
rebates.
The possible tax avoidance from these 4 companies alone is equivalent
to 400,000 taxpayers, each with $25,000 in "after deductions" taxable
income, ceasing to pay their taxes. Can you imagine the media storm and
congressional outrage that would ensue if 400,000 taxpayers refused to pay
their taxes!!
We must no longer allow the government to simply go through the
motions of trying to keep one step ahead of the corporate tax lawyers
and economic opportunists. Only RADICAL TAX REFORMS will now put an end to
economic bondage.
Safeway, Unocal, Macy's, RJR Nabisco, and hundreds of other
corporations, and innumerable wealthy individuals as well, have displayed
all too clearly the absurdity of basing tax revenues on taxable income.
Tax Wealth ! ...Not Income(Achieving this reform should be
Priority # 1) The simplest, fairest, and most logical approach to
taxation would be to assess taxes proportionally based on the degree of
one's ownership of assets. If the justification for doing so is not
already intuitively obvious, consider the issue with regard to the cost of
defense.
Logically, all citizens share an equal interest in defending life and
limb. However, for the economic elite, defense spending is an insurance
premium spent to safeguard their physical property. This includes all the
nation's factories and manufacturing plants, all the nation's towering
office blocks, and of course the majority of the nation's residential real
estate which is owned as much or more by wealthy landowners and banks, as
by those who actually occupy the mortgaged dwellings. The cost of the
insurance should logically be paid proportionately by those who own the
equity of the property. Why should an individual, who owns little or
no property or wealth, be forced to risk his or her life on the
battlefield, or even to pay the insurance premium (i.e. the defense bill)
to protect assets belonging to an economic elite who are otherwise
indifferent to his or her well-being or suffering. This is especially
relevant in light of the fact that, like Vice-president Quayle, the elite
rarely risk their own lives on the front lines. They're the ones who end
up in the hidden fortified strategy bunkers, if they choose to participate
at all.
Defense is, however, just one of the nation's costs that should
logically be prorated based on wealth distribution. If the top 1 percent
own 50% of the nation's wealth (as a study by the University of Michigan
has shown), then let them pay 50% of the 3 trillion dollar defense bill.
Perhaps they may not be so hawkish if they had to pay their proper share
of the defense bill. In short, if you own little or nothing of the
nation's wealth, you pay little or nothing of the nation's tax bill.
Simple, fair, and effective. Taxing the nation's wealth would yield
another benefit that would, by itself, justify the policy:
Deficits would be a phenomenon of the past!The
government would simply figure out, as per normal, how much money it
required to operate for the next fiscal year. The treasury would then take
the amount required, and figure out how much prorated tax would be owed
"for each $100,000 of equity owned", in order to collect the "exact"
amount required. The principal is not new, many municipal governments
assess school taxes based on property value assessments.
One's "Taxable Assets" would be based on one's total assets, especially
including those assets "invested abroad" to take advantage of the
remaining slave labor pools, or currently held abroad in tax havens. Very
heavy fines and penalties could be devised to adequately discourage those
hiding wealth at home or abroad. (undeclared wealth) Americans could at
last begin to benefit from all the industries they paid to have built
abroad.
There would be no more advantage to giving your company or yacht to
your dog Spot, or to your one day old child, because whomever or whatever
legal entity owned the equity would be taxed.
***
- 1a. Limit Earnings (Not a real Alternative)
A less
desirable, and less beneficial social alternative, would be to limit the
amount of wealth one can earn annually to a multiple of what the least
paid worker gets for full time employment. (perhaps 20 times the minimum
wage)
In Financial World's July 11 1989 survey of
Wall Street's "100 best paid", George Baker, who finished in 71st spot
still earned an average of $3,846.00 per hour. {B98} In
Forbes's October 16 1989 issue, attention was given to America's
highest paid lawyers. Their list of 63 trial lawyers earned $750
million collectively. Based on a 40 hour work week and 52 working weeks
per year, this represents an average compensation of $5,723.44 per
hour!!
Should anyone be respected who vetoes a raise in the minimum wage to
$4.55 per hour, or should someone who gets run off their feet serving
fast foods for the minimum wage feel content that this group of lawyers
earn on average seventeen hundred (1700) times as much per hour? In a
similar way, Michael Milken, who made his money from selling LBO junk
bonds, did so at the staggering rate of $213,346.00 per hour.
This wage control approach would at last put reins on members of our
society such as the legal profession, who seem content to make their
services too expensive for the bottom 90% of society to afford, while
taking full advantage of the services of citizens who are, relatively
speaking, being paid as slaves. (on $3.35 per hour minimum wage, or even
$10 or $15 dollars per hour)
Egyptian slave labor built pyramids, whereas American slave labor
builds tall rectangular skyscrapers. The alternate perspective is to
view the pyramid builders not as slaves, but simply as workers who
derived less benefit from their labor than the pharaohs.
We should not forget for one moment either, that when a corporation
is forced to pay a court settlement, the losses (which include the
lawyers fees) simply get passed along to the consumer, one way or
another.
Even if strict "progressive" taxation on earnings in excess of say 20
times the minimum wage were introduced, the approach would still be
susceptible to tax evasion because it would be based on Taxable
Income. Safeway, Boeing or Walt Disney could still end up paying
less taxes than a pensioner forced to supplement a meager income by
fetching your french fries!!
- 2. Make investment in America mandatory
Instead of having
to show one's loyalty to the country by swearing allegiance to the flag,
or feigning one's loyalty by wrapping oneself in a flag, simply pass
a law requiring all American citizens to invest at least three
quarters of their assets within America. I have a sneaking suspicion
that doing so would completely eliminate the unemployment problem.
Perhaps even consider allowing Americans to invest abroad only if there
is no unemployment at home. This policy would no doubt also ameliorate
racial and economic problems involving the minorities.
- 3. Provide harsh deterrents for white collar crime
Many
business practices that should be illegal, are not. A good example is
that few money-laundering bankers are in jail anywhere in the world.
Criminal laws have a tendency to ignore the elite as they have since
Feudal times. This must be changed. For every crook handling large
quantities of money (as with the drug trade), there is a banker! To
consider these bankers, who quite obviously turn a blind eye to the
source of large deposits, any less of an integral part of the criminal
activity is to ignore reality. Because the elite own the banks and
benefit directly from money laundering, laws have not been written to
deter this type of criminal activity. Laws must be written to convict
the elite who benefit from criminal activity. Their wealth should also
be confiscated ...as is currently done with the smaller fish who
accumulate wealth from illegal activities such as the drug trade.
- 4. Eliminate the transferability of tax losses
This would
eliminate the additional tax evasion related to the disposition of
companies involved in leveraged buyouts, as well as the growing problem
concerning the virtual sale of the hundred billion dollars worth of tax
losses relating to the failing and failed S&Ls.
- 5. Disallow interest payments as tax deductions
North
Dakota Democrat, Byron L. Dorgan is again behind a bill which is a
modification of one which he introduced only days before the October 19,
1987 market crash. A study by the Securities and Exchange Commission
suggests that the original bill (which would have largely removed the
LBO tax deduction incentive) may well have triggered the 10% decline in
prices on the 14th, 15th and 16th of October 1987, which in turn may
have set the market up for the further 20% sell-off which occurred on
the following Monday.
If the SEC findings are to be believed, one would have to accept
that corporations are valued less for their capacity to provide
products and services, than for their artificial value as profit
vehicles for speculators.
In any case, Congressman Dorgan's bill, even in its present watered
down form, would serve to discourage the continuing wave of takeovers.
Unfortunately by now (two years later), most of the takeovers have
already occurred, but better late than never.{B99}The very least
that should be done is to invalidate the tax deductibility of interest
payments on indebtedness which exceeds the owner equity.
{B100}
- 6. Raise bank owner's equity to at least 25%
Limit the
amount of money taken in by banks as deposits, to three times the amount
of equity put up by the bank's shareholders. In other words, raise the
matched equity from 4% to 25%. Gambling within the economy only occurs
to the extent that it does, because the gamblers are basically not
risking their own equity.
- 7. In bankruptcies, make family wealth partially accessible.
Make it impossible for the unscrupulous to grow steadily richer
while leaving a trail of unpaid creditors and bankrupt businesses.
Consider making wealth owned by spouses and dependent children at least
partially accessible to the bankruptcy creditors.
- 8. Back the currency with REAL wealth
Ensure the currency
is backed by real wealth, perhaps even by returning to the gold
standard.
- 9. Privatization and Deregulation
Lastly, I must mention
two extremely important topics which were only very briefly addressed in
this chapter. They are:
- Privatization of nationally owned industries.
- Deregulation of industries.
Both are essentially
concessions to the economic elite, and have already cost the bottom 90%
of Western societies an incredible loss of benefits. Each affects the
working man's standard of living in no less a fashion than the bailout
of banks and S&Ls, or the loss of tax revenue following LBOs.
Neither topic was dealt with adequately because each merited more
coverage than I was prepared to devote in this book. The media has
largely avoided discussing either topic objectively or in depth, mainly
because both yield benefits to the economic elite by the removal of
benefits from the rest of the country.
Privatization amounts to a politically motivated,
quid pro quo distribution of previously developed national wealth to
the richest 10%.
Deregulation gives the unscrupulous a freer hand to
sacrifice standards and service for profit
maximization. Just as deregulation in the banking industry
caused the taxpayer a $300 billion S&L mop-up headache, deregulation
in other industries has had similar drastic repercussions.
Deregulation of the airline industry, for instance, allowed for
profit oriented reductions to maintenance programs. Within no time at all, planes were breaking up in mid air,
cracked fuselages were being sent up till the doors blew off and the sky
was visible from the passenger section, etc.. Competition was
drastically reduced as the industry was reduced through mergers and
acquisitions to six mega-carriers which fly about 90% of all passengers.
To add to the problems, foreign airlines funded some of the industry
takeovers. But worst of all, the cost of financing the LBOs was passed
directly on to the passengers in the form of ticket price rises.
{B101}
Other sectors of our economy have been given the opportunity to set
their own standards, with similar benefits to the general public. The
reader should, out of self defense, become more concerned and informed
regarding these two additional issues. However, discussion of the
rip-offs must of necessity terminate to get on with other equally
important issues.
Let's now turn our attention to the democratic process itself to
expose just how and why politicians elected by the bottom 90% continue
to churn out legislation that does not serve the best interests of the
majority whom they supposedly represent. As we shall see, gaining
control over the writing of the tax avoidance legislation may not be as
simple a task as those who trust in their democracy may think. Don't
forget that the politicians voted in by the bottom 90%, are the very
same politicians who pass the tax avoidance legislation favoring the
elite!!
The next chapter is therefore devoted to showing that just as the
nation has been manipulated and victimized economically, it has been
manipulated and victimized with respect to democracy. In America,
democracy is as much a hoax as equal opportunity and equitable
prosperity. Does that sound unreasonable or even impossible? Then read
on.
Chapter 2 The Hoax of Democracy
There is easily as much myth, illusion, and deceit built
into the concepts of democracy as there is with the myth of equitable
prosperity. Democracy, and American democracy in particular, is
certainly not as cut and dried as it may superficially appear.
Trojan Democracy
To begin with, it would do well to keep in mind that Greek
democracy, after which the Western democracies were patterned, ran on
slave labor! Most of the mundane work of Greek society was carried out by
a large work force of slaves, who like the Feudal serfs and the early
American black slaves, exerted virtually no influence over their masters.
Additionally, the majority of the Greek population, comprised
collectively of the slaves, plus the Greek women, were prohibited from
voting! So, in the sense that Americans use the word democracy, Greece
did not have a democracy because much less than half the population voted.
Be wary of capitalists bearing
democracy. Unfortunately, nowadays most Americans have been
programmed into simply equating democracy with voting. In reality, the
ballot box does not automatically ensure democracy. On the contrary,
it can also be used as a tool to defeat the will of the majority.
For example, in countries like Chile, elections such as were held in
October 1988, are as dangerous as they are superficially promising.
Although Pinochet suffered a landslide loss at the polls, he disregarded
the results and refused to give up his power as dictator. Despite his loss
at the polls, holding an election was of great benefit to him. It not only
mapped out clearly where his supporters lived, but where the greatest
concentrations of his political opponents lived! While the ballot system
is only secret at the individual level, it can and does in reality expose
whole villages to the threat of death squads. Death squads simply love
democracy, it makes their job so much easier.
In El Salvador, America pumped in more than $5 billion during the last
decade to prop up the virtual dictatorship of President Jose Napoleon
Duarte whose death squads have so terrorized the electorate (by
assassinating unsympathetic mayors), that over a third of the country's
262 municipalities are without a head. {B102} {B103}Although the concept (of exposing one's city, town, or
village to the threat of death squads) may have little meaning in America,
it does expose, however, that in countries where death squads prevail, it
is meaningless to point to election results either as proof of a
dictator's popularity or as justification for continued economic and
military support from America.
In Columbia, the left-wing Patriotic Union party had its presidential
candidate murdered in October 1987, and its deputy leader murdered on
March 3 1989. Furthermore, 29 of its 87 candidates for mayoral office in
the 1986 elections have since been murdered. {B104}
In Guatemala, which normally makes America's top 10 list for foreign
aid (as does El Salvador), more than 150,000 citizens have been murdered
since the CIA helped to topple the democratically elected President Arbenz
back in 1950.
So, having looked briefly at Greek, and death squad democracy, it
should be obvious that democracy comes in many guises. And, because it
does serve both good and evil purposes equally well, let's objectively
look at how democracy is being used in America.
Quite logically, American democracy should have at least two
obvious characteristics:
- 1) Each adult in America should be able to vote, and each vote
should have equal value.
- 2) The result of the voting should quite understandably reflect the
will of the majority.
Since everyone in America can vote, the
system should reflect the will of the majority. However, it would be both
naive and absurd to assume that the bottom 90% voluntarily choose to have
a socioeconomic arrangement whereby not just one but two minority groups
own more wealth than they. Obviously, American democracy
does not reflect the will of the bottom 90%, so we will now investigate
the methods used by the elite to successfully subvert the democratic
process to ensure that wealth and economics still constitute the real
power and controlling forces as they always have.
The first method worth considering is closely related to death squad
democracy, in that the votes cast in America also show the exact locations
where opposition party strengths are located. But instead of sending death
squads, Western politicians simply alter the electoral district boundaries
to maximize their seat winning potential for the next elections. This old
democracy defeating ploy is called "gerrymandering", and is still used
throughout the West by those who have contempt for democracy.
Like the death squads, gerrymanderers love democracy too!
However, with regard to contempt for democracy, no one does a better
job at defeating democracy than the country's lawmakers. {B105}
The Power of Lawmakers
Since society's laws determine the structure of society
and how it operates, democracy boils down to getting control over the
lawmaking process. To begin with, the rich have always known the power
that accompanies the writing of the rules, and that is why they
have never allowed that power to slip out of their grasp. After all, the
laws determine not only who does or doesn't pay taxes, but also who
benefits from the collected tax money. Thus, control of law gives control
over the making and keeping of wealth.
The Founding Fathers were also acutely aware of the role of
legislation, so, in an attempt to prevent the economic elite from
continuing to use their power to manipulate the rest of society, they
wrote a Constitution that attempted to banish Feudal conditions forever.
As you may have guessed,
The original constitution never intended that the top 1%
should be capable of possessing more wealth than the combined wealth of
the bottom 90 percent. If it did, then the constitution was a Feudal
charter right from the beginning! To have strayed so far
from the original visionary concepts, old laws have had to be altered, and
new ones introduced. And this is where the elected politicians enter the
picture. They introduce bills that they themselves vote into law. Not
surprisingly, the bills they introduce and make into law reflect to whom
they have given their allegiance. This is precisely why there is a glut of
very complex taxation orientated laws favoring the elite and their
corporations.
Conservatism vs Liberalism
The long and short of it is that since the Founding
Fathers departed, the elite have used their wealth and power to introduce
countless tax laws that maintain and even enhance the Feudal wealth
distribution structure.
That is what "Conservatism" is all about! That is
also why the elite go so far out of their way to discredit "Liberalism",
which allows for changes to the status quo. "Conservatism" maintains the
status quo and that in turn ensures the rich stay rich and the poor stay
poor. The reason we have a democratic society being run as a Feudal
oligarchy lies not with a faulty constitution, but with a subversive
voting system that connects the elite directly with the politicians.
Lobbying (America's #1 Voting System)
American laws cater to the special interests of the feudal
elite, not because the existing popular system of voting is at fault, but
because America has, not just one, ...but two voting systems!!
In the first voting system, the general public is allowed, every few
years, to put a tick on a voting ballot that almost totally prevents them
from having any say whatsoever with regard to controversial issues of the
day. Prior to the election, discussion of important controversial topics
is avoided wherever possible in favor of discrediting one's opponent, or
getting lost behind a patriotic smoke screen.
In the second and somewhat covert voting system, roughly 23,000
lobbyists swarm over Capitol Hill every day to fight for favors on behalf
of the "special interest groups" that can afford to hire them. On a
daily basis, the economic elite can send their legion of lawyers to
talk directly with specific congressmen to make bargains with the
legislators behind closed doors.
What kind of favors do the wealthy bargain for? Well, they
bargain for such goodies as personal or corporate income tax concessions,
or a means of getting around the inheritance tax, or for price subsidies,
or write-offs for any number of things, or to have the capital gains tax
reduced even further, etc., etc.,.
Why do the elite have so much power over the legislators? ...two
reasons. To get elected, a politician requires votes. To get votes a
candidate requires campaign support in the form of money and publicity.
Nowadays, getting elected is a very, very costly business. Even though
most politicians have small personal fortunes, few politicians would be
willing to personally fund their own campaigns and risk losing the bulk of
their personal wealth just for an opportunity to unselfishly serve the
public. In big states like New Jersey or Illinois, a candidate in the 1990
elections can easily require $10 million to compete. {B106} In
1988, the average Senator spent $4 million to campaign. {B107} So
even those with a few million can end up on the payroll through the need
for election campaign support.
Therefore a politician doesn't even get to first base without the
support of a sympathetic media and without financial contributions from
benefactors with money to spare. This, for all intents and
purposes, excludes the bottom 90%, and leaves corporations, wealthy
individuals, and other business interests.
Democracy could still theoretically function under
these circumstances except for one important point. Those who fund the
politicians either openly or covertly demand favors in return.
...exit "POPULAR" DEMOCRACY! ...ENTER "SPECIAL
INTEREST" DEMOCRACY!
The second reason why the elite have so much influence over the
legislators, is that to a politician, there is only one thing more
important than getting elected, and that is getting reelected!
Consequently, they enter politics eager to bargain for reelection campaign
support which is required every two years. Once elected, politicians know
that from that point on they must win favor of the moneyed interests who
will eventually finance their reelections. And that is the bottomline.
By using this leverage, the lobby community effectively purchases
whatever favorable legislation it needs! Democracy, if you can call it
that, goes covertly to the highest bidder!
The first voting system serves the public, the second serves the elite.
Not surprisingly, the one that serves the elite is much more powerful
because the lobbyists can vote daily, and they can seek specific and
obscure minor changes to the wording and meaning of previous legislature
that can greatly favor a special interest group, ...usually to the
detriment of the rest of society. A good example of this was the lobbying
carried out by the rich wine making Gallo family regarding an inheritance
tax exemption that has since come to be known as the "Gallo Amendment".
{B108} The reader can get a rough idea of the ultimate cost to the
taxpayer in lost taxes, as a direct result of this family's successful
lobbying, by reading the article "Before the loophole closes" on page 239
of the Oct 2 1989 issue of Forbes. {B109}
Another reason that the lobby system works so well and seems so firmly
entrenched is that nowadays most politicians already have a few million
dollars in personal wealth, and politics presents an opportunity to
increase their social and economic contacts in order to multiply their
personal wealth more rapidly.
Since the system's legislation clearly favors the richest 10%, and more
specifically the richest 1%, it's evident that the elite have more
effective power using their lobby voting system than the majority do using
their tick on a ballot. In many ways, a tick on a ballot every few years
has about the same effect as a tick on an elephant every few years.
Disguising the "Favors for Favors" Payoffs
The discouraging aspect regarding payoffs is that the
variety of methods used to disguise an exchange of favors seem
limitless. And while many methods used may be
transparent in their function, and ethically despicable, few if any are
illegal.
- 1) The traditional "cash-in-the-envelope" method has given way to a
host of new methods.
- 2) For example, kickbacks have for a long time masqueraded as
generous "speaking fees" which are referred to euphemistically as
"honoraria". Public uproar eventual led to a ceiling of $2000 per
speech. Nevertheless, honoraria collected in 1988 alone amounted to more
than $9 million. {B109}
- 3) In a token gesture to diffuse growing public criticism regarding
campaign fund-raising corruption, congress made it illegal for a
political candidate to accept more than $1000 from any single donor,
plus $1000 more from the donor's spouse, or a total of $2000 per family.
However, Political Action Committees (PACs) could each give $5000 to a
candidate. Critics relaxed a bit, but not for long. Overnight, thousands
of Political Action Committees sprang up to absorb the usual huge
donations from single donors, now broken down into $2,000 and $5000
increments. {B111} One fund raiser complained of having to stay
up one night to mechanically sign a mountain of papers which listed him
as either the chairman or treasurer of yet another Political Action
Committee. {B112} There are currently 4,268 Political Action
Committees in existence. In 1987-88, candidates received $151 million
from PACs. {B113} By now the reader should know that the elite
only ever go through the motions of making amends for their ways. You
could push the Empire State Building through the contribution loopholes.
- 4) For example, there is no limit to the amount an individual can
contribute to state groups for "party-building activities". This means a
billionaire can contribute his $1 million cheque to be spent on a voter
registration drive in his chosen candidate's district. In other words,
it saves the candidate from having to spend his or her private campaign
funds to do the same job. The result is the same. The billionaire's
cheque just isn't personally addressed to the candidate. And the
candidate does not have to declare a cent of it.
- 5) In a similar way, although an organization (such as the National
Rifle Association) can give only $5,000 directly to a given candidate,
the association can launch a direct-mail, or TV promotional campaign
which directly supports a specific candidate. Don't forget, these are
not tax loopholes that are supposedly thought up to bypass the will of
Congress. These loopholes are purposely left by
Congress to carry on with "business as usual". The restraint legislation
is strictly meant to dupe the public and to diffuse public criticism.
- 6) Another loophole is referred to by politicians as "Bundling"
which will effectively negate the PAC limit of $5,000. For example, in
1987-88, Senator Bill Bradley received a "bundle" of 60 cheques, each
for $1,000, which had been donated by the executives (and I suppose
their spouses as well), from just two Wall Street firms. {B114}
- 7) The "Grandfather Clause", on the other hand, blatantly launders
the favors for favors "donations"!! The grandfather clause, dear to so
many politician's hearts, allows members of Congress to keep, for their
own use in retirement, any unspent PAC contributions. So far, some 190
incumbents have amassed "unspent donations" totaling over $39 million.
{B115} Dan Rostenkowski, Chairman of the Ways and Means
Committee, for one, has accumulated more than a million. {B116}
In this age where elections are won and lost on TV, smear ads, and other
expensive promotional gimmickry, these large election campaign war
chests constitute a formidable advantage to incumbents. All too often,
money wins elections.
- 8) Another practice which is wide open to abuse, and difficult to
monitor involves the loophole where, in exchange for some lobbying,
politicians can receive tens of thousands in "consulting fees". John
Mitchell (Nixon's former Attorney General), and former Interior
Secretary James Watt, among others, have served as consultants for
Housing and Urban Development (HUD) projects. {B117} HUD was rife
with favoritism and kickback scandals.
Quid Pro Quo In Action
No better example will serve to demonstrate the quid pro
quo arrangement that underlies American politics than through an
acquaintance with the circumstances surrounding the failure of a
particular S&L, Lincoln Savings and Loan of Irvine California. First a
brief introduction.
The S&L problems began in 1982 with the introduction of the
Garn-St.Germain Act (introduced by Senator Jake Garn (R-Utah)), which had
to do with deregulating the banking industry. Deregulation in a nutshell
amounts to less regulation and less supervision. The first relaxation of
regulations actually occurred in 1981, when S&Ls were permitted to
offer variable-rate mortgages. In 1982 they were
allowed to branch into business loans and into the funding of developers'
real estate ventures. {B118} The relationships that soon evolved
between developers and S&L owners amounted to real estate speculation
teams. The speculation binge that resulted created an artificial boom that
made billions of quick and easy profits for existing multimillionaires,
before eventually going bust in a big way. Hell-bent on deregulation, the
Reagan Administration even denied the Federal Home Loan Bank Board money
to increase the number of its regulators.
And now to the Lincoln fiasco.
When Mr Charles Keating, a lawyer, purchased Lincoln Savings and Loan
for $51 million back in 1984, it had assets worth 1 billion. In one of his
investment ventures later that same year, Keating used Lincoln's federally
insured S&L deposits to effectively make $30 million in "greenmail"
profit involving a take over bid for Dallas-based Gulf Broadcasting Co.
{B119} Then in 1985, Mr Keating hired none other than the present
chairman of the Federal Reserve Board, Mr Alan Greenspan, to lobby
government to allow diversification from home loans into direct equity
investments. In fact, Mr Greenspan praised Lincoln as "a financially
strong institution that presents no foreseeable risk to the Federal
Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation". Mr Greenspan was successful. Mr
Keating was virtually free to speculate directly. Mr Greenspan's lobbying
had in effect pulled the cork. By October 1986 when San Francisco
regulators first investigated Lincoln, the S&L already had
unreported losses of $135 million. The regulators started putting
pressure on Mr Keating.
At this stage Mr Keating first called in four of the five Senators
(that would later come to be called the "Keating Five") to lobby on his
behalf. The Senators, who were all recipients of Keating's generous
campaign support, received the following: Senator Alan Cranston of
California, $974,000; Senators John McCain of Arizona, $125,000; Dennis
DeConcini of Arizona, $48,000; Senator John Glenn of Ohio, $234,000; and
Senator Riegle of Michigan, $76,000. The first four Senators lobbied the
Washington-based head of the Home Loan Bank Board, Mr Edwin Gray, on April
2 1987, in Senator DeConcini's office. Mr Gray, who later commented
that the four senators "came at me like lawyers arguing for a client",
refused to be bullied into submission and suggested that they deal
directly with the San Francisco Bank Board regulators under whose
jurisdiction Lincoln actually fell.
One week later, they did. But this time the four original Senators were
joined by Donald Riegle, now Chairman of the Senate Banking,
Housing and Urban Affairs Committee. The San Francisco
regulators held to their position that Lincoln should be shut down.
Soon after this meeting Mr Gray in Washington was replaced by Mr Danny
Wall, who had been the top aide of Senator Garn (who had begun the
reckless spree in the first place). Mr Wall acted quickly to prevent the
San Francisco branch of his Board from shutting Lincoln down by
transferring the regulatory authority for Lincoln Savings and Loan from
San Francisco to Washington, and thus under his direct control.
{B120} It is estimated that the 20 month delay to the closure of
Lincoln Savings that resulted (caused collectively by the five senators
and Danny Wall), will cost the taxpayers an additional $1.5 billion
dollars. {B121} In all, the cost to taxpayers for the failure of
this S&L alone, is estimated at from $2 billion to 2.5 billion.
Few articles have conveyed the favors for favors mechanism underlying
American politics better than the article entitled "An amazing tale" on
page 66 of the August 26 1989 issue of The Economist, which deals with the
Lincoln Savings and Loan debacle. If you next read "High-Rolling Texas:
The State That Ate FSLIC", you probably won't need to read much more about
how Congress operates. {B122}
However, if you are a glutton for punishment, I would certainly
recommend you read the following additional related articles, but make
sure you have a sick-bag handy when you read them.
Start with "The Seduction Of Senator Alan Cranston which appeared on
page 82 of the December 4 1989 issue of Business Week. {B123} Then
try the article entitled "DeConcini Banks On Voter Loyalty" in the Dec 18
1989 issue of Insight which disclosed, among other things, that DeConcini
and family had made a 540% profit on parcels of land that they, through
privileged political knowledge, knew were to be used for a $3.8 billion
canal project called Central Arizona Project. The DeConcinis, it seems,
did not share this information with the folks whom they purchased the
lands from. {B124} The article also mentions that Senator McCain
flew in Keating's private plane on several occasions to the Bahamas to
vacation and enjoy hospitality in Keating's house.
In short, each of the articles gives a tip of the iceberg peek into the
general ethical standards of the men running the nation, and does a fine
job in helping to put American democracy in perspective.
But the Lincoln incident is not an isolated incident,
quid pro quo is practically the only game in town.
Additional insights on the topic of quid pro quo can be gained from
reading "How one family handles its finances", on page 42 of the June 12
1989 issue of Forbes, which outlined how Jim Wright, the ex Speaker of the
House was able to enhance his lifestyle beyond the normal limits of his
Congressional salary. {B125} It is worth noting too that in 1986,
Jim Wright also used his lobby power on behalf of his fellow Texans to
prevent Mr Edwin Gray from putting the squeeze on the S&L industry. I
guess it was his way of thanking the thrift and real estate interests who
had donated $240,000 to his 1986 campaign war chest.
Meanwhile, in an effort to stamp out thrift examiners, Texans killed a
measure in committee in 1987 that would have increased the pay of thrift
examiners, whose starting pay is only $18,500.
Honest Politicians
Wait just a minute. In all fairness, should not the honest
politicians be given some credit too? Yes indeed they should, no matter
how few in number they may be.
One such individual is Mr Henry Gonzalez, chairman of the House of
Representatives' banking committee, who played such an important part in
exposing the Lincoln abuses. He is busy investigating another S&L
called Silverado which appears just as worthy of headlines. It is alleged
that Silverado, like Lincoln, was involved in buying up assets (mainly
junk bonds) which had been first artificially pumped up in value by being
sold profitably back and forth between selected insiders (prior to selling
the overpriced assets to the various S&Ls involved. The insiders
allegedly included among others, Colorado-based Silverado S&L,
California-based Lincoln S&L, a Miami-based thrift called CenTrust,
Houston-based San Jacinto Savings (owned by the now bankrupt Southmark),
and a troubled Colorado property development company called MDC Holdings
which worked closely with Silverado S&L.
The interesting point to note is that it was Mr Larry Mizel, chairman
of MDC Holdings who introduced President Bush when he surprisingly showed
up at a Republican fund-raising lunch in Denver in late 1989. Mr Mizel's
company is at the center of a federal investigation of Silverado S&L
which had as one of its directors none other than one of President Bush's
sons, Neil. Both Silverado and Mr Mizel's company (MDC) are being
investigated by the honest politician Mr Gonzalez.
Neil Bush, the President's son, was a director of
Silverado from 1985-1988, during which time the alleged artificial profit
taking was occurring. Silverado's bailout alone cost the taxpayers over $1
billion.
Not only that, the man who provided the insider connection between all
these entities was none other than Michael Milken the junk bond king. He
provided the means for the entities to buy up each other's thrift junk
bonds. Should anyone be surprised? Perhaps I should have warned the
readers to wear knee high rubber boots when approaching politics for a
closer view, because it's literally impossible to get a close look into
the pig trough without being surrounded by some pretty foul smelling mire.
{B126}
Keep your nose plugged, because I have to tell you that even George
Bush's campaign manager, Thomas Loeffler (another Texan) solicited support
from the Reagan Administration to appoint lobbyist Texan Durward Curlee to
the Federal Home Loan Bank Board. Loeffler's client list was a virtual
Who's Who of S&L owners, and Curlee was once executive director of the
Texas Savings and Loan League. Again it's foxes minding the chicken coop.
Jay Leno, an American talk-show comedian had a brilliant suggestion.
Because there is such a shortage of prison space in America, why not build
a high wall around Capitol Hill and the White House and convert the whole
area into a State Prison!!
Red-handed but definitely not Red-faced
We are currently going through an era where money and
favors are being dished out so fast and furiously, that in the scramble,
players are losing track of the need to conceal the graft and corruption.
When politicians get caught nowadays, they don't consider remorse or guilt
any more, ...only anger and indignation at perhaps losing their place at
the trough. One or two examples from the countless available will serve to
illustrate this brazen new technique for sidestepping justice.
Although Mr Wall resigned in December to help take some of the heat off
the issue, {B127} and Mr Keating began taking the 5th amendment,
{B128} the cocky senators have not stepped down because what they
did is no different from what virtually everyone else in Washington is
doing. After the scandal was uncovered, Senator Riegle returned his
campaign contributions in a naive bid to buy back his innocence. Senator
McCain eventually reimbursed Mr Keating for his plane rides. Later he
commented, "I've openly and candidly admitted it was a mistake for me to
not reimburse on time". {B129} But like Nixon and Oliver North, all
five senators are well aware that defiance and continued declarations of
innocence are honored and rewarded, because it gives the establishment a
chance to use the mass media to do what they can to diffuse the issue.
For starters, it is practically unthinkable for
lawyers to admit guilt, and so even though an increasing number of
Washington lawyers or their clients get caught red-handed, they, like
Oliver North, take their chances at riding out the controversy, because
history has proven that this approach works best. To weather the storm,
some or all of the following tactics are almost always employed:
- DENY guilt
- DECLARE innocence
- DELAY the investigation and/or prosecution proceedings
- DESTROY any incriminating evidence.
Why have these
tactics come to be used so often, so successfully, and increasingly more
openly on Capitol Hill? Mainly because these four tactics are the most
successful tactics used in law today, and Capitol Hill is literally
teeming with lawyers. Sixty out of 100 senators, and 186 out of 435
House members have law degrees, as have the majority of the Senate and
House Judiciary Committee members. {B130} Needless to say, the
lobbyists are basically lawyers as well. Congress, is little more than a
fraternity of lawyers. Capitol Hill is to lawyers what Wall street is to
MBAs.
Those who are forced to disembark from the gravy train are usually
compensated by the elite for their past loyalty. The media elite quite
often help out by promoting their books, or by tucking them under a wing
as they did with Nixon in subsequent years.
The special interest lobbying and subsequent legislation that allowed
for easy overnight wealth for S&L owners, and merger and acquisition
players, will be extremely hard to top in the coming decade. Nevertheless,
no one appears to know when to stop. As more and more S&Ls declared
bankruptcy, Mr Wall kept the brakes on remedial action by insisting on
lowball estimates of the potential S&L industry losses. When it
became obvious that the Federal Savings & Loan Insurance Corporation
(FSLIC) could no longer cope with the enormity of claims payouts, Danny
Wall was placed in charge of the new Office of Thrift Supervision which
then had the job of disposing of the assets from the bankrupt S&Ls.
Evidence is now coming to light to suggest that the S&L bailout
operation itself was taken as yet another opportunity to offer favors to
the wealthy. As director of the Office of Thrift Supervision, Mr Wall was
again in the driver's seat, ...talk about leaving the fox to mind the
chicken coup. The plan he came up with was called the Southwest Plan, and
just two of his deals should be enough to convince anyone that Mr Wall has
made many friends among the economic elite.
The first case involves a Mr Ronald O. Perelman. (You might remember Mr
Perelman as the billionaire who, according to Forbes magazine, made $750 million last year.) For this particular
deal, Mr Perelman put up $315 million, of which $155 million was borrowed,
to take over ownership of, among other things, First Texas Gibraltar, an
S&L which had racked up its losses serving as a real estate
speculation vehicle for none other than the former Democratic Party
chairman Robert Strauss, whose very close social friend Mr Alan
Greenspan, currently in charge of the Federal Reserve, was the gentleman
who initially lobbied for Lincoln Savings and Loan to deregulate the
S&L industry! Amazingly small world isn't it, and all so logically
interconnected! {B131}
However, to get back to the point. For his $315 million investment, Mr
Perelman received the following: good assets worth $7.1 billion; $5.1
billion in Federal guarantees to cover the thrift's bad assets; plus $900
million worth of tax benefits! Within a week, Perelman had sold $2 billion
of FTG's dodgy assets which generated tax loss credits that saved him
roughly $135 million in taxes. In short, the rate of return on his initial
investment, in the first 90 days, amounted to roughly 80%. We
should all be so lucky. The rest will be gravy. {B132}
The second case worthy of mention involves the sale to PMH Corporation
of five S&L thrifts with 25 retail branches and about $1.3 billion in
assets, for the paltry sum of $45 million. Like the deal to Perelman, the
terms of the deal ensured that the government (i.e. the taxpayer) would
absorb any of the thrifts' existing bad debts. In the first 15 months,
$132 million of good assets were sold that more than easily recouped the
initial $45 million purchase price. Most of the remaining assets are
covered by government guarantee against loss to the new owners, and the
estimated $40 million in earnings and tax breaks expected this year alone
are pure profit.
Although these deals sound more like giveaways, many of the deals
initially sanctioned by Mr Danny Wall were just as lucrative. Incidentally
it is probably worth mentioning that Mr Grosfeld, the CEO of PMH's
subsidiary, is director of several Blackstone Group funds. And, oh yes,
the Blackstone investment firm just happens to be headed up by Mr Peter G.
Peterson, former Secretary of Commerce, and by Roger C. Altman, the
former Assistant Secretary of the Treasury. {B133}
Unfortunately for the elite and the taxpayer alike,
the S&L bailout deals appeared a little too much like additional gifts
to the haves at the expense of the taxpayers, so that a special boondoggle
committee may have to be set up to investigate the matter. The aspect that
has made these bailout deals so beneficial to the lucky buyers is the tax
loss credits that went along with the deals. In short, massive tax
avoidance vehicles.
The impending Capital Gains Tax cut will be a variation on an already
too familiar theme. The Joint Committee on Taxation says the capital gains
proposal passed by the House on Sept. 28 1989 would cost $35 billion in
lost revenues over the next 10 years. The recipients will be almost
exclusively the richest 10%. In the House, 64 Democrats who theoretically
owe a fiduciary responsibility to the bottom 90% voted for Bush's tax
cuts. {B134}
Because politicians, both Republicans and Democrats alike, come mainly
from the richest 10 percent and have small personal fortunes to protect,
they are eager to create tax shelters. After all, exemption from
taxes is still one of the best vehicles available for amassing and
retaining wealth. The tax reforms of 1981, which relieved the elite of so
much of their tax share that budget deficits and widespread social program
cutbacks resulted, were passed for exactly the same reason. As long as the
Congress is controlled by lawyers, the rich will continue getting richer
while the poor become poorer.
The Forgotten Concept ...Representation
Democracy by nature implies representation. Congress is
supposed to be composed of people who represent the needs and interests of
the group who elect them. Unless this happens, democracy doesn't happen!!
And it certainly isn't happening!
In reality, Congress is made up mainly of lawyer/politicians who have
never known hunger. Few if any have worked for the minimum wage. Few if
any can count even one blue collar family as belonging to their circle of
friends. Due to the lack of meaningful contact with the nation's poorer
citizens, Congress manages at best an academic appreciation of the day to
day hardships endured by the people to whom they owe a fiduciary
responsibility, but with whom they have little or no real social contact,
except for a brief period immediately prior to elections.
American democracy as it functions today does not
represent the will of the majority, nor does it satisfy the needs of the
majority. Instead, Washington is controlled by lawyers who have cunningly
transformed the supposed seat of democracy into an arena in which
representatives of the elite, can compete to amicably decide how best to
share both foreign and domestic resources. Lawyer/politicians act as the
intermediaries to minimize disputes among the special interest parties.
Politicians and special interest groups (lawyers, and more lawyers) fit
together like hand and glove.
The "quid pro quo" relationship works so well that in both 1986 and
1988, 98% (ninety-eight percent) of House members seeking reelection,
were successfully reelected.
Considering the amount of political corruption that came to light
during that same period, a 98% percent reelection rate, which now
threatens to translate into life tenure for the elite's chosen
politicians, exposes yet again how easily and effectively democracy can be
manipulated. {B135}The electorate don't choose their
representatives, they only get to choose between candidates who are
pre-selected by the elite using the campaign support process. America
is run by the Golden Rule - Them that's got the gold, rule.
One of the factors contributing to the 98% reelection rate among House
members traces back to a long standing privilege enjoyed by incumbent
members. Members of Congress are allowed six taxpayer sponsored mass
postal mailouts per year to constituents in their election ridings.
These mailouts are used primarily to enhance and increase their public
profile for reelection purposes, but it is openly acknowledged that these
mailouts give incumbents an obvious unfair edge over first-time
candidates.
Furthermore, it appears that the reason House elections are held every
two years is not to ensure a healthy turnover of people's representatives
(as the public are led to believe), but to ensure that politicians are
constantly in need of seeking campaign support from their wealthy
special interest benefactors, and also to ensure that they can be gotten
rid of quickly if they don't play ball.
With all its obvious flaws, the lobby system is unfortunately only the
first of many factors which negate democracy in America. The next factor
involves the existence of deals made in private.
Back Room Deals (The Secretive Third House)
Voters are aware that in order for a bill to be made into
law, it must first get passed by a majority in the House of
Representatives, as well as by a majority in the Senate, before it is
passed on to the President for his approval.
What most voters are not aware of is that the most
important bills (about 20% of all legislation) go through a little
known back room bargaining procedure that can and often does effectively
negate the decisions reached previously by both the House and the Senate.
This vital step involves passing the bill on to a third group which
effectively wields more power than either the Senate or the House
independently! The group, known as a House-Senate Conference
Committee, which is made up of selected members from both the Senate
and the House, can insist on meeting behind closed doors. They can take a
bill which had already been passed unanimously by both houses, make
additions and alterations as they wish, and resubmit it back to each house
for a take it or leave it vote. For example, during one such conference
committee session, Mr John Murtha (chairman of the House Defense
Appropriations Sub-committee) added a clause into a defense-appropriations
bill that would give the Speaker of the House the exclusive use of a
military airplane at all times! Neither House had debated or voted on that
clause. {B136}
To make matters worse, Senate-House conference committees purposely
take no minutes, so that no member taking part can be held
singularly responsible for having voted for or against any of the changes
or additions. Through some unwritten but powerful dictate, decisions
reached by this Third and more powerful "back room House" are
practically never rejected.
On average, only once in a hundred times does a bill, which has
been mauled over by this Third House, get rejected by the House or
Senate!!
The existence of covert back room deal making is not new, but then
neither is special interest lobbying. With regard to "Special Interest
Lobbying", this is the court of last appeal. Behind closed doors, members
can once again trot out demands that had been rejected by a majority of
either or both lower Houses, ...or amend proposals that had enjoyed
overwhelming approval by both Houses! In short, this group has the power
to veto the will of the people by vetoing the will of both House
and Senate!!
Would the bottom 90% of the nation be so willing to refer to American
democracy as the "beacon of democracy" if they knew that the combined will
of their elected representatives plus the will of the Senate can be
rejected in some smoky back room by a small group of politicians who are
by nature prime targets for special interest lobbyists?
I think not!
In 1934, Republican Senator George W. Norris of Nebraska, who had by
that time already served 40 years in congress, considered the existence of
this power group undemocratic. He had this to say,
"The members of this 'house' are not elected by the people,
the people have no voice as to who [conferees] shall be. ...No
constituent
has any definite knowledge as to how members of this
conference committee vote, and there is no record to prove the attitude
of any member of the conference committee".
{B137} Every time I recall that a proposal can receive
a majority approval from both the House and the Senate, and survive a
further undemocratic mauling by a House-Senate conference committee, and
yet can be vetoed by an actor from Hollywood, I feel sad for the
generations of Americans who have struggled so diligently for a democracy,
but who have instead been saddled by feudal oligarchy.
Unfortunately, a Presidential veto is not what it appears either, for
the simple reason that the Presidency itself exists in a domain of power
that lies beyond the realm of democratic influence. At the Presidential
level, the elite exercise a far more direct and insidious influence.
The Covert Takeover of America
While lawyer/politicians, lobbyists, and the media have
all been successfully used in the past to defeat the effects of democracy,
an event in 1973 radically altered the political destiny of the nation.
A small group of the economic elite staged a covert and bloodless coup
that has since secured absolute control of the highest echelons of
American politics!! They successfully placed their representatives
into the highest positions in the White House to exercise direct rather
than indirect power.
Not surprisingly, this incredible takeover requires some background
explanation.
Prior to the Second World War, the American elite had not yet exposed
the magnitude of their colonial appetite to the world. When the United
Nation Organization was formed just after W.W.II, America still appeared
to stand as a role model for many 2nd and 3rd World nations who were eager
to throw off the yoke of colonial exploitation. After all, America
appeared not only to have thrown off the yoke herself, but to have become
a dominant military and economic force in the process.
As a result, the United Nations became a forum not only for cultivating
American allies, but for stemming the growth of Communism, which many 3rd
World countries had begun to view as an increasingly good role model for
throwing off the burden of colonial exploitation prior to W.W.II.
Because a significant portion of America's industrial machinery had
been redirected away from consumer goods and into military hardware for
the war effort, America began trading military supplies to all the
countries who felt that independence also meant an ability to defend their
national borders.
And so a slow process began whereby the poorer nations
either took loans from America to buy her military hardware, or
alternately, they entered into economic co-ventures with America's
economic elite to allow them to share in the supposed development of the
poorer country's natural and human resources.
It took decades for the 2nd and 3rd World nations to gradually
acknowledge that the American elite were not the saviors they had made
themselves out to be, but simply a new colonial power that had been only
too willing to fill the void left by European colonial powers as they
abandoned their colonial holdings.
The poorer countries were being pushed to the brink of bankruptcy
simply to meet their interest payments to the Western elite banking
community. Increasingly, nations were forced into more and more economic
agreements for the exploitation of their resources in an effort to afford
the interest payments on their outstanding debt.
Gradually, the mood in the United Nations changed, and it became a
forum of voices complaining against Western economic exploitation.
Neocolonialism was in fact alive and well. The colonialists had all gone
home, but the economic exploitation had remained, and many countries were
even economically worse off than under direct colonial rule.
As the American policies grew increasingly unpopular within the UN, the
elite sought ways of limiting the power of the UN to act independently.
Consequently, America began defaulting on its financial commitments (i.e.,
its membership dues) to the UN.
In the early seventies, a far more troubling situation suddenly arose
that threatened to reduce the power of some of the elite's most powerful
members. With nearly a trillion dollars in outstanding loans (to the 2nd
and 3rd World countries) at stake, the elite with banking interests were
in serious potential trouble. Fearing a domino effect might happen if even
one country defiantly refused to pay its loan repayments, the elite went
into action.
The Trilateral Commission
To take more immediate measures to eliminate the growing
threat of loan repayment defaults, and to reaffirm its leadership of the
world's economic elite, the American elite solicited the help of the most
powerful members of Western society to create a new organization that
would represent the economic elite from the three most successful Feudal
empires of the modern age, namely America, Japan and Western Europe.
Although Germany dominates within the Western European group, members were
also chosen from the other allied nations.
The result was the Trilateral Commission, the most powerful
economically oriented organization ever formed to shape the planet's
future, and the closest entity possible to a global board of directors
overseeing the feudal based societies. The Commission's creation was
begun in 1973 when its instigator David Rockefeller, who was chairman of
the Chase Manhattan Bank, appointed Zbigniew Brzezinski (who had
previously been the director of the Research Institute on Communist
Affairs), to select the more than 200 future members.
The members were chosen from the top executives of the corporate and
banking worlds, and included business interests such as Chase Manhattan
Bank, Bank of America, Barclays Bank, Continental Illinois National Bank
& Trust Co., Bank of Tokyo, Wachovia Bank & Trust Co., Sony,
Seiko, Bendix Corp., Hitachi, Hewlett-Packard, Texas Instruments, Shell,
Exxon, Royal Dutch Petroleum Co., Mitsubishi Heavy Industries Ltd., John
Deere & Company, Caterpillar Tractor, Toyota, Fiat, Datsun, Coca-Cola,
Sears, Roebuck & Co., etc.
Don't be surprised if you have never even heard of this organization,
its members have cooperated to purposely maintain its almost non-existent
public profile. After all, the public would have an impossible task
criticizing the actions of a group it didn't even know existed.
To deal properly with the threat of foreign countries defaulting on
their loan repayments, the TC had to somehow get control not only over the
foreign policy but over the nation's purse strings as well to be able to
deal directly with the banking problems abroad. They wanted control of the
budget and the interest rates among other things. But seeing as the
President appoints these unelected people, the Trilateral Commission first
had to have one of their sympathizers or members elected President. To do
this they took under their wing several good potential Presidential
candidates, including Jimmy Carter.
The reason Carter made such an excellent choice was that as a
Southerner, he had no real connections or contacts with the Northern
Establishment. Consequently he would predictably and gladly accept backing
and continued support from such an auspicious group of international big
shots as the Trilateral Commission.
As they had successfully planned, after Carter was elected, he
appointed the director of the Trilateral Commission, Zbigniew Brzezinski,
as National Security Adviser. After all who else would Carter pick
as his foreign affairs expert than the man who had purposely helped him
write his foreign policy campaign speeches.
It should also be mentioned that Z. Brzezinski was not
the only Trilateral member that Carter appointed to his administration,
but he was the most important. It is probably also worth mentioning that
the Trilateral Commission membership also cleverly included some red
herring members to give the appearance that the Commission had the
interests of the entire nation at heart. But the policies and legislation
that emerged during that administration left no doubt that some members
were only perfunctorily included to avoid bothersome criticism within the
ranks.
After the commission's members had taken office in the White house, a
stream of special interest legislative policies were enacted that greatly
benefited the interests of the Trilateral membership.
As David Rockefeller's own special interests lay within the field of
banking, and because foreign countries, who had taken out massive loans
from U.S. and other major banks were now threatening to default on their
loan payments, it is not surprising that a rash of measures that provided
what amounted to free loan insurance for the banking club soon
emerged. The following examples will provide an insight into how the
banking interests alone were aided by the commission's presence in the
White House.
The World Bank, which had always been a tool of the elite's interests,
was given a huge contribution from the American taxpayer. This money could
then be doled out "as required" to the foreign debtor countries who looked
most likely to default. The American taxpayer had effectively started
paying the Third World's interest payments to major US banks! So far
the government has guaranteed, with taxpayer's money, $30 billion of the
World Bank's 3rd World Loans. Potential future debt for America's unborn.
{B138}
Because of the elite's close economic connections with the dictators of
the world, legislation was even voted down that would have prevented loans
going to countries with abysmal human rights records. These countries too
had to be kept eligible for ongoing loans to ensure their ability to
maintain interest payments to U.S. banks.
To facilitate the implementation of their economically related foreign
policy changes, a committee to review national foreign policy was
reorganized to include the previously excluded Secretary of the Treasury.
By doing so, the machinery to ensure government of the economic elite, for
the economic elite, and by the economic elite, got a permanent shot of
oil.
To achieve all this, the Trilateral commission simply had to extend
campaign support to a small town peanut farmer, and a Democrat to boot. Why have there been so many wars when you can
completely take over a government with such silky legal smoothness? Real
chess games require more chess strategy than this.
In case you're tempted to think that the Trilateral Commission was a
phenomenon of the 70's, think again! Ronald Reagan was up to his
ears in Trilateral Commission appointees!
Ronald Reagan's Trilateral Commission Appointees:
- Vice-president ...George Bush
- Chairman of the Federal Reserve ...Paul Volcker, Alan
Greenspan
- Defense Secretaries ...Caspar Weinberger, Frank Carlucci
- White House Chief of Staff ...Howard Baker
- Secretary of State ...Alexander Haig
- UN Ambassador ...Jean Kirkpatrick
- Council of Economic Advisors ...Martin Feldstein
THE TRILATERAL COMMISSION HAS BEEN RUNNING THE COUNTRY!!
The process of forming an integrated global Feudal empire began in
earnest with the formation of the Trilateral Commission. Since its
inception, the Trilateral Commission has funded numerous studies
which deal with key aspects of controlling whole populations.
Since the TC infiltrated the White House, it has collected a frighteningly
comprehensive pool of knowledge, all of which will be used to establish
the new global order.
The following incomplete list of Trilateral Commission book
titles should give a concerned reader reason enough to believe that
this elite group means business.
- 1975 Report on the Governability of Democracies
- 1978 Task Force reports on Commodities Issues
- 1978 A compilation of reports of the Task Force on Oceans
- 1978 Energy - managing the transition
- 1979 Collective Bargaining
- 1979 Report of the Trilateral Task Force on Industrial
Policy
- 1980 Elite Planning for World Management
- 1982 Economic Relations with the Soviet Union and Eastern
Europe
- 1983 Sharing International Responsibilities among the
Trilateral countries
- 1983 Task Force on Security and Arms Limitation, Defense and
Arms Control
- 1985 East Asian Security and the Trilateral countries
- 1986 Conditions for Partnership in International Economic
Management
Based on information gained from these
studies, the TC members are presently hard at work forming infrastructures
to coordinate control of all the economic Feudal populations on an
international or global scale, rather than just as
independent national Feudal empires. As you read this,
international contracts and legal agreements are being made by members of
the new Trilateral oligarchy.
The Trilateral Commission's successful bloodless coup of the
American democratic system draws attention to the fact that even the
American President is rarely one of the elite, but normally only one of
their functionaries. Whenever possible, the elite have preferred the
position to be filled by someone (actors are ideal), who can memorize
speeches written by specially trained speech writers, without having too
many original thoughts or opinions of his own to confuse the situation.
While Reagan has been playing the role, it has been convenient to hold
press briefings under roaring helicopter blades, or not at all.
In contrast, John F. Kennedy may have had a few too many thoughts of
his own, and fallen out of grace with the elite. Despite coming from
a wealthy and established family, he was probably snubbed by his peer
group for being too much of an upstart who chose to run the country
according to his own dictates instead of strictly following the elite's
wishes.
America's Unelected Government
Increasingly, American government policy is being
dictated by the President and his appointed cabinet members. This
latter inner circle of unelected officials are the real power holders.
This is especially true concerning foreign policy, when presidents are
purposely promoted who are functionally illiterate when it comes to a
knowledge of international events, and the political and economic forces
which determine international alliances. Peanut farmers and actors make
ideal presidents, because of their anticipated dependency on the experts
whom they are steered into appointing.
It is the unelected advisers who take us into war. It is they who
decree not only who gets taxed and by how much, but just as
importantly who benefits from the tax money that is collected. They
also raise and lower the interest rates. It is these men who most
directly enact the will of the economic elite!!
They are not the elite, but they are rewarded so well either overtly or
covertly that it is rare, if ever, that a person in that position goes
against the will of the elite. To do so would be tantamount to giving up
one's career, and jeopardizing the security of one's family.
Presidents can come and go, but the unelected policy makers can
transfer from administration to administration, to provide security for
the elite's long-term plans!
A prime example of these behind the scenes power wielders is James A.
Baker who, within hours of Bush's victory, was named Secretary of State.
In the 70's, he was not only Ford's campaign manager, but also his
Undersecretary of State. In 1980, he was Bush's campaign manager who
pulled him from the campaign in time to become Reagan's running mate.
After the election, he became Reagan's (Bush's) Chief of Staff, and worked
closely with both Ed Meese and Michael Deaver to control the White House
with an iron hand under the watchful eye and direction of his old friend
George.
After he had the White House power patterns fully established, he
transferred to the post of Secretary of the Treasury in order to more
directly work toward the elite's economic objectives. It was during his tenure in the Treasury, that most of
the debilitating tax reforms came into effect, and during the same period
that the country became the world's #1 debtor nation. Not only did his
policies purposely accelerate the devaluation of the dollar, he also
lobbied diligently to maintain loans to the defaulting debtor nations
as a means of protecting the elite's banking interests.
James A. Baker is no small player. In fact, he has held these important
positions during such critical times primarily because of his tremendous
ability to lobby the press as well as individual members of Congress.
Being from Houston, he is also a staunch defender of BIG OIL interests,
and has proven to be one of their most influential and hard working
lobbyists. His track record shows he has spent an inordinate amount of
time cultivating relationships with members of the press. Because of
his special lobbying abilities, he remains one of the most powerful men in
politics today.
Another good example would be Mr Brent Scowcroft who now serves as
George Bush's National Security Adviser. Unlike Mr Baker, Mr Scowcroft has
preferred a less intimate relationship with the press and a lower public
profile altogether. Even out of view, he has remained a very powerful
figure in American politics ever since he served as National Security
Adviser under President Ford.
Meanwhile the proliferation of unelected, unaccountable quasi
government policy makers is making a mockery of a government the original
Constitution was aspiring to achieve.
Of course the Treasury Secretary, the budget director, and the head of
the Federal Reserve Bank all hold immense power over the American people,
and so these men are chosen very carefully for their willingness to play
ball with the elite, especially with regard to maintaining the status quo.
These individuals all have advance knowledge of fiscal changes. Possessing
their knowledge is a bit like knowing the winner of a horse race before
the race begins.
It is definitely no accident that all the key unelected power holders
are personally chosen by the president, ...the elite's most powerfully
placed chess piece. This arrangement affords them untold advantages. For
example, if the Federal Reserve Bank, which sets interest rates, were to
quietly leak out information to sympathizers(i.e., inner circle bankers)
regarding an impending monetary devaluation, those in the know
could quickly transfer moneys or assets into foreign currencies and then,
after the devaluation had occurred, they could buy back American dollars
cheaply, and in the process, make an instant fortune. Paper transactions,
that transfer assets within multinational corporations, can achieve this
sort of transaction with the greatest of ease. This could have been
especially true when America abandoned the gold standard.
Conflicts of interest, and the illegal use of insider information,
influence peddling, etc., occur so frequently that they too, like many
other immoral and unethical business practices have been woven into the
fabric of the system.
Individuals like the Watergate plumbers and the Iran-Contras Affair
participants cooperate readily in covert schemes because they know that
even if the scheme is uncovered, the elite's total machinery will swing
into action to assist and compensate the appointed fall guys. This never
amounts to much of a problem because the attorney generals and the whole
legal system are integral parts of the elite's machinery as well. Their
level of confidence in the protection system afforded the elite's
lawbreakers is shown by the fact that both of the above groups operated
directly out of the White House.
By the time individuals have climbed to the summit of their fields to
the point of qualifying to be chosen as the President's appointed cabinet
members, they are being rewarded so well that, like the politicians, they
too are interested in retaining the status quo. They too are interested in
tax perks to protect their moderate fortunes. They are critically aware
that their careers would be ruined by trying to initiate policy that would
threaten either the wealth or power of the richest 1%, and so the system
continues to favor the wealthy.
Perhaps this would be as good a time as any to at least have a cursory
look at the other two major lobby groups, besides the banking elite, who
have determined America's domestic and foreign policy the most - the oil
lobby, and the military industrial lobby.
A Closer Look at Lobbying
1) The Oil Lobby
As much as the lobbying power of the banking interests
were successful in manipulating government, the rewards of lobbying had
already been enjoyed as much or more by the equally powerful oil industry
lobbyists. In the Trilateral Commission, these two powerful lobby
interests finally converged. Not surprisingly, the Rockefeller family
itself held the largest share blocks in Mobil and Exxon, two of the four
companies making up ARAMCO, the conglomerate of ARabian and AMerican
COmpanies that exploit the Arabian oil fields.
It is probably safe to say that one of the quickest and most dramatic
reductions to America's standard of living seemed to coincide with the
dramatic rise in the price of oil by the thirteen oil producing countries
who organized themselves to form an Organization of Petroleum Exporting
Countries (OPEC).
At this point the reader should remember that it was Nixon's financing
of the Vietnam war by printing money without generating the wealth to back
the paper money that placed America's standard of living on the slippery
slope of decline!! It will take serious study to determine to just what
degree the price of oil rose, as the price of gold had already done, to
adjust to the fact that the value of America's paper money had been
recklessly undermined and ultimately devalued by the rest of the world.
In any case, the elite went out of their way to make Americans see
the OPEC oil merchants as THE TYRANTS responsible for America's inflation,
higher prices, and consequently for her dropping standard of living.
For all intents and purposes, the monetary devaluation heist was pulled
off flawlessly. Most Americans still don't have the foggiest clue as to
what really went on. It would be of benefit to elaborate on the issue.
For many of the American economic elite, the OPEC policies were a
source of unforeseen wealth. So much so, that strong lobby groups
formed to maintain both OPEC and its policies.
The owners of American oil companies couldn't have been more pleased.
The anti-trust legislation that had been previously introduced to prevent
the American oil companies from hosing the motoring public at the pumps,
was no longer effective. OPEC could now be officially blamed for the
exorbitantly high prices. In addition, the value of the oil reserves in
America both in storage above and below ground went through the roof.
Overnight all the lobbying power of the oil industry was secretly
refocused to maintain the high prices and develop friendly relations with
the Arabs.
The banking elite became OPEC lobbyists for several reasons. Firstly
the OPEC members who were still developing their oil industries borrowed
heavily from the major U.S. banks. Countries like Saudi Arabia who were
already quite developed, now had excess capital which found its way into
American banks as deposits. These deposits as early as 1977 totaled about
50 billion dollars. The Trilateral banking members quickly grew fat at the
OPEC trough. They were able to borrow at reduced rates from the Arabs, and
loan the money to Americans among others for substantial profits. The
banks of course had a vested interest in maintaining the OPEC deposits. In
fact many U.S. banks bought equity in banks already established in the
Middle East.
Because corporations also borrowed from this cheap source of money, the
number of pro-OPEC lobbyists continued to balloon.
Arab oil money quite literally poured into the States through Houston
based Aramco Services Co., which was the American purchasing arm for the
Arabs. In addition to billions of dollars of oil industry equipment,
Aramco Services supplied billions of dollars of goods and services that
were needed to upgrade overnight the standard of living in the oil rich
Arab nations. Even though the products ranged from
foodstuffs to hospital equipment, the major beneficiaries were again the
largest corporations who were the only ones capable of supplying goods and
services on such a grand scale.
The feeding frenzy at the OPEC trough also included a whole legion of
consultants and lawyers who became beneficiaries and consequently
lobbyists for OPEC. Those conscripted for service included such notables
as Richard Helms the former Head of the CIA and former Ambassador to Iran;
William Rogers, Nixon's former Secretary of State; William Fulbright, the
former chairman of the Senate Foreign Relation Committee; and Clark
Clifford, former Secretary of Defence, to name but a few.
In short, the 750 % increase in gasoline and home heating oil costs
came directly out of the working man's pockets, travelled to the Middle
East, and then got redistributed back into a minority of economic elite
pockets, many of whom were members in good standing of the Trilateral
Commission.
It is certainly no surprise that there was no end of lobbyists willing
to support OPEC policies, and even the idea of an OIL SHORTAGE to
help justify the continuing high price of oil!
Subsidies to the oil industry have cost the taxpayer plenty. In fact
one of their former tax avoidance deceits also cost the government untold
amounts of tax revenues. It's worth knowing about, and it went something
like this. Because taxes paid to foreign countries could be deducted
against any taxes owed in America, oil companies arranged with the Arab
oil vendors to falsely designate as "tax", a totally erroneous proportion
of the price paid to the Arab producers. Consequently, profits made by
some American oil resellers were offset by the amount of the purchase
price falsely labelled as taxes. The net result was a tax evasion of the
highest order. Needless to say, the oil racket has increasingly
concentrated the nation's wealth in the hands of even fewer people.
It is probably worth mentioning as well that in the period before OPEC
and the International Energy Agency, anti-trust laws were in place to
avoid collusion between oil companies. Anti-trust laws relaxed the
public's fears, but what the public didn't know was that even though the
companies were prohibited from meeting together to discuss pricing
strategies, etc., almost 2 dozen oil companies retained the same
lawyer. One wonders how many palms got greased to keep that scam
quiet.
Despite the horrendous windfall profits enjoyed by oil producers when
the price of oil went up, they still lobby for and receive government
(taxpayer) subsidies for oil exploration.
2) The Military Industrial Lobby
Another excellent example of private industrial interests
exerting immense power within the government, while remaining unelected,
unaccountable, and hence irresponsible, ...masquerades as the Military
Industrial Complex.
The disposal of three trillion dollars for the Strategic Defense
Initiative (a euphemism meaning accelerated nuclear escalation), is in the
hands of a legion of extremely powerful part time Pentagon
consultants recruited straight from the private sector. Many
previously worked within the Pentagon as government employees, whose
loyalties were first and foremost to the nation and its best interests,
but who were later lured one way or another to serve private industry.
Their knowledge of the Pentagon's procurement methods, combined with
having friendships with existing Pentagon procurement employees, makes
them an invaluable private sector commodity, and herein lies the conflict.
A consultant doesn't bill himself as a conflict of interest
balancing act, but he purports to be operating in the nation's
interest while successfully balancing with one foot in private industry,
one hand reaching ominously into the Pentagon purse, the other hand under
the table clutching kickback payoffs, and his eyes riveted to his own bank
statement. Armed also with a knowledge of the procurement system's
vulnerabilities, the situation is ripe for procuring $10 washers and $620
toilet seats.
Corruption and conflict of interest are far from the real
issue however. The degree to which private sector self-interests and
their lobbying createdthe three trillion dollar Strategic
Defense Initiative, is the issue that deserves the
limelight. The production and sale of war machinery in
peace time has traditionally been one of the chief sources of wealth for
many of the Chess Society elite. It is, therefore, not surprising that the
present budget allowance for Star Wars is in the neighborhood of 3
trillion dollars.
Let's consider some of the advantages:
- 1) The elite always have a chance of owning the best weapons to
maintain or expand the realm of their continued dominance. If
"constantly developing better weapons" is a permanent defense strategy,
then there will be a constant need for buyers of slightly outdated
weapons. This provides a good reason to have mini wars brewing at all
times, because one cannot afford to hold on to older technology weapons
too long, for fear that no one will want them. It is a self-perpetuating
cancer.
- 2) The fortunes spent find their way back into familiar bank
accounts as industrial profits, kickbacks, etc.. Because so much money
is involved, it has always been, and still continues to be one of the
best tools to perpetuate the lopsided distribution of wealth.
- 3) It provides a means of influence and control over foreign
nations, as events in the Middle East clearly demonstrate.
- 4) By locating much of its non-military related industries abroad,
the elite have ensured that a high percentage of the total work force in
America is dependent on jobs in government and military related
industries. This automatically serves to numb the population against
continued demands for strong defense budgets, and contributes to the
subconscious acceptance of hawkish policies.
In addition,
threats to job security are an ever present form of subtle economic
intimidation keeping employees from exposing corrupt or illegal practices.
The elite have repeated over and over that the technological
discoveries made through defense industry research end up benefiting the
average citizen. However, despite the fact that 65% of our scientists are
involved in war effort technology, the main improvements in living
conditions for the bottom 90 percent consist of relatively old technology;
motor vehicles, electricity, telephones, TVs, stereos, and dishwashers.
Although pocket calculators and computers have ended up in many homes, the
public derive little value from the enormous waste of physical, mental and
natural resources involved in the shameful production of instruments for
destruction, carnage and social devolution.
Discussions in the press concerning the benefits and synergetic effects
of spending three trillion dollars on programs beneficial to mankind are
conspicuous by their absence. They could be telling about unimaginable
social improvements if the money were channeled into health care research;
or on educating everyone to his or her capacity; or set to the task of
eliminating needless human starvation; or funding the myriad of other
worthy causes that would prove beneficial to mankind in general.
Another Golden Age waits quietly inside a Feudal cocoon for a people
with a sense of international brotherhood to set it free.
The Two Party Facade
As Congress increasingly becomes a fraternity of lawyers
competing for special interest favors for the particular economic elite
who support them, the distinction between Republican and Democrat
becomes increasingly irrelevant.The Trilateral Commission virtually
came to power on the coat tails of Jimmy Carter, a Democrat. Four of the
five senators used by (pro-elite) Charles Keating of Lincoln Savings and
Loan, to lobby on his behalf were also Democrats. {B139} The
distinction is becoming progressively academic, and really only seems to
matter when all the congressional showmen take part in the electoral farce
every few years.
In Western Society, labor-oriented interests (whom the Congressional
Democrats are supposedly representing) never truly ever get controlling
power over their nation's destiny. Why not? because...
The economic elite exercise an operating control over the
economy, the media, the legal profession, the military, the secret
services, as well as the majority of congressmen to whom they provide
campaign funding, no matter which party is in
power. Of course getting control means more than just
winning a Presidential election, because the elite are as capable of using
a Democratic president as a pawn for their purposes. The previous
discussion of the Trilateral Commission under the topic of The Covert
Takeover of America should have left no doubt about that. The
infiltration by elected and appointed members of the government who swear
allegiance to the Trilateral Commission makes it increasingly irrelevant
which major party is seen to be in power at any given time.
Elections serve two main purposes. For the Republicans and Democrats
alike, it is a time of arranging future rewards for the lower echelon
business communities in return for their support. Secondly, they are
festive events to cleverly create a happy atmosphere in which to reinforce
the illusion that America functions as a democracy.
It is at least theoretically possible for labor oriented interests to
"get control" of the government, but important changes would be required
first. Legislation would have to be introduced to eliminate the
campaign support dependency of candidates and to cut the ties between
politicians and the media. Without doing both of these, the job
cannot be accomplished.
The level to which the elite have succeeded in their control of both
politics and the public mind, is attested to by the fact that few people
see anything wrong with a political democracy that would elect as
President, a Hollywood actor who made a career of memorizing scripts and
parroting them back, ...followed by the ex-head of a secret service.
When George Orwell wrote "1984", it was the elite who took
the most notes.
As long as big money effectively determines how the country is run, and
even who rules the country, democracy will exist in name only. Through
their influence over both the elected and appointed politicians, the low
profile economic elite quietly dictate new policy and legislation that
support their national and international business ventures. The Trilateral
Commission provides a clear and excellent example of how such control is
exercised. Members of the elite make international deals such as loans and
economic co-ventures with the elite of 2nd and 3rd World countries like
South Africa, Panama, El Salvador, etc., and then manipulate the people's
representatives into adopting foreign policy that supports and protects
their interests. The ethical and moral reputation of the American people
is compromised when the deals involve the world's dictators and human
right's violators.
Increasingly, the tail is wagging the dog.
International foreign policy is being shaped in response to lobbying by
the multinational corporate body. Government has taken on the role of
acting as an extension of the legal department of the corporate world.
As well as successfully maneuvering it's members directly into powerful
positions in the White House, the Trilateral Commission simply includes
among its membership anyone whose help it needs.
The Webster's dictionary definition of Feudalism
stands as a reminder for those who still think objectively:
...3: control by an entrenched minority esp. for its own
benefit : social, political, or economic oligarchy. Let
there be no uncertainty about the following:
Attaining a proper democracy will require much work, and maintaining it
will require even greater vigilance.
To refer to the existing hoax as Government of the people, for the
people, and by the people, ...borders on the absurd.
Possible Corrective Actions
1) Install a More Democratic Election Process
In order to prevent the economic elite from controlling
the outcome of elections as a result of their financial power and
subsequent influence, consider the following election system.
Let's say a country wished to elect a government of 100 elected
members.
To eliminate the theatrics and monetary waste involved in current
election campaigns, and to prevent any party from requiring or in fact
being helped unfairly by contributions from the economic elite, put all
parties on an equal footing. First have each party prepare a platform
which makes clear its stand on all the key issues of the day, and let the
platforms be debated first nationally by relevant party authorities, and
then exhaustively in local public forums. A fund of money from taxes
would be set aside for televised interparty debates concerning the merits
and flaws of each others platform planks. At party election time, have the
party's previous contributions to society posted for all to see. Make each
political party prepare a written platform that if elected will stand as a
matter of record.
Then at each polling booth let the people initially vote for a PARTY
(and its platform), ...instead of for a candidate. After a party is chosen
by the most per capita votes in the country, the respective number of
members of each party are determined by the relative ratio of total votes
received. By electing a party by the number of per capita votes, the abuse
of gerrymandering would be eliminated.
Let money from taxes, necessary to elect the 100 candidates, be then
divided among the winning parties accordingly, to cover the cost of
electing their members. The respective parties would then hold elections
to field the appropriate number of candidates nationally. In other words,
if one party received ten percent of the country vote, then that party had
the right to elect it's ten candidates. Only those who had originally
registered as voting members of that particular party would then be
eligible to vote in the secondary "candidate" elections.
At CANDIDATE election time, have the candidates' previous contributions
to the community, be posted for all to see. Make each political candidate
prepare a written statement regarding his stand on the key issues of the
day. If elected it would stand as a matter of record. Then each party
would elect their representatives.
Once in power, the incoming party then has the right, not the
obligation to replace ministers holding portfolios.
Ensure that a minister only holds a portfolio for which he has special
qualifications and training.
Elected politicians should be considered ineligible unless they have a
history of community service as opposed to economic self- service. This
should be just as mandatory a condition for the unelected appointees.
Slowly elevate the role of elected official to a position of honor and
respect by making the penalties socially devastating for serious abuse of
public trust. Influencing peddling, at least 10 years.
Serious abuses of public trust by a President or Attorney General
should carry a 10 year minimum sentence, not merely impeachment. Let's get
rid of the Divine Right of Kings once and for all.
Strip a convicted elected official of his special pension rights.
************************************ And last but
not least, it may come as a shock to some Americans, but:
In a real DEMOCRACY, its leader would not be able to veto the wishes of
the elected majority.
The scandalous hoax being perpetrated on the American people by a mere
handful of their most cunning, and I might add most respected citizens, is
of epic proportions. So, before we go any further it would be beneficial
to expose the hoax that makes all other hoaxes possible, ...Manipulation
Of The Mass Media.
Chapter 3 Manipulation of the Media
Freedom of the press has always passed itself off as one
of America's most sacred cows. In reality, it has faithfully served and is
still serving as another of the elite's Trojan Horses.
Those who consider America's media to be the freest in the world are
perhaps overlooking one important consideration. Virtually all the means
of communication from orbiting satellites, to the television networks, to
the individual TV stations, to the newspaper chains and the major book
publishing houses are owned by the economic elite!
Consolidating Ownership of the Media
The important thing to realize is not just that the elite
own virtually all the Western media, but that it is now owned by a very
small handful of media moguls. The shocking truth is that the
ownership of newspapers and TV stations has already been consolidated to
such a staggering degree that unmanipulated news coverage has practically
ceased to exist.
Only one man and his media holdings need be mentioned to provide some
tip of the iceberg proof to substantiate that perspective. His name is
Rupert Murdoch, and he is an American billionaire. His media holdings are
registered as The News Corporation Ltd. in Australia "for accounting
advantages", but his holdings span four continents.
The areas over which he has the ability to exercise a simultaneous
coordinated control include the editorial content and direction of
newspapers such as the Boston Herald American, the Chicago Sun Times, and
the Sun and the Times of London, to name but a few, and he holds interests
in many others including The Financial Times, the Economist, and Reuters,
{B140} the European Wire service. He owns 5 magazines in Britain,
approximately 20 magazines in the U.S., and more than 100 newspapers in
Australia. {B141}
His American based Metromedia TV station network alone cost
about 2 billion dollars, and he has a 4 channel satellite television
network called Sky Television in Britain.{B142}
Some of his other media holdings include the 20th Century Fox Film
Studio (remember that Henry Kissinger and Gerald Ford have been its past
directors), the Harper & Row publishing house, the Star, New York
magazine, the San Antonio Express, New Woman, Elle, In Fashion,
Automobile, European travel & Life, Premiere, etc. etc. Recently
Rupert Murdoch agreed to pay 3 billion dollars for 4 publications: TV
Guide, Good Food, the Daily Racing Form, and Seventeen.
With wealth of this magnitude involved, it is not difficult to
establish first of all that the bottom 90 percent of society are virtually
excluded from media ownership. He himself has referred to newspapers as a
series of "capital intensive" "local monopolies". {B143}
The Newhouse family of New York, the 5th richest family on the planet,
owns Advance Publications and Newhouse Broadcasting outright. Besides
being the ninth largest cable TV operator in the U.S., they own 22 daily
newspapers, Random House publishing company, and a host of magazines such
as the New Yorker, Vogue, Vanity Fair, Glamour, and Parade.{B144}
Billionaire Randolph Hearst and family, own 14 daily newspapers, 6 TV
stations, 7 radio stations, and some book publishing companies.
{B145} Should we look for a better reason to explain why his
daughter Patty was released into his custody, without punishment, after
she had been photographed holding a gun in a bank stick-up, to earn money
for a group of anti-government activists. The American media chorus
justified her release by claiming that she had been kidnapped and
brainwashed, and since brainwashing is their forte, opposition to the
argument was conspicuous by its absence.
Kenneth Irving and family of Canada, the world's 8th richest
billionaire has virtually monopolized ownership of all English speaking
newspapers in his province. {B146}The Thompson
family of Toronto, Canada (the 10th richest billionaire family) now owns
even more newspapers than anyone in the States. In Britain, Robert
Maxwell, another billionaire is busy consolidating the media
there.{B147}
The owner of the largest media conglomerate in the world is Reinhard
Mohn, yet another of the world's billionaires. {B148}
Each of these media magnates probably echoes the wishes of Rupert
Murdoch who has been quoted as saying that his objective is a "global
communications company". Each newspaper, magazine, and TV station reaches
a specific section of the population; collectively they form a woven grid
of influence that few active members of society can elude.
It would perhaps be worth pointing out that for all intents and
purposes, media ownership within each of Western society's Feudal
empires, Britain, Australia, Canada, America, Germany, etc., has already
been consolidated into the control of a small handful of media moguls.
Will it be necessary to have these moguls unite under one corporation name
before the term "Big Brother" gets seriously discussed? Media owners can,
and do, install TV network directors and newspaper and magazine editors
whom they are assured will broadcast and print exactly what the elite want
the American public to see, hear, and read. Whether they are openly united
under one corporate "Big Brother" logo or not, is irrelevant. Covertly
they are part of the elite team. Their coordination and control is best
exemplified by considering how well they all work together to elect the
team's political functionaries into public office.
Using the Media to Rig Elections
The media's role in undermining the function of true
democracy, and especially at election time, cannot be overstated. The
elite are not satisfied with infiltrating the nation's highest political
offices, nor are they satisfied with negating the effects of democracy
with special interest lobbying. No, that's not quite enough.
Before the bottom 90% of society are even allowed to approach the
polling booth, the elite take the opportunity to subject the entire
population to no less than six full months of intense political
conditioning in which individuals and policies that pose a threat to their
wealth and power, are systematically discredited. By praising their
sympathizers and discrediting and smearing their opponents, the elite have
consistently and successfully used the media, to elect enough political
candidates to the White House and Congress to ensure success with their
future lobbying.
Needless to say, most of the politicians running for
election or reelection are doing so with funds contributed by the elite in
one way or another, and of course election support translates into either
payoffs for past favors, or for favors due and as yet unpaid.
The Hollywood Connection
The use of the media as a political propaganda tool is old
hat, in fact, use of the Hollywood motion picture industry began as far
back as 1934 during the campaign to elect a new governor of California.
Upton Sinclair, a sincere and dedicated socialist, was running as a
Democrat, and had won the Democratic primary with a landslide. By
proposing a special tax on the California movie industry, Sinclair put
into motion events which transformed elections thereafter into propaganda
media events.
To scuttle the movie tax, and therefore to make Upton Sinclair lose the
election, studio heads like MGM's Louis Mayer, Irving Thalberg, and Harry
Cohn of Columbia conducted the first major motion picture oriented smear
campaign. In the process, they set a precedent which would thereafter
significantly reduce the fairness and integrity of the democratic process.
To scuttle Upton Sinclair, they first of all threatened to move at
least four studios to Florida. Next Mayer distributed blank checks to his
employees. All the cheques were made out to himself. Employees were
effectively being intimidated to donate money to a slush fund to defeat
Sinclair. Columbia's Harry Cohn used other tactics but also threatened his
staff using their job security. Warner Brothers studio simply assessed
each staff member a $3 contribution. The half million dollars generated
that way was increased to nearly 10 million, an unprecedented amount with
which to launch a political campaign for Governor. The money was used to
pay for newspaper ads, radio ads, billboard advertising, phony
anti-Sinclair smear groups, and a massive leaflet campaign.
All this direct participation by Hollywood was nothing when compared to
their most devastating piece of underhanded trickery and deceit that ended
up setting the standards for all future election campaigns, ...national or
otherwise.
MGM studio, under Irving Thalberg's direction produced a contrived
campaign propaganda film that was edited down to 6 minutes and added to
Randolph Hearst's Newsreels which normally ran twice per week in all
theaters. Louis B. Mayer went so far as to threaten to withhold the
feature films if the political trailers were not shown as well.
{B149}
The film depicted respectably dressed citizens declaring their intent
to vote for Sinclair's opponent. Those who spoke well of Sinclair were
chosen for their hobo derelict appearance. Of course many of the hobo type
characters who appeared in the smear pictures were studio extras( i.e.
Hollywood actors and actresses). {B150} The carefully edited film
left the impression that Sinclair was a champion for rough illiterates who
would quickly transform California into a welfare state. The campaign
employed psychological tactics to implicitly and explicitly stress that
Upton would turn California into a Russian colony. They even stooped to
suggest that he might begin dynamiting churches and nationalizing the
children.
William Randolph Hearst Sr., father of one of the previously mentioned
billionaire owners of consolidated media holdings, used not only his
California newspapers to spearhead the attack on Sinclair, but his Movie
Newsreels as well to smear Sinclair to defeat.
Those who wish to read about this precedent setting event in much
greater detail can refer to an article entitled, How Hollywood fixed an
election, which appeared in the Nov 88 issue of the American Film
magazine. Hollywood, thereafter, was considered a vital and indispensable
political tool.
Today's Elections
Elections are still won and lost through media
manipulations. The impact of carefully designed and contrived backdrops
for the carefully scripted "30 second sound bites" is well
known to media manipulators who employ proven psychological tactics.
In the 1988 Presidential campaign, Bush's Republican party supporters
distributed millions of leaflets stating that all the murderers, rapists,
drug pushers, and child molesters in Massachusetts would vote for Michael
Dukakis, ...still a powerful brainwashing trick in the 80's. The degree to
which a society can be effectively controlled using the media cannot be
overemphasized. Mr Bush's TV commercials discrediting Mr Dukakis were
practically on a par with those that were used to discredit Upton Sinclair
back in 1934.
Unfortunately, the public is already so jaded, that the media
manipulators don't even try to conceal the fact that what gets shown on TV
as casual interviews are in fact, specially staged and scripted
performances filmed by "purposely invited TV film crews", to achieve
"predetermined reactions" at "precisely the desired time". They are known
in the industry by the euphemism "photo opportunities".
Although photo opportunities used to be private affairs, nowadays they
are pre-arranged and stage-managed so well, that everyone gets invited to
record the event for their papers or their TV networks.
Even the rhetoric used by our nation's leaders is not their own. Some
of the most important words uttered during these sound bites by both
Ronald Reagan and George Bush were written by a hired speech
writer, Peggy Noonan. What qualifications does she have to write
stirring speeches for successive Presidents? Well, it certainly can't be
her political convictions, because she used to be a Democrat. But she did
work for seven years as a writer and producer for CBS News, and even wrote
copy for Dan Rather.
Ms Noonan helped George Bush to see a "thousand points of light", just
as she helped Reagan convince the nation that:
"...the freedom fighters of Nicaragua. You know the truth
about them. You know who they're fighting and why. They are the moral
equal of our Founding Fathers". Doesn't that kind of bring
lumps to your throat?...the variety you would just as soon spit out.
{B151}
The reason that the media cooperate so readily and eagerly in this type
of trickery can be traced back to the McCarthy era in the 50's. Even then
the elite were so aware of the media's potential for influencing public
thought, that they took the drastic step of ridding the media of those who
might offer serious criticism against either the elite or their policies.
Purging America's Leadership of Critics
In the early 50's, capitalists were in a mild state of
paranoia concerning the growing spread of Communism throughout the world.
The people of China had just followed in Russia's footsteps and overthrown
their emperor. At this point, America realized that the best way to stamp
out public discussion of the shortcomings of monarchies and governments
run by economic elite minorities, was to purge the country's key positions
of socialist thinkers. The purge was spearheaded by a Republican Senator
Joseph McCarthy who worked in close cooperation with J. Edgar Hoover, the
head of the FBI. Together these two men mounted a fierce campaign that
lasted years, and quite successfully instilled in the public a fear and
hatred of anything associated with socialist thinking. Nowhere was this
carried out more fiercely than for people working in Hollywood's film
industry.
During the McCarthy era, anyone working in the industry, whom the FBI
suspected of having socialist leanings was branded as a Communist, and
banned from employment. Many went underground and continued working under
false identities, while others fled the country. As a result of this
purge, Hollywood continues to be one of the most useful controlled outlets
for propaganda. Because this campaign was carried out so ruthlessly,
pro-elite sympathizers were left to occupy all the key social
positions, and especially with regard to the media.
Maintaining Team Loyalty and Unity
Today, the most important media members of our society to
be kept sympathetic, or on the payroll are: TV Network owners and
directors, newspaper owners and editors, film company board members, and
advertising industry heads, etc.
Incidentally, before I had become aware of the degree of consolidated
ownership of the media, I had always wondered how such tight control over
the press is managed, and I was given my first clue when on a flight from
Tucson one day, I met a newspaper editor who was on his way to an editor's
convention. When he mentioned that he used to work for the CIA, a group
renown for its covert scheming, I was left wondering how many more of the
nation's editors had acquired at least some of their skills from this
College of Infiltrating Activists.
An additional, but vital clue concerning media's link with Capitol Hill
and the White House came when I learned that Henry Kissinger and Gerald
Ford have served together on the board of directors of 20th Century Fox.
You don't need to be a rocket scientist to recognize this
inter-relationship of the elite with both the media and Hollywood,
as a telltale hint of the complex ways in which the elite achieve their
political and psychological objectives. Hollywood's propaganda potential
alone is enormous and has been used extensively. What more obvious
connection exists between Hollywood and the White House than Ronald Reagan
himself. When Reagan needed support for his Star Wars program, up popped
movies like Rambo (with Presidential endorsement, ...no less), Rambo II,
and Rambo III. Is there an end in sight? Which leads us to the question as
to whether there was any conscious intention for the Star Wars movie to
help prepare the public for a military space program by the same name.
Not surprisingly, in the 60's era when police were being publicly
criticized and looked down upon because of their heavy handed use of force
to suppress demonstrations and anti-Vietnam war protests, TV cop shows and
movies, and "made for TV" movies started springing up like mushrooms to
the ludicrous extent that at one point in time there were more than twenty
police promotional films, (TV cop shows), running concurrently. Although
Hollywood has a large role to play, newspapers and TV play the biggest
role.
Today, the media is as interconnected with the elite's political
functionaries as ever. Incidentally, Caspar Weinberger, formerly Ronald
Reagan's Trilateral Commission Defense Secretary, is now the publisher of
Forbes magazine. {B153} And oh yes, Texan Eugene C. Pulliam,
founder and owner of a chain of 7 newspapers died in 1975 leaving his
grandson Dan Quayle some media power too.{B154}
Ownership of the media has never been more consolidated, and the
ability to control public thinking has never been more tightly controlled.
Consequently, using the media to get sympathetic politicians elected in
the first place, is a snap. Discrediting "liberalism" is a snap. Carrying
on alliances with dictators (without suffering any media criticism) is a
snap.
Acknowledging the Elite's Teamwork
By far the most important thing to realize is that the
elite remain in power because they are highly organized. The elite use
campaign financing to buy loyalty from politicians who then work in close
cooperation with upper echelon media managers to sell the elite's actions
and policies to the public. Together, they determine and control the
content of information that flows out through the mass media. In effect,
they practically dictate the opinions of those who derive their
impressions of America and the world primarily from newspaper and
television sources.
For those of you who are still reluctant to think that the so-called
"freest media in the world" cooperate with politicians behind the scenes
to accomplish just that, let me hand you a bombshell. Think back for a
moment to the fact that the Trilateral Commission is virtually operating
America. How could this information have slipped the attention of the
freest media in the world? (society's watchdog) Very simply. The reason is
as shocking as it is revealing.
To help elect Carter, and to be assured of coordinated cooperation of
the media when required, the following media kingpins were also included
as
Trilateral Commission Members:
- The Editor in chief of Time Magazine
- The Director of the New York Times
- The Director of the Wall Street Journal
- The Director of the Los Angeles Times
- The Editorial Director of the Chicago Sun Times
But that's not all! TV Network heads were also
plugged into the Trilateral Commission.
- The President of the Columbia Broadcasting System (CBS)
- And, the Chase Manhattan Bank board membership, ruled over by David
Rockefeller, also interlocked with the American Broadcasting Company
(ABC).
******************************************************************************
The fact that the media kingpins have cooperated to virtually keep
the public in the dark regarding the existence of the Trilateral
Commission, should stand as an excellent example of the extent to which
the elite and the media function as an integrated team. Media's
role as "society's watchdog" is a carefully cultivated hoax that allows
and assists the elite to enforce whatever social policies suit them
best. The fact that most voters haven't even heard of this extremely
powerful group of international social strategists constitutes one of
the most treasonous cover-ups of the century.
The Trilateral Commission could easily serve as a blueprint for a Big
Brother organizational structure. Fusion of the nation's economic elite
with the nation's media kingpins lies at the heart of elitist power. The
benefit of a Big Brother media pyramid, is that the elite can speak into
the media system at the top, and virtually the identical message reaches
each and every member of society. Let's consider the mechanisms that are
used to accomplish this.
Making Sure Everyone Receives the Same Story
Wire Services
Perhaps the worst aspect of the media brainwashing is the degree to
which the elite are able to coordinate and synchronize the
various newspaper and TV networks.
Seeing and hearing the same news on different networks and in
different newspapers automatically lends an air of authenticity and
credibility to the information. Considering the degree to which
ownership of the various media outlets has been consolidated into the
hands, and ultimately the control, of a very few of the elite, the mass
media information we receive deserves absolutely no credibility at all.
With TV, the variety of channels is superficial and misleading as
well, because one can swap from channel to channel and from Network to
Network only to see the very same film footage of news events, and the
same editorial comments being made from information they all picked up
from the same Wire Service. This is especially
true where government news releases are involved. {B154} Once the
government inputs its official colored version of an event or policy
into the Wire Services (like United Press International,
or Reuters), ...within seconds, every newspaper and TV station can be
broadcasting the identical story, whether it's the truth, or
misinformation. And because the Wire Services reach everywhere
on the planet, misinforming the whole planet at once is now possible. In
overtly totalitarian regimes, information control and censorship is
expected and apparent, ...in America it's worse because its hidden.
Getting the same message out to everyone has been made even easier by
yet another ongoing technique, the number of newspapers has been
drastically reduced. In other words, diversity of opinion and real
criticism of current policies has been almost totally eliminated.
Focusing Readers' Attention
One Newspaper Per City
Because the dissemination of selected information and ideas, as well
as censorship, is greatly facilitated by being brought under centralized
control, the consolidation of ownership of the diverse media outlets has
been going on relentlessly behind the scenes. With only one point of
view to publish, the elite don't require more than one newspaper per
city. Since the 20's, the number of cities with at least two daily
newspapers has dropped from over 500 to 19!! {B155}
Even though Los Angeles is one of the largest cities in the world,
its citizens can now take their pick from just one editorial view
of American and foreign events. In Nov 89, with the closure of The Los
Angeles Herald Examiner, citizens of L.A. joined the majority of
Americans who derive their knowledge of the world mainly from one
newspaper's point of view, and from TV, where information is
fragmented into 30 second sound bites, or equally superficial photo
opportunities.
To better understand how the smaller newspapers have been squeezed
out and eliminated, readers can read the article "Do you sincerely want
to publish? in Forbes Sep 18 1989 issue on page 68.
Logically, the process of consolidation should have been the focus of
utmost concern for a society that considers it possesses a free press.
It should therefore be noted that the media virtually never
editorializes about this ongoing process, ...or on the dangers to
freedom of speech that accompany consolidated ownership of the media.
In a country that boasts of having the freest press
in the world, it should be sadly acknowledged that nowadays the only way
the public get a chance to purposely voice their opinions through the
media is by writing a letter to the editor. From personal experience I
can attest to the fact that not only can such a letter be ignored
completely, it can be partially quoted, or quoted out of context.
Freedom of the press is limited to those who own
one.
A.J. LIEBLING In contrast, the editors or more
specifically the owners of the editors (Rupert Murdoch, and people like
him) can easily coordinate the same political coloration of information
simultaneously through each of the media entities under their
control, and raise any topic of their choice through the
editorials daily, ...repeating specific topics as often,
or as seldom as they wish. This of course brings up one other
aspect of coordinated news coverage that lends itself to consolidated
ownership, ..." precision timing" in the simultaneous
release, or delayed release of carefully prepared news items.
In America, the President reigns for 4 years, and
journalism governs for ever and ever.
OSCAR WILDE
Focusing Viewers' Attention (TV and Movies)
Viewer Guides
As far as TV programming goes, you might be tempted to point out that
a viewer has dozens of channels to choose from. In this regard, two
factors need discussing, uniformity of news and related news comments,
and the ratings game.
Not only can the network owners influence or determine the choice of
programming to be shown on their networks, Rupert Murdoch went even one
step further by buying up TV Guide. Now he is in a position to not only
determine what will be shown on his own Fox network, but he also
possesses the means to steer the viewer toward his network's programs by
rating his own programs slightly better than those of his competitors,
if and when he wishes.
Brandon Tartikoff, the programming head of NBC was quoted in the
August 22 1988 issue of Newsweek as saying "If we sense a loss of
objectivity in the editorial pages of TV Guide, we will take a shift in
print buying. We can advertise our shows without TV Guide." He was voicing his fears about how the new owner, Rupert
Murdoch, who owns the Fox Network might use TV Guide to influence the TV
audiences to watch more Fox Network programs and consequently less of
the programs from other networks. (such as NBC) {B156} More
importantly, the ratings (1,2 or 3 stars), or even the
descriptions of the programming can be written up (or
omitted). Viewers are more tempted to watch programs that have
been described with favorable descriptions, or rated with 3 stars or
more, than programs that have been given no description at all.
Documentary programs critical of the elite or their policies are
broadcast occasionally to maintain the illusion of freedom of speech,
but are usually given little if any description in a TV Guide so that
viewers who wish to view such material can very easily miss viewing
them.
When required, the TV viewer guides in newspapers can in fact be
coordinated with the write-ups in the TV Guide to maximize the number of
viewers for specially prepared propaganda programming.
The content of TV shows is a case in point. Many live talk shows and
situation comedies deal with current controversial topics. Therefore the
opinions voiced, as well as the opinions that are not voiced, are
extremely significant. Not only is the media purposely used to actively
shape public opinion, it is equally effective in controlling public
criticism of current events. Network news coverage, with its carefully
chosen verbal and video content plays a major role in the formation of
public opinion. If newscasters were all as concerned about the future
and integrity of the country as Bill Moyers or Fred Friendly, we would
have little to fear, but such is not the case.
In a similar way, movie reviews in both newspaper and in TV
commercials can be used for example to encourage moviegoers to watch a
particular show such as "Mississippi Burning", which not only depicts
black FBI men in an era in which black FBI men did not exist, but FBI
men risking their lives fighting for civil rights issues on behalf of
the blacks. It would be easy for members of the younger generation to
emerge from that movie thinking that FBI men were champions of the civil
rights movement at that time. In reality, it would have been fairer to
compare them with the type of Sheriff depicted in the movie "Easy
Rider". This particular example was not brought up to point out whether
or not the inaccuracy was intentional, but to illustrate just how easily
new generations in particular can be influenced by Hollywood or TV shows
into forming erroneous impressions of previous eras.
Now that we have seen how well the media is organized to influence
both the nation's newspaper readers and its TV viewers, let's consider
what the elite can achieve through media manipulation.{B156}
The Role of the Media
In Chapter 1, we saw that the elite actually exist,
despite their purposely low profiles. In Chapter 2, we saw how the elite
easily conscript politicians to carry out their wishes. In Chapter 3 so
far, we have seen how the elite have conscripted the media ...by buying
it up, purging it of critics, consolidating ownership, and placing
trusted pro-elite individuals in key positions. In reality, politicians
work in close cooperation with the nation's top media managers to sell
the elite's actions and policies to the public. Generally speaking, the
two groups work together to carry out the following simple tasks.
- 1) Convince the public that America has the best social system
possible.(i.e. in reality that Feudalism is the best possible system)
- 2) Prepare the public for the elite's upcoming actions or
policies.
- 3) Defend and justify the elite's actions and policies.
- 4) Discredit those who criticize the elite's actions or policies.
- 5) At election time, use any means available to help elect the
elite's political candidates.
To accomplish the above tasks,
the media team uses every psychological trick they think they can get
away with. And it is these tricks and techniques that we will now
consider.
Using Recurring, Mind-programming Concepts
Of all the psychological techniques used, the most
seductive but the least obvious, is that of giving repeated
media exposureto concepts that subconsciously program the
public to be pro-elite. The average American still clutches onto
flawed concepts of America that are being relentlessly dished out by the
media to leave the public in a state of mind that allows the elite to
continue their exploitation of national and international resources
unhindered.
The owners of the media have been working on conditioning our minds
for quite some while, and I remember how slowly my own mind responded to
the deep significance of the wealth distribution statistics. We are all
handicapped by the fact that it is almost impossible to reverse years of
brainwashing overnight.
Nevertheless, being aware of the techniques is the first step to
being free of their effects. Some quite erroneous themes have been
reinforced over and over, to the point that most Americans have been
totally seduced by the underlying message.
Let's take a look at the first example.
1) Anyone Can Get Rich, or Become President
If asked why they thought America was a land of
opportunity, many would reply that in America "anyone can be President,
and anyone can work hard and get rich".
The fact that only one of the 250 million Americans can be president
at any one time seems to get overlooked in the process. To say that
"practically no one in America can be President" would in fact describe
reality more accurately.
Let me ask the original question again. This time we will replace
fantasy with reality.
Why do you think America is the land of
opportunity?
Answer: Because only those candidates whom the elite wish
to back with campaign financing and media support end up in the White
House, and because the richest 1%, as well as the next richest 9%,
both separately own more assets than the combined assets of the bottom
90%. Hopefully, this example exposes once again the need to
come to grips with reality and shake off some of the traditional but
erroneous ways of thinking about America.
To help the bottom 90% accept their subsistence realities while
waiting for the pie in the sky to materialize, the elite employ a
couple of concepts to establish an air of normality to the existing
wealth distribution inequities. The first concerns the unwarranted
attention paid by the media to the British Royalty.
2) Royalty Kept in Spotlight (to Normalize
Inequality)
Isn't it a bit peculiar for a nation which supposedly
doesn't want a King or Queen, to have its newspapers and magazines print
news articles every time Prince Charles sneezes or Princess "Di" buys a
new dress? Of course it is, but the media has always given
unwarranted coverage to the British Royalty, therefore doing so does not
appear peculiar at all. However, by doing so, Americans are constantly
reminded that some fellow human beings are "Royalty".
The constant attention given to Royalty by the American
media is really only a clever mask to conceal a subtle
conditioning: to normalize the existence of class and
economic distinctions and inequalities. The term
"Royalty" is loaded with connotations of superiority, both economic and
social. The fact that in 1990 people would still curtsy and bow to
fellow human beings who have successfully dragged Feudalism into the
21st century bears witness to the power of this technique. What a
pompous affront to mankind, but a cunningly useful mind conditioning
tactic that the economic elite gladly keep dangling regularly in our
media. It is obvious that many, especially in Britain, have been
successfully conditioned to accept the normality of a caste system based
on inherited wealth and power. Force feeding the public (through books,
newspapers, TV, and magazines) with a steady diet of news items related
to "Royalty", ranks high on the elite's list of indispensable
mind-conditioning tricks. To cement the "more equal than others" concept
in the nation's psyche, another equally powerful and totally disarming
theme has been etched into the nation's thinking.
3) Any Degree of Economic Inequality is Acceptable
Is there anything in our present system to prevent
the same degree of wealth distribution inequities that occurred
under early Feudalism, from occurring again under Capitalism? The
answer is ...NO!!
As it stands today, we have been socially
conditioned to accept ANY degree of economic inequity
as an unquestionable condition of
capitalism! The preceding statements are extremely
significant. Your freedoms depend on your ability to appreciate the
folly of continuing to accept that condition.
The standard of health and education benefits available to an
individual is increasingly determined by one's economic wealth. For an
ever growing percentage of the nation, dental services, like legal
services and many aspects of medical care, are ceasing to be luxury
expenses. They are now downright unaffordable!
What loss of social services, or level of wealth distribution
imbalance are you prepared to accept or overlook? At what point would
you agree that something is definitely wrong with the system?
...when the richest 1% own more equity than 93% of us equals?
...or perhaps when they own more than the bottom 95% ? Quite
seriously, ...what percentage would it take? The elite are at 90% now,
...and still climbing.
4) Patriotism (i.e., Automatic Loyalty to the Status
Quo)
Generally speaking, the elite's candidates avoid taking
definitive stands on the vital issues of the day. Instead of actually
committing the party to specific action, they prefer to employ a range
of psychological tricks to deflect attention away from vital issues and
onto selected red herring non-issues.
At every opportunity, they try to be photographed amid a sea of
waving flags, while they spout hollow patriotic rhetoric which is
preceded and followed by bands playing the national anthem. It would be an hilarious spectacle if the brainwashing
did not have such serious consequences. In fact George Bush went so far
as to stage one of his election rally "photo opportunities" in a flag
factory (...of course it was televised!).{B157} By bonding
himself with the theme of patriotism, and physically surrounding himself
constantly with flags and items which conjure up ideas of loyalty to
country, George Bush and countless others before him built a
subconscious equation in the public's mind.
Reject George Bush, ...and you reject the flag, the nation,
military servicemen, veterans in wheelchairs, policemen, and every other
patriotic symbol that the media were called in to photograph him
with.
Anyone who objected to George Bush's plan of making the recital of
patriotic verse mandatory for school children was immediately tarred
with the "unpatriotic" brush. The elite have always used patriotism as a
vehicle to slyly demand automatic loyalty to the status quo.
This means automatic loyalty to an economic class system where the
richest 1 percent own more than 90 percent of the country's working
serfs, ...and where the majority (over 50 percent) of the population
most likely own less than 5 percent of the national wealth. George Bush
would also like you "to be forced" to swear allegiance to that system.
It's not difficult to figure why; the rich folks definitely don't want
Feudalism to stop. Don't you think you ought to salute the flag or
recite the pledge of allegiance because you want to, and not
because of a dictatorial imperative. Swearing allegiance to Feudalism is
somewhat akin to making reservations for your place on a chain gang.
Patriotism is only one of several themes that is used year-round to
condition the nation's psyche into accepting pie in the sky
concepts of collective well-being that a social system based on gross
economic and social inequalities will never achieve.
For years at a stretch, voters can be treated like governmental
doormats. Then for six months prior to an election, the doormats are
rolled up, bound together, and elevated to form a flagpole from which is
hung the largest flag available. Then like clockwork, in a show of
post-election gratitude, the doormats are again taken to the cleaners.
The recurring themes just mentioned are no doubt very familiar to all
readers. There are others. With regard to the tactics used every day,
normally one does not have to search hard for evidence of media
manipulations because the evidence is presented every single day on TV
and in newspaper news coverage. The evidence could fill whole libraries.
Media Manipulation Techniques
Let's now review some of the most used media
manipulation techniques. But to make the topic as interesting as
possible, we will consider how the techniques have been used to color
the reporting of American foreign policy. However, in order to see
behind the foreign policy smoke screen, a few initial perspectives may
help.
Perspectives for Interpreting Foreign Policy
Firstly, the elite's foreign policy actions become more
transparent when one recognizes that practically all foreign policy is
designed to assist the elite in modern day colonialist exploitation,
which can be categorized into five basic tasks.
- 1. Protecting their existing foreign investments (e.g., Kuwait,
Panama, etc.)
- 2. Setting up new exploitation opportunities (e.g., Mexico, former
Soviet Union countries, etc.)
- 3. Giving support to another colonialist ally (e.g., England with
the Falklands, France with Vietnam, etc.)
- 4. Trying to prevent the total loss of a country's exploitation
potential by preventing the country from adopting either a socialist
or communist system of government (e.g., Guatemala, Chile, El
Salvador, etc.)
- 5. Attempting to destabilize and overthrow anti-American or
existing left-wing governments to install puppets who will reestablish
exploitation opportunities (e.g., Iraq, Nicaragua, Cuba, Angola, etc.)
Because it is becoming more difficult to exploit either the
land or the human resources in America due to increasing pressure from
concerned citizens, corporate America invokes chess-like strategies to
make the human and natural resources of Second and Third World nations
available for their use.
For example, countries such as South Korea, which have a Communist
counterpart, have had billions of dollars pumped into their economies,
in an effort to produce Capitalist showcases to serve as ideological
bait for enticing less developed nations to form relationships with the
Western elite.
Successfully wooing foreign countries for this purpose is akin to
sending out marriage proposals. Seeing as the American Dream has turned
out to be an illusion, fewer and fewer countries are falling in love
with capitalism nowadays, a sign of the times, and many more marriages
of convenience are being arranged.
For a personal share of the profits, selfish and greedy dictators
have traditionally shown an eagerness to allow Western capitalists to
take advantage of their country's unorganized human resources, and to
exploit their natural resources, with scant concern for ecological or
long term repercussions.
The World Bank is often called in on these joyous occasions to supply
the engagement presents, usually some grants, or low interest loans.
Mention is often made at this time, of the lavish wedding presents to
follow, which normally include at least one air force base and/or a
naval installation. This is a particularly attractive scenario for
dictators who use the American backing to maintain their anti-democratic
dictatorial controls.
Occasionally however, a foreign country which possesses a resource,
strategic geographical position, a cheap unorganized labor pool, or some
other such advantage does not wish to do business with the
Western elite. Perhaps they feel capitalism would not provide the
optimum in long term development for their country, or they think they
can get a better deal elsewhere. In such cases, the Western elite may
secretly offer a lucrative proposal of support to other powerful
elements within the country. Almost always, a willing partner can be
found who is eager to take a shot at being the country's new dictator in
exchange for the necessary military support to stay in power long enough
to personally benefit from the co-venture.
The planning required for the more serious International social
functions is handled by the National Security Advisor, or by such little
known, but immensely powerful organizations as the Trilateral
Commission, and various other right-wing think tanks like the John Birch
Society and the Brookings Institution in Washington.
The catering for many of the functions is normally handed over to the
CIA, the operational arm of these various think tanks, which then has
the means at its disposal to covertly organize and fund whatever
paramilitary groups or individual operatives (like Oliver North), that
may be required to carry off the function. The inherent covert nature of
the CIA makes it a formidable tool in the hands of the elite who wish to
carry out strategies that would not stand up well to public or legal
scrutiny. Some of the events especially the marriages of convenience
previously mentioned can turn out to be rather socially unpleasant
events, because proceeding with the relationship usually involves
snubbing the country's current leaders. And that invariably leads to bad
blood between the rival forces.
Enough of perspectives.
Let's now review some of the techniques used to report actual past
foreign policy adventures in order to appreciate the media's invaluable
role in making cover-up excuses to sell the elite's
unethical and immoral conduct.
Restricting News Coverage to the Elite's Version
First of all, diversity of news coverage perspective is
killed simply by reducing the number of newspapers per city, ...mostly
to one. With TV, the variety of channels is superficial
and misleading when it comes to news coverage, and especially when
Official Government News Releases are involved.
Officially prepared government accounts of events are normally
characterized by a government spokesperson usually standing behind a
podium with a round seal of the United States mounted on it, and a flag
or two serving as a backdrop framing the speaker. Seated in front of the
spokesperson, there is normally a room full of reporters who ought to be
"on the spot", covering the story in person. Where military actions are
involved, a general or two usually accompany the speaker complete with
their charts, diagrams, and a specially prepared 30 second video clip.
We've all seen it. They do it all the time. Absent is the "on the spot
film footage" taken by freelance photographers, as there invariably is
if the action were taking place 5000 miles away in some remote corner of
China, or Russia.
The coverage of the Panama invasion was a classic example.
For nearly three days, Americans were shown the same two snippets of
government supplied film footage. The American news crews had been flown
into Panama by the Pentagon, but had been virtually held captive on one
of the American bases and fed with government approved news releases,
at government arranged news conferences. In reality, for the
first two days at least, there was a "news blackout" coverage of the
Panama invasion!! The elite refused to allow the American media to
report that whole blocks of the city had been bombed flat, and that
Panamanians had been rounded up and held in what amounted to
concentration camps to prevent them from defending their own country
against the invasion forces. We saw more of the Tiananmen Square action
than we ever did of the Panama invasion, and Panama is only an hour
away!!
At will, the government can, and periodically does, impose a
moratorium on "freedom of the press" at times when freedom of the media
is most required. This degree of censorship has the undeniable stamp
of a feudal oligarchy!
Did the press complain? Hardly! They're an integral part of the
cover-up. Protests by the media were conspicuous by their absence! In
any case, protests jeopardize jobs and therefore family security.
Restricted coverage is done primarily to control the first impressions.
Controlling the "First Impressions"
Most people form long lasting, if not permanent
appraisals of strangers based on their "first impressions" The same
thing happens with news stories, and this is the secret behind "photo
opportunities" and "30 second sound bites". The technique becomes
especially valuable where information is restricted to official news
releases, as was done with Panama. In order to maximize the effects of
restricted news coverage, another equally important tactic is used,
...the opinion polls.
Reinforcing Public Approval Using "Opinion Polls"
When the media team has to relate news that is
potentially embarrassing to the elite or their government functionaries,
the media team uses the power punch which consists of giving information
exclusively through one or more carefully prepared official news
releases, followed by newspaper and TV station editorials, thereafter
followed immediately by opinion poll surveys.
In addition to the "official pollsters (like the Harris or Gallup
polls) taking their surveys, both TV and radio stations ask their
viewers and listeners to call in right after their brainwashing
sessions to register their reactions to the news story.
Supportive reactions are fed back to viewers and listeners
almost immediately. The ease with which these polls can be rigged
may not be obvious. For example, if only three callers phoned in, two
supportive and one in disagreement, the station could announce that the
poll showed that twice as many viewers supported the President, the
policy, etc., as opposed it.
Not only that, in order to maximize the effects of gerrymandering,
the elite have spent great sums of money canvassing the country from
door to door to learn how particular households vote. In other words, it
would be relatively easy to call specific households and obtain
consistently predictable responses for opinion polls. This type of
information would also provide invaluable assistance in selecting jurors
as well.
In America, opinion poll results help to persuade people who have not
yet made up their minds. A good percentage enjoy the security of
agreeing with the majority. Thought-conditioning using opinion polls
works, perhaps a little too well.
In any event, the secret of success of this technique is to solicit
public reactions immediately after serving up either
misinformation, or a specially sanitized or colored version of
the event specially written to evoke feelings of patriotism and
loyalty to country. In this way, the elite can get public support
for practically any action or policy they care to carry out.
The technique was used very effectively with respect to Panama, to
gain widespread public support and approval for what amounted to not
only an invasion of another country's sovereign territory, but
more importantly, for an aerial assassination attempt to kill the
head of a foreign country.
The fact that America installed a puppet government to ensure its
continued control over the Panama Canal, was a topic of discussion
conspicuous by its absence. The fact that the treaty (allowing American
troops to occupy Panama) was in a few short years going to expire,
didn't get mentioned much by the press corps either.
With regard to the Panama invasion, and other events like it, Jeff
Cohen, executive director of Fairness and Accuracy in Reporting (a New
York-based media watch group), summed up the role played by the media
like this.
"What the American media does, is ...use jingoistic and
chauvinistic methods of explaining the world and then they poll the
audience to come back with jingoistic and chauvinistic opinions that
get recycled in an endless loop of flag-waving." Another
memorable instance of this technique being used occurred after the U.S.
navy had blasted an Iranian passenger jetliner out of the sky with 290
passengers aboard.
News of the event was channeled through official White House and
Pentagon news briefings which were repeated over and over, and which
drove home to Americans that it was Iran's errors and negligence that
were to blame. The two main justifications given for the missile attack
were the following:
- 1) The aircraft was outside the commercial jet flight corridor.
- 2) The plane was at about 7,000 ft. and descending on an intercept
path with the battleship Vincennes.
Then for the next three
days, the public was subjected to countless opinion polls, the results
of which overwhelmingly exonerated the U.S. navy of any guilt.
The public's opinions were already chiseled in stone when the U.S.
changed its story and admitted that the aircraft carrier Vincennes
had voluntarily placed itself under an Internationally acknowledged
commercial flight corridor. Moreover, the White House eventually
admitted that the jet had in fact taken off on schedule, and when shot
down, was flying in the International flight corridor at about 12,000
feet, and was either climbing or on level flight.
By that time, the truth held no significance
... the misinformation and opinion polls had already left their
indelible impressions!! All but the naive should
recognize that the American public had been purposely, and once again
quite successfully, fed lies so that the American elite could indulge in
additional psychological warfare and revenge. It should be easy to
recall in retrospect at least, that prior to the attack, the American
people had already been whipped up by anti-Iranian films depicting the
Iranian people as mindless shouting fanatics. Of course the Ayatollah
had been depicted even more so.
The media incidentally never voiced any concern that
it had served as a tool to dispense factual inaccuracies to the public,
nor did it attempt to hold anyone accountable for the lies, ...that
time, or any of the other countless times it has done so.
By eventually exposing the truth, however quietly (i.e. buried in a
small item on page 38 with an uninteresting byline, or at the tail end
of the classified section), the whole media information team could, for
posterity, point nevertheless to where the truth had actually been
printed. Unfortunately they make use of misinformation regularly.
Even now, it is alleged that some of the film footage for the 1987
CBS documentary "The Battle for Afghanistan" had been staged. In a
similar way, it now appears that a film shown by ABC News of July 21,
1989 which shows a briefcase being handed by an American diplomat to a
Soviet agent in Paris (the action intimating that the diplomat was a
spy), was a "simulation", shot by ABC in Vienna. {B159}
The only reason the truth emerges in some cases, is that witnesses
from foreign countries print the real truth in their own newspapers, and
then it becomes impossible to keep the truth suppressed.
In any case, the next technique to consider involves word trickery.
Selling Bad Products using "Word Trickery"
A good example of this deceitful technique was used in
the Panama invasion as well, by referring to the "aerial assassination
attempt" as "Operation Just Cause".
When American soldiers are faced with a "target-rich environment", it
probably means they got to fire into a crowd. But the word "rich" has an
automatic subconscious appeal.
The term "surgical strike" gets used because the term "surgical"
brings with it a positive association with doctors and saving lives.
Missiles have been called "Peacekeepers". Obvious connotation. And
of course to justify giving financial and military support to a group of
ruthless mercenary killers (usually the unemployed military henchmen of
deposed dictators), they are euphemistically referred to as "Freedom
Fighters".
Ever since the population of Nicaragua overthrew their American
backed oppressive dictator Anastasio Somoza in 1979, they have been
prevented from building their nation by having to divert most of their
nation's energy to fighting the Contras, who can only survive from
external American funding because they do not have the popular support
of the people. Consequently, the Contras have to
physically locate themselves outside of Nicaragua in the neighboring
country of Honduras, which has been coerced by the American elite into
providing a sanctuary. The Contras were from the start CIA funded
mercenaries whose numbers rise and fall not as a result of political
convictions, but strictly as a result of the availability of American
money. Through American Presidential and congressional support, the
former members of Somoza's death squads are allowed to continue on with
their work, even after it had been publicly exposed that the Contras
used the drug trade as a source of additional income.
This "Freedom Fighter" scenario, which involves public and covert
assistance from the CIA, congressionally endorsed political and economic
support, and a media whitewashing campaign, ...is played out with
regularity whenever dictators are toppled.
As a result of continually having to spend the same amount of money
to defend themselves as America gives the Contras, second world
countries like Nicaragua are kept economically and socially crippled by
this type of contrived prolonged war. They are prevented indefinitely
from getting on with the task of rebuilding war ravaged economies.
The Western media naturally keeps reporting that the new system is
not working; that the people were better off under the former dictator;
and that they are becoming demoralized and impatient with the new
leaders. Some of this might be true, but it is precisely what the
relentless American intervention is supposed to achieve.
News Omissions
As debilitating as the previously described Contra-style
guerrilla war is for a 2nd world nation, it is certainly better than the
fate suffered by such countries as Cambodia and Vietnam which were
almost bombed off the face of the earth. As a direct result of the "keep
them dumb or misinformed" tactics employed by media manipulators, the
severity of the U.S. destruction of Cambodia went almost
unreported, and should stand as another poignant example of news
censorship. Few North Americans would be aware that the death toll in
Cambodia was as high or higher than in Vietnam.
Incidentally, due to the horrendous quantity of AGENT ORANGE
defoliant used in these countries, it will take several generations
before vegetation growth returns to normal, and even longer before the
number of shameful birth defects subsides.
It will be many more decades before the last child's legs or arms are
blown off by the countless anti-personnel mines left by a military force
who simply got back in their planes and left their brutal legacy of
destruction behind. According to a recent documentary, these buried
anti-personnel mines still claim about 1 victim per week,
...ten years after the war supposedly ended!! {B160} Are
their lives any less valuable than American hostages?
Or has the value of the lives of the American hostages been purposely
inflated by the press for psychological reasons to justify the
continuation of atrocious Middle Eastern foreign policy. It should be
perfectly obvious that the hostages have much greater value to America
as captives than if they were free. Even if they were not valuable
in the propaganda war, the lives of the hostages are not as valuable to
America as retaining the billions of dollars removed from Iran with the
Shah. That's the bottom line. And that leads us to another favorite
technique.
Playing Down the Importance of Facts
We should remember that the American government and
media branded as terrorists those Iranians who are holding the American
hostages. But few Americans either know or remember that the hostages
were taken in desperation, as a bargaining tool to get back the billions
of dollars that the U.S. helped the Shah to "REMOVE" from Iran when he
was thrown out by his own countrymen. Moreover, it should be well
remembered that the Shah only came to power in the first place due to
the covert activities of the CIA chief Allen Dulles, and his brother
John Foster Dulles who was Secretary of State. The CIA covertly funded
terrorist street gangs in Iran to carry out operations that purposely
led to the overthrow in 1953 of the then ruling premier of Iran, Dr.
Mussadegh, who was not pro-American.
What few people readily acknowledge is that America regularly assists
departing dictators to literally clean out the foreign country's bank
vaults of money and gold.
The news media usually leaks out information like this as quietly as
possible, and once it has leaked it once, it may definitely not get
mentioned again. Yes, the truth may have been mentioned quietly, but the
lack of appropriate emphasis regarding the severity of the consequences
to the economy of the country concerned is obviously playing down
the relative importance of the facts.
The effects of stealing billions of dollars from the economy of a
Second World country is about as serious as bombing the industries in
each major city of that country. This type of atrocity is worse than any
colonial exploitation with perhaps the exception of the Spanish looting
of South and Central America.
American complicity in cleaning out other countries'
vaults has occurred on plenty of occasions and must be recognized as
an integral aspect of American foreign policy!!
The wealth removals that occurred when General Ky left South
Vietnam, when Baby Doc left Haiti, and when Ferdinand Marcos left the
Philippines, ...are just a few more of the recent examples. America also
helped Chiang Kai-shek to "remove" much of China's art treasures and to
clean out the China's Central Bank Reserves when the Communists came to
power in 1949.
Unfortunately, robbing foreign countrys' treasuries is just another
of the many tactics the American elite uses to hobble the economies of
governments newly formed by grass roots citizens who have banded
together to depose their dictators.
Possible Corrective Actions
The bottom 90 percent must first of all concentrate
their lobbying efforts to get rid of consolidated ownership and control
of the media, ...especially of TV and newspapers.
- 1) Legislation must be enacted to ensure that moneyed
interests do not control the content or dissemination of
information. Their ownership of the communications media involves a
"conflict of interest" of the highest order. No other reform
compares in any way with the importance of this prerequisite.
Increasingly, the quality and content of programming chosen by the
profit-oriented media owners has been so poor that it drove desperate
citizens to privately fund their own network (the Public Broadcasting
System). Unfortunately, the high cost of running stations has driven
certain PBS stations to seek a portion of the needed funding support
from basically the same sources that have corrupted the integrity of
our elected politicians(i.e. large corporations). Regrettably, the
programming occasionally and increasingly bears the stamp of the
elite's influence.
As long as the elite hold a virtual monopolistic control over the
media, only short-term, illusive control can be obtained. As long as
it is legal for individuals like Rupert Murdoch to single-handedly own
as many newspapers, magazines, TV stations, radio stations, and
satellite communications networks as they wish, the economic elite
will continue to use their influence to support and elect those who
show willingness to vote for policy that maintains the status quo.
Begin by restricting any single person, family, or corporation from
owning more than one media entity, ...in other words only one
newspaper, or one TV station, or one radio station, coordinated and
synchronized manipulation would become all that more difficult, if not
impossible. Not only should the sources of news information be stated,
harsh penalties should be introduced to act as disincentives for
spreading misinformation. Individuals should be jailed for knowingly
spreading misinformation.
THE PERMANENCE OF ALL OTHER REFORMS HINGES ON THE
DEGREE TO WHICH FREEDOM AND INTEGRITY OF THE MEDIA IS
ACHIEVED.
- 2) Periodically, individual investigative reporters such as Neil
Sheehan (The Pentagon Papers), or Bob Woodward and Carl Bernstein
(Watergate), achieve the recognition they so justly deserve for the
critical social role they play. However, this is unfortunately the
exception rather than the rule.
To encourage, and promote the
efforts of investigative reporters, and to counteract the effects of
consolidated ownership of the media, namely editorial control over the
content and coloration of media information, I advocate the creation
of an organization devoted to the promotion of media integrity.
The organization could also monitor the objectivity of the media,
and perhaps give out non-monetary recognition awards to individual
newspapers, or current affairs TV shows like 60 Minutes, which
show obvious integrity with regard to acting as social watchdogs.
Another of its functions would be to hand out grants each year as
rewards to investigative journalists, freelance or otherwise, who had
contributed to the exposure of social corruption or injustice.
With damage suits for single car accidents exceeding one million
dollars, an annual operating budget of from two to five million
dollars would seem a very small price to pay for social integrity
insurance for an entire nation.
- 3) Corporations, governments, and the media have all cooperated to
do everything in their power to discourage whistle blowers. A careful
review of former case histories will attest to the lengths to which
the elite are willing to go to keep employees from exposing the
unethical or corrupt activities of society's kingpins. Media
censorship continues in part because individuals who have made their
careers in the media cannot afford to jeopardize their family's
security, or their own career development to speak out against those
that employ them.
For the most part, reporters are told what stories to cover
and usually even how to cover them. The
stories are biased before the reporter even leaves his desk. In any
event, editors have plenty of opportunities to influence the emphasis
or coloration of a news item before it hits the news anchorperson's
desk.
Democracy becomes a government of bullies tempered by
editors.
RALPH WALDO EMERSON As long as the American
public see nothing unusual with ex-(national security advisers) and
ex-Presidents exercising their power and influence within Hollywood
movie studio boardrooms, and ex-(CIA agents) operating as newspaper
editors, American Feudalism and Neocolonialism will certainly flourish.
Big Brother is operating quite satisfactorily, thank you.
Chapter 4 The Hoax of Equality Before The Law
Putting the Legal Society in Perspective
Since Feudal days, those who dominated society remained in
power by surrounding themselves with individuals or groups of allies who
could provide them with a defense against either physical or legal
challenges. In the name of law and order, police and armies have
traditionally worked in conjunction with the legal community to enforce
the existing laws of the land.
A Relationship of Symbiotic Collusion
While there is certainly nothing wrong with social
mechanisms that maintain law and order, the flaw in the system is that the
economic elite have used their influence to fine tune the laws, and
especially the laws regarding taxation, to effectively maintain a status
quo, which allows a minority to economically and politically dominate and
manipulate the majority. So while the law society today can claim, as did
their counterparts in Feudal courts, to be impartially enforcing the laws
of the land, it must be recognized that the legal community is an
integral part of the reason why an economic elite continues to dominate
society into the 21st century. From Feudal times onward, the law
society has carried on a relationship with the ruling class that can best
be described as a state of symbiotic collusion.
Maintaining Authority Through Traditional Trickery
The reason that members of the legal fraternity have
always been treated and rewarded so well is that unlike dictators who use
brute force to retain their dominance, the legal fraternity have been able
to achieve the same thing for their masters without force and generally
with a facade of respectability. Amazingly, many of the psychological
techniques used in Feudal Courts (to intimidate those brought before the
courts) are still used today. Costumes complete with flowing robes,
wigs, and mandatory submissive gestures such as requiring all
persons in the court to rise to their feet when the judge enters or leaves
the room, still play an integral part of the stage-like theatrics of
Western justice.
Although not the most obvious, but certainly one of the most effective
ploys handed down through the centuries is the use of an unnecessary
specialized legal language that ensures that any one who is brought
before the courts is more or less compelled to not only employ, but put
himself or herself at the mercy of a member of the predominantly pro-elite
legal fraternity.
Because previous monarchs saw the wisdom of making the legal system at
least appear to be independent from the power of the ruling elite,
the legal fraternity has been able to carry out their mandate basically
unchallenged. Those who attempt to challenge the authority or wisdom of
the Courts can be immediately silenced, and when necessary, jailed for
"Contempt of Court". Of course this weapon is brought out, when required,
and serves effectively to enforce the "Divine Right of The Elite".
Because the legal society has, since Feudal times, been carrying on a
public relations show to justify and sell their role in society, let's
take a moment to blow aside the smoke screen and see the legal system in a
more realistic light. In that regard, a couple of perspectives may be
helpful.
Law Practices Are Profit-oriented Businesses
Like any and every other business, their first
priority is to make profits. What the public must come to grips
with is that law practices have balance sheets, and profit and loss
statements like every other business. Their relationship to "justice" is
at best incidental. Besides, crooks pay well. If anything, they tend to
pay extra well. Crooks and criminals have no difficulty whatsoever hiring
lawyers from prestigious law firms who are well connected with the upper
echelons of the judiciary.
Whether lawyers are defending the criminal or the victim, they are out
to win. Justice becomes irrelevant.
Losing a case detracts from a lawyer's record of successes. And to
their peers, employers, and clients, it can reflect a lack of expertise.
Making sure the good guy wins, and justice prevails, has got nothing to do
with making a law practice turn a profit. It is precisely because they
have little allegiance to "justice", that makes them ideal candidates to
represent the elite in politics.
The Legal Society Does Not "Dispense Justice"
The public has been incessantly brainwashed into
associating "justice" with the practice of law. In reality, the two are
only vaguely related. Judges and lawyers in one state can cause a criminal
to be executed. In another, they are prohibited from doing so. In both
cases they have interpreted and enforced the law.
Contrary to the generally believed precept, it is not the
responsibility of either judges or lawyers to make sure that justice
prevails. Whether a law is "just", or not, is quite irrelevant to both
judges and lawyers. Their job is simply to interpret and
enforce "the law". Normally they interpret the law in a
manner most favorable to those in power. This latitude, with respect
to interpretations, helps to bring about what amounts to "the divine
right of the elite". Over time, conservative judgments will actually
alter the course of a nation, especially through judgments handed down by
the Supreme Court.
Therefore, the difference between "law" and "justice", while being
subtle, is the key to a proper perspective of the legal system. While the
general public has been encouraged to believe that the justice system
"dispenses justice", it does no such thing.
If the tax laws are unjust to the bottom 90%, then it must be
recognized that the justice system enforces "injustice" in that
case!! Don't forget, it is our justice system that enforces Feudalism.
We must not get taken in by psychological word tricks. Words with
positive connotations are often purposely used to market things with very
bad connotations, ...like when George Bush named his aerial assassination
attempt on Manuel Noreiga as: "Operation Just Cause". "Just Causes" are as
related to "assassination attempts" as "true justice" is to the Justice
System". Remember too that every dictator runs his country with a "Justice
Department".
Those who persist in believing that the justice system is there to
"dispense justice" are doomed to be horrified every time they observe the
justice system giving better treatment to the criminal than to the victim.
Mind you, it is only fair to acknowledge that the elite have gone out of
their way to persuade the general public to perceive the justice system in
this light. In reality, the legal community have traditionally given their
loyalties to the highest bidders, and that has been and continues to be
the rule, rather than the exception.
When Drexel Burnham Lambert Inc., was facing racketeering charges in
connection with its extensive involvement with LBOs and junk bonds, Drexel
had little trouble hiring the legal services of the former White House
Chief of Staff Howard H. Baker. Mr Baker was a logical choice to help
launder Drexel's public image and help fend off the racketeering charges
since he was so successful in pulling the White House through the
Iran-Contras minefield. It was alleged that Baker would
not be involved in any matter which was under scrutiny by the government.
{B161}
As long as we are trying to proceed with as few illusions as possible,
let's clarify the functions of the legal society.
The Role Of The Legal Community
The American legal community performs four distinct
functions.
- 1) By controlling the creation of new "conservative" legislation, as
well as an agreed upon "conservative" interpretation of older
legislation, they ensure continuing domination of the economic elite,
and provide safeguards for their current share of wealth and power.
- 2) Through harsh penalties for the bottom 90%, and milder token
punishments for the erring elite, they enforce a social order that is
only barely and superficially related to "justice" in the true sense of
the word.
- 3) They provide a means of settling squabbles between members of the
elite, especially with regard to disputes over wealth and power. The
poor on the other hand simply can't afford justice.
- 4) They provide a vehicle for the law society as a whole to
gradually increase its share of the nation's wealth and power.
The Supreme Court
With regard to the law society's first role, it may be
appropriate to recall the distinction between Conservatism and Liberalism.
Conservatism maintains the status quo which in turn ensures the
rich stay rich and the poor stay poor.
Nowhere is the ultimate nature of American society decided more than by
the nine U.S. Supreme Court judges in Washington who have ultimate power
with regard to the interpretation and intent of American law. Although
judgments are most often based on existing precedents, members of the U.S.
Supreme Court can sometimes bring about virtual reversals to previous
precedents, as recent judgments with regard to civil rights and abortion
have clearly shown. Consequently, the judges' personal philosophies and
political leanings become extremely relevant, mainly because the nature of
the American social fabric hinges on their judgments. Needless to say, the
elite are critically aware of the role played by these key judges in
maintaining the status quo.
Hence, it is not by accident that their appointments are for life,
and that they are personally nominated by the president. It is no surprise then that Supreme Court judges who are sympathetic
to Republicans choose, when possible, to retire during a Republican
administration so that the conservative president in power can
appoint another conservative judge (for life) to take the retiree's
place. Accidentally, or by design, it is extremely rare for a presidential
nominee for the Supreme Court to be rejected.
Therefore it is not difficult to imagine how a Supreme Court,
sympathetic to the elite (i.e. conservative), could minimize or retard the
progress of civil rights or any other issue that threatened to alter the
distribution of wealth or power. The bottom 90% of America must begin to
recognize that the Supreme Court has been used as a powerful weapon to
fend off serious attempts to alter the legislative infrastructure that
determines the nation's allocation of wealth and power. Future historians
may well consider that Ronald Reagan's greatest contribution to the
economic elite was his choice of three of the five currently serving
conservative Supreme Court Justices. {B162} The present members of
the U.S. Supreme Court now have the potential to be the well-spring of
American "conservatism" for decades to come. This was precisely the same
mandate carried out by Feudal Judges.
If any reader is tempted to think that the problem might be solved by
electing the U.S. Supreme Court judges, think again. Here's what
happens in Texas, one of the states that does elect its Supreme Court
judges.
Unfortunately, the same campaign funding quid pro quo arrangements,
that exist between elected politicians and the elite, also exist between
the judges and their campaign contribution benefactors. Traditionally,
judges in Texas have been dependent on campaign support from members of
their own legal profession. Of course this creates an obvious conflict
of interest when a judge presides over a case where one of the lawyers has
provided loyal campaign support. Justice is truly placed in a compromising
position whenever a judge presides over a case in which a "supportive"
lawyer is dependent on contingency compensation. When lawyers can get as
much as 70 cents of every dollar awarded to a plaintiff, awarding the
plaintiff is difficult to distinguish from rewarding the lawyer. Hmmm, now
just how big should that award be?
It is privately acknowledged in the Texas legal community that the
Texas Supreme Court has for some time been effectively owned and
controlled by the plaintiff attorneys who hold tremendous lobby power in
that state. {B163} So much for the idea of electing judges.
Lawyers in Congress
The degree of democracy that exists in a
country can be measured by the degree to which the will of the majority is
being carried out, and by the degree to which the majority share in the
distribution of wealth. Nevertheless, the introduction of democracy in
America was tolerated by the wealthy elite simply because it posed no
great threat to their power or to their wealth. Under so-called democracy,
as under Feudalism, the wealthy elite have maintained the power to control
the distribution of wealth.
Some of the Founding Fathers did their very best to put an end to the
dominance of an elite minority by wording the Constitution in such a way
that America could become a land of equitable prosperity, with freedom of
speech and equality before the law. America today bears little resemblance
to the nation they tried to build. It doesn't take much to appreciate that
it is not the will of the majority that the richest one percent
should own more assets than the collective wealth of the bottom 90%!!
Unless those who are elected to represent the bottom 90%
actually use their power in Congress to represent the needs and
interests of the bottom 90%, democracy does not take place. And democracy
is most certainly not taking place.
What is happening in American politics, is that only wealthy people who
have the support of even wealthier individuals and corporate benefactors
are now able to compete in the electoral process. Because of this
financial pre-requisite, citizens who could truly represent the needs and
interests of the working class are virtually excluded from representing
their economic peers in Congress. Instead, members of the legal profession
are slowly but surely filling all the seats that representatives of the
people are supposed to occupy, but cannot, because they quite
understandably lack the financial support of the economic elite. As it
stands today, 60 out of 100 senators, 186 out of 435 House members, and
the majority of members of both the Senate and House Judiciary Committees
have law degrees. {B164}
Most likely none have known hunger, most likely none have ever worked
for the minimum wage, and probably very few can even count a single blue
collar family among their friends. In other words, at best they possess an
academic appreciation of the interests and needs of the citizens they
supposedly represent. Socially and economically, the two social groups
travel in totally different social circles.They mix with
a cross-section of their electorate briefly at election time, but for the
most part, their associations are restricted to their own peer group with
whom they compete for success in a material world. And of course as
politicians, it is the wealthy special interest groups that have always
offered them the most career rewards.
In any event, the 53,000 lawyers belonging to ATLA, the Washington DC
based Association of Trial Lawyers of America (actually a plaintiff
attorneys' lobby), have given money to 1,485 Congressional Democrats and
656 Republicans since 1977.
In 1987-88, it donated $3.9 million, and this figure does not include
attorneys' individual contributions. {B165} As large as the
contribution may appear, it is modest when one takes into consideration
that Professor Lester Brickman of the Yeshiva Brickman Cardozo School of
Law has estimated that plaintiff attorneys income from contingent fees
(their share of settlements) exceeded $10 billion.
Lawyers in Private Practice
Like Al Capone, the elite are usually protected behind a
host of front men, many of whom are lawyers. As a group, it can easily be
said that lawyers have traditionally been raised on the elite's payroll,
and willingly act on their behalf. Most of the highest paid lawyers,
either directly or through law firms, find themselves on corporate or
government payrolls. They are normally called upon to carry out and defend
ongoing corporate strategies and actions.
Corporation comptrollers are usually willing to risk carrying out
unethical and sometimes illegal practices for the rewards involved,
because they too are reassured by the fact that the full power of the
corporation may be used for their defense if they are caught. When
necessary, corporate lawyers will also use all their acquired legal acumen
to obstruct, delay and otherwise prevent attempts to condemn or punish
their employers.
The continual close association of lawyers and judges with criminals
has led to a difficulty in distinguishing one group from the other. The
roles have become increasingly blurred, as most full-time criminals employ
powerful full-time lawyers who are well connected with the judiciary.
How then does one distinguish a lawyer permanently in the employment of
a criminal, ...from a criminal with a law degree?
In those countries where the wearing of wigs has been discontinued, the
job of distinguishing lawyers from the criminals for whom they work has
become doubly difficult. Lawyers employed permanently by our leading
corporate criminals may yet choose to start wearing wigs, ...and false
noses and glasses as well! Those who work in private
practice end up providing services almost exclusively for the moneyed
class, because the majority of society members simply can't afford to buy
justice.
The Legalization of Crime
Perhaps the worst aspect of many of the economic scams
mentioned in Chapter 1, is that they are normal legal business procedures
...made legal through carefully orchestrated legislation!
Legislation that would prevent or eliminate the scams has purposely not
been passed, ...or even written. As a result of widespread deregulation,
laws to inhibit the economic elite, and punishment doled out for
high-level white collar crime, are both conspicuous by their absence. For
example, little incentive exists to discourage the unethical business
speculations that leave S&L owners rich, and S&L depositors
holding the bag. Therefore, among the elite, it is usually only the
careless or the greedy who end up breaking the laws to make money faster,
or to recover from bad business judgments.
Even when the elite do get caught red-handed breaking the few laws that
do exist, their brush with the law often translates into virtual immunity
from punishment. Why? Because the legal system was designed to be of
maximum benefit to them, just as the system was designed to provide them
with the maximum financial benefits.
Court Trials ... A Disgraceful Farce
When a serious case comes along that involves the defense
of one of the elite, the whole "protection of the elite" fraternity swings
into action. Of all the ways used to get the elite out of the limelight
and off the hook, the method of choice nowadays seems to be the extremely
effective long drawn out investigations, prior to long drawn out
court cases, prior to the inevitable further long drawn out
appeals, that inevitably result in defenses involving lapses of
memory, etc., etc., Although the media usually play a very important
role throughout the proceedings, the court fiasco is the most galling.
Let's start by reviewing some of the methods used to provide extra legal
benefits to the elite.
Pre-trial Tactics
To begin with, some or all of the following standard
legal tactics are employed: DENY guilt; DECLARE one's innocence;
DESTROY any incriminating evidence; and DELAY the investigation and/or
prosecution proceedings.
Of course during the initial stalling period, the press obligingly says
as little as possible of a derogatory nature so as to ensure the defendant gets a fair hearing. Sure. When however, the
investigation drags on long enough, and the press quietly drop the story,
the public's anger dies down as anticipated. This tactic is always used in
all serious cases like Watergate, or the Bhopal gas incident. Years can go
by, the longer the better. But these are just the pretrial tactics
carried out to give the media time enough to diffuse whatever bad
impressions the general public might be harboring. If however, despite the
media's cooperation a trial becomes necessary, then the real hijinks
begin. The elite usually begin the farce by hand-picking a jury!!
Hand-picking the Jurors
This is perhaps the most ludicrous method used to subvert
justice that has ever been devised. I speak of course of the jury system
itself, the quality of which practically defines the system's level of
justice. The Greek word for democracy translates literally as
"equality before the law". Not surprisingly, the Greek jury voting system
became a model for both America's popular voting system, but its legal
jury system as well. The basis for its fairness, and the quality for which
it won world acclaim, was its ability to judge a person by a large
number of randomly chosen peers. Using an ingenious lottery
system to choose its jurors, the Greeks chose from 201 to sometimes over
2000 jurors to cast votes. The American jury voting system, on
the other hand, is vastly inferior to its Greek counterpart. Instead of
allowing 201 to 2000 or more peers to cast their votes, the Americans use
only 12. Instead of them being randomly chosen from the population,
jurors can now be hand-picked by the lawyers. In states like
New York and Texas, lawyers are free to ask the jurors what books they
read, what television programs they watch, etc., etc. Increasingly
sociologists and psychologists are being called in by lawyers to assist in
the selection of "friendly" jurors. Who needs to bribe jury members when
you can help to hand-pick a "friendly" juror or two before the trial even
begins.
These specialists will not only assist in the jury selection, they
will, for clients with deep pockets, even recruit a surrogate
jury with socioeconomic profiles similar to the actual jury
members. The surrogates are paid to sit in the public gallery. At the end
of the day's court session, the surrogates would be interrogated as to
their reactions to the testimony given so far. Armed with these insights,
the lawyers then modify their legal strategies accordingly. One
California-based firm called Litigation Services already has a staff of
90. Its clients have included IBM, Pennzoil, and the
makers of Agent Orange who are being sued on behalf of war veterans.
Both jury selection, and the monitoring of surrogate juries constitute
such mockeries to justice, that it ought to be difficult to find a
thinking person who does not have contempt for the court!!
Tactics in Court
There are, unfortunately, plenty of other reasons to feel
contempt for the courts. Refusing to answer the court's questions by
hiding behind the 5th Amendment has allowed many a Mafia king to walk
free. Charles Keating in the S&L scam, is refusing to answer
questions. Perhaps his name too will be added to the long list of peers
who have walked free courtesy of the 5th Amendment.
Or, the lawyers get an opportunity to bargain between lawyers
like judge and jury combined. They get to bargain for such things
as pleading guilty to a much reduced charge. Plea bargaining must
automatically lessen a person's guilt, because it sure as hell lessens the
punishment.
The most unforgivable travesty of justice, however, has to be
granting a criminal total immunity for giving evidence against
someone else. Sounds like a script out of some perverse comedy instead of
a system of justice that people around the world are expected to emulate.
The potential for abuse is mind boggling especially when one includes a
little covert bribery acceptable to both parties. Of course, when a lawyer
is involved, bribery becomes plea bargaining, and in business it becomes
"greenmail". But any fool ought to acknowledge that when plea bargaining
waddles like injustice, and quacks like injustice, it's usually injustice.
For those who can afford to hire the most experienced and devious
lawyers, finding legal technicalities to invalidate evidence
or cause mistrials is yet another method of using the justice system to
walk free. The list of tricks and methods seems endless. In any case,
whether the defendant is found innocent or guilty often hinges on the
experience and craftiness of one's lawyer. The richer you are, the more
cunning a lawyer you can afford, the more chance you have of winning -
regardless of whether you are innocent or guilty.
But let's follow a case right through to a conclusion.
Just before the hand-picked jury leaves the room to decide its verdict,
the judge gets to give his "advice to the jury" speech.
These are the last words spoken before the jury deliberates, and
psychologically they will carry inordinate influence due to the authority
that delivered them, in addition to the fact that they were the last words
spoken. Conservatively speaking, here's another obvious opportunity to
substantially influence the verdict.
And lastly, was Oliver North particularly worried that
the jury would find him guilty? Not really, because the press had already
prepared the public for a lenient sentence, as they always
do when the need arises.
Lenient Sentences
Judges who are in a position to sentence privileged
members of the establishment, (or their front men who face convictions),
are not only able to impose suspended sentences and
community service, but they can direct the offenders to
minimum security prisons ...where the conditions and/or special
treatment turns the detention center into something rivaling a
fitness retreat. A 60 Minutes TV show coverage of the topic
referred to one such detention center sarcastically but aptly as Club
Fed. When the Watergate fall guys were not busy jogging into shape, or
visiting with their families, they were hard at work on specially supplied
equipment, ...writing their memoirs to make a few extra million.
Sample Watergate justice for the elite:
Example: John M. Mitchell (while Attorney General)
Convicted of: one count of conspiracy, obstruction of justice; one
count of perjury; two counts of false statements to a grand jury.
Sentenced to: 19 months of confinement at an Alabama air force base.
Health spa?
Example: Richard M. Nixon (while President, ...proven
Watergate coconspirator) Convicted of: absolutely nothing
Sentenced to: freedom to write a book to make him
millions. Note: Not surprisingly, the whitewash did not stop
with the Nixon administration. With absolutely no authority or mandate to
do so, President Gerald Ford, Nixon's successor, pardoned Richard Nixon of
all crimes he had committed in office.
In one of his rare unscripted utterances, Mr. Reagan put it quite
succinctly:
Politics is not a bad profession. If you succeed there
are many rewards, if you disgrace yourself you can always write a
book. The justice system is in such a
farcical state now, that for most influential politicians, it doesn't seem
to matter how much their guilt is exposed. Rarely do their wrong doings
result in more than resignation, followed soon after by royalties on their
subsequent books. As if that were not hideous enough, the media regularly
rally to attempt to canonize the establishment's high echelon criminals,
for their patriotism, ...usually during their hearings and trials.
Finishing Touches (Media Help, and the Appeals)
In Bill Moyers' book, The Secret Government,
readers are exposed to the mechanics of a covert organization which
operated out of the White House basement no less, and whose purpose was to
keep the Contras in operation despite a Congressional ban forbidding the
action. {B166} In short, the White House served as the center of
operations to defy Congress and sell arms to the Iranians to make money to
illegally fund the Contras. To make a long story short, even though the
whole plot was fully exposed, the media together with the corrupted legal
system managed to absolve Oliver North by putting patriotism on trial.
Specially orchestrated sound bytes and photo opportunities which
praised and supported Oliver North and his actions were prepared and shown
repeatedly over several weeks in an attempt to not only absolve "Ollie",
(as he was affectionately referred to in the media), of blame and guilt,
but to elevate him to the stature of a national hero, despite his
shameless display of contempt for congressional and criminal law. This
particular event involved so many of the nation's elite functionaries,
that no less than the attorney general Edwin Meese was entrusted to
oversee the investigation, ...(whitewash, paper shredding, &
cover-up).
As champion of the elite, Oliver North was given a three year suspended
sentence, two year's probation, a fine of $150,000 and was ordered to
perform 1200 hours of community service. {B167} As his defense
quite aptly shows, even when a CIA operative purposely breaks the law, and
publicly admits to misleading and lying to Congress, the elite and
friends of the elite are just a little more equal before the law than the
rest of the nation.
Needless to say, anyone higher in the chain of command would be
similarly immune from the law, whether or not threats are made to
implicate superiors or whether any unobtainable top secret files are
requested as vital for a fair defense. The public never gets to see the
files or even know for sure that they exist, so no one can dispute
the claim. Game over, the elite can do as they wish.
For all intents and purposes, covert operatives of probably all nations
operate with total disregard of the law, and are rewarded with virtual
immunity from it. The French military guerrillas who blew up the
Greenpeace boat in Auckland harbor, committing murder in the process, were
quickly released to work again in their same capacity.
As previously mentioned, Patty Hearst was released virtually without
punishment, into her billionaire father's custody despite photographic
proof of her holding a gun during a bank hold-up.
Does the injustice stop there? Not in Oliver North's case. The story
actually gets worse. "Ollie" was convicted on May 4 1989 of three felony
counts, one of which was for shredding evidence. On Jul 5, he
automatically lost his retirement pay of $23,000 per year due to a Federal
law that stipulated that anyone convicted of destroying Federal documents
would "forfeit his office". Faced with the dilemma of their hero being
penalized like that, the U.S. Senate quite unabashedly voted 78-17 to
alter that law by eliminating the clause that disqualified Ollie from
collecting the $23,000 per year. Quid Pro Quo!! Not only does he have his
pension back, he is appealing his convictions.
Perhaps neither he nor the American justice system has heard of the
Nuremberg trials.
As we all know, by the time an appeal goes through, a whole generation
will have passed, or so it will probably seem. If and when appeals go as
far as they can, they end up in the U.S. Supreme Court which was described
earlier. Needless to say, the five conservative judges have the last and
final word in the matter. If they quash a conviction. The defendant walks
free.
Now that we have looked at "justice" for the rich, let's have a quick
look at "justice" for the poor. Pardon me, but I squirm a little whenever
the word justice is used in connection with the justice system.
Justice for the Bottom 90
In a case where a person is being charged, one of
the most noteworthy characteristics of justice for the bottom 90% is that
justice comes more swiftly. Generally speaking, the poor don't get to walk
the streets for months or years prior to their case being heard.
If on the other hand a person with little or no financial reserves
has been wronged, and wishes to press charges against perhaps a
company that has performed shoddy or dangerous work, then the wheels of
justice usually grind to a halt. In America, the cost of legal
representation is so prohibitive, that most who belong to the working
class can not afford to use the justice system even if they have a
legitimate cause. To begin with, most cannot afford
the lost earnings or the court costs either, even if the person could risk
being laid off or fired due to absence from work to attend court. The fact
that the majority of Americans, have from the start, been generally
prevented by economics from using the justice system should provide the
ultimate telltale evidence of the legal system's true purpose and function
in society.
However, to avoid being condemned for allowing this economic barrier to
exist, and to at least theoretically allow the poor to participate in
justice, "contingency fees" were introduced whereby the lawyer is paid
only if he wins. Not surprisingly, that arrangement sounds better than it
really is. Under this contingency fee arrangement, lawyers normally
collect between 30% to 40% of the damages awarded, in addition to,
whatever it costs to litigate the case!! {B168}
It is now not uncommon for lawyers to receive more than the clients
whom they represent. In fact, the Supreme Court in Washington upheld an
award of $245,456.25 in fees for lawyers who won $33,350 in damages for
eight of their California clients in a case involving excessive force by
police. Lawyers can end up with seventy cents out of every dollar awarded
to their clients. So the average citizen has a very slim chance of
obtaining a lawyer to work on a contingency basis, if the case has plenty
to do with the principles of justice, but little potential for a
substantial financial damage award.
However, when the potential damage awards are sizable, lawyers pop out
of the woodwork in droves to take the case. Around the nation, an
increasing number of physicians are now refusing to deliver babies in fear
of the potential lawsuits that inevitably follow birth complications.
Changes to tort law, that occurred in the sixties, opened the floodgate
for malpractice suits in America, as a direct result of the substantial
financial rewards for lawyers who succeed in cases against the deep
pockets of drug companies and physicians themselves.
Winning a big case, is equivalent to winning a lottery. Not only have
health costs skyrocketed as a direct result of these costs being passed
along to the general public, the vast wealth being accumulated by
countless contingency case jackpot winners is fueling unrealistic
expectations and demands for wealth among the rest of the legal community.
In the Forbes survey of 63 top Trial lawyers, only one made less than
$2 million in either 1987 or 1988. Collectively they earned $750 million.
Joseph Dahr Jamail who rode to victory in the 1987 Texaco-Pennzoil case
allegedly made $450 million for his troubles in 1988, ...a substantial
increase over the $25 million he made in 1987. {B169}For the bottom
90% of society this would be equivalent to winning 475 lottery jackpots in
the space of two years. It's really scandalous and unethical considering
the public end up footing the bill.
The Watchdogs
Are there watchdogs to keep the judges and lawmakers
honest? Well, yes there are. But I'll let you judge them for yourself.
Keeping the Judges Honest
Because the role of the legal community has been so
crucial to the continued dominance of the elite, and because they have
carried out their mandate so well over the centuries, the elite have had
no reason to set up a mechanism for disciplining members of the legal
fraternity. Until very recently, the legal society itself was responsible
for disciplining its own members for wrongdoing. Short of impeachment,
there did not exist any means of disciplining a judge. However, one
presidential nomination for the Supreme Court was rejected by the Senate
(due to the judge's involvement in conflict of interest indiscretions on
several occasions). Mind you, he was the only presidential nominee to have
been rejected for the past 40 years. In voting to reject the judge,
Senator Muskie commented that Judge Clement Haynsworth exhibited a marked
insensitivity to situations involving "conflict of interest" risks.
Due to the growing number of lawyers, judges, and even Attorneys
General that have been caught out exercising very poor judgments in their
personal or professional lives, Congress was forced in 1980 to legislate a
means of disciplining judges. The chairman of this newly formed body was
in effect to be the Chief Justice responsible for disciplining the
nation's judges, so logically one would expect that whomever was chosen
for this position would possess a record of ethical behavior that could
serve as a role model for the judiciary.
In 1982, Chief Justice Warren Burger appointed to that position of
trust the only presidential nominee for the Supreme Court to be rejected
by the Senate in 40 years (for repeated conflict of interest
indiscretions), Judge Clement Haynsworth. Believe it or not! {B170}
Of the nine cases Judge Haynsworth presided over since his appointment,
six were dismissed, two cases were dealt with secretly, and only one judge
ended up receiving a public reprimand. Notch up one for the
fraternity!! Judge Haynsworth's appointment to this position tells as
much about the integrity of the law fraternity, as Mr Danny Wall's
appointment as chairman of the Federal Home Loan Bank Board (and later as
Director of the Office of Thrift Supervision) does of the Congress.
But don't go away, there's more.
The Senate Judiciary Committee
One of the strongest, if not the strongest weapon
currently being used in the war against white collar criminals is a piece
of legislation entitled the Racketeer-Influenced & Corrupt
Organizations Act (RICO) introduced in 1970. It is under this act that
individuals like Michael Milken (the Junk bond king), and Charles Keating
(the Lincoln S&L owner), to name but a couple, are now being
prosecuted. In other words this legislation is frightening the hell out of
the entire elite and even threatens to place a few of their members behind
bars for a long time. It is not surprising then that this piece of
legislation is now in danger of being rendered harmless by the new
conservative Supreme Court. Four of the justices have let it be known that
they think that RICO is unconstitutionally vague, thus virtually giving
the green light to those being prosecuted to challenge RICO's
constitutionality.{B171}
Michael Milken and Charles Keating probably have little to fear from
RICO anyway, because there is a Senate Judiciary Committee actively
reviewing RICO with the intention of removing its stinger. Guess which
Senator has been selected as Chairman of this committee? Give yourself
full marks if you guessed it is Senator DeConcini (D-Ariz.) who received
$50,000 from Charles Keating in campaign contributions and who was
instrumental in causing the S&L losses in the first place.
{B172} Once again, the influence peddling and conflict of interest
is obvious, but no one involved seems to be worried about that, the prime
job is to get the job done.
There are still more "conservative changes" in the pipeline.
The Inspectors General
Another thorn in the administration's side has been the
policing action of a corps of 24 "Inspectors General" created through the
passage of the Inspector General Act of 1978 as part of a wave of
post-Watergate reforms. Since their inception, the group has been credited
with investigating close to 15,000 cases. It has been their work that has
uncovered fraud within the Defense Department, the generic-drug scandal
within the Food and Drug Administration, and the
widespread system of influence peddling and kickbacks within the Housing
And Urban Development Department (HUD), to name just a few. According to
the Office of Management and Budget, their work has saved taxpayers about
$100 billion!!
The problem is that many of their pending cases threaten to uncover
plenty more government corruption. It appears to have the administration
so worried that the Justice Department, through the Justice's Office of
Legal Counsel has issued a ruling that will substantially diminish the
scope of authority originally given to the Inspectors General, and may
curtail or scuttle altogether some of their work in progress. And so the
Justice Department is once again putting the brakes on the what remains of
entities set up to uncover corruption and abuse in the system.
{B173}
Breeding Contempt for the Law
In short, the more money one has, and the more social
connections one has to people in power, the more immunity one enjoys. Ivan
Boesky's plea bargaining and subsequent token punishment for his extensive
profiteering from insider trading provides as good an example of
preferential justice as the slap on the wrist given the Hunt family who
tried to monopolize the silver market. This sort of judicial kid glove
treatment for friends of the establishment perpetuates the impression that
ethical business behavior is only for wimps.
Is it not significant that nearly every recent president and attorney
general has been caught out with involvement in highly unethical and often
illegal behavior. As regular as clockwork, and with the same sort of
precision, the media and legal communities have swung into action to
whitewash or defuse the issues, and if possible allow them to continue on
as if nothing had ever happened. Richard Nixon, John Mitchell, William
Casey, Spiro Agnew, John Poindexter, Ronald Reagan, Edwin Meese, Oliver
North, etc., etc., are but a few of the latest pack of notables to have
benefited from protective string pulling, by the elite minority they so
faithfully served.
In the old days, before Feudalism had its democratic facelift, such
immunity from the law was excused using the Divine Right of Kings.
Today, clever lawyers, corrupt judges, carefully conceived legislation,
long drawn out investigations and court cases, and use of the contempt
of court silencer, achieves much the same result. The use of illegal
methods and tricks by our political and social hierarchy promotes
the spread of lawlessness, while their immunity from justice
breeds a contempt for the law especially among the criminal
element.
It is therefore not surprising that those most
affected by the inequities of wealth distribution and social opportunity,
have openly regressed back to survival of the fittest tactics in
order to survive the poverty, unemployment, and frustration of their
social class. In desperation, and lacking hope for a better future,
members of some minorities have begun to create their own social
structures in the form of street gangs, and make their own job
opportunities using the drug trade. In reality many are using
entrepreneurial skills that society could well benefit from, but without
legitimate opportunity, they resort to illegitimate opportunity. They
disobey the laws and hope to evade punishment in no less a fashion than
our country's leading businessmen and political leaders, who consistently
broadcast a contempt for law that all can see.
The benefits of civilized society are sadly missing at this class
level, and the youth survive as best they can. The instincts that demand
survival at any cost are as old as life itself, and still motivate many
within our society. While we can all agree that this latest social trend
sadly detracts from the quality of life for society as a whole, let us not
too hastily allow the drug running street gangs to become the focus for
social blame without carefully considering to what extent the social,
political, and economic actions of the elite have left them with such
desperate social alternatives, and such contempt for existing social
authority.
Possible Corrective Actions
- Change the system so that economics do not determine the quality or
availability of justice.
- Guilty parties should pay ALL legal and court costs. Costs should be
shared only to the extent of shared guilt. This move would probably
cause about 90% of all disputes to be settled out of court.
- Make perjury an extremely serious crime, with say a minimum 5 year
jail term (no probation allowed).
- The use of plea bargaining invites injustice. Its use should be
minimized; and carefully controlled when used.
We need radical
changes to the justice system; the courts are hopelessly clogged. The
Fifth Amendment does not make any sense at all, outside of assisting the
elite to secure immunity from the law. Why should we discourage criminals
from admitting to their crime once clues have uncovered the guilty party.
Once a preliminary investigation has turned up a suspect, that suspect
ought to be formally questioned as to his guilt, if he confesses, no
further investigation would be necessary. His lawyer would only be
required to assist in helping the court decide a fair sentence.
On the other hand, if the suspect denies his guilt when formally
questioned, then a normal investigation to prove guilt, followed by a
trial, would become necessary. If a further investigation proves
conclusively that he had deliberately lied about his guilt, ...which in
turn necessitated the further costly investigation and court trial, then
he should be forced through public work to pay back the cost of the entire
proceedings. This may provide incentive to reduce the number of long drawn
out investigations and court trials which often increase the use of
failure of memory defenses.
Ensure that a criminal does not regain freedom until the victims have
been compensated.
Chapter 5 The Most Ruthless Hoax of All
The Elite's Violent Global Game of Chess
For centuries, the game of Chess has intrigued and
entertained countless people with a fascination that goes beyond the mere
challenge of devising cunning strategies for a battle of wits. Its
origins trace back to the very roots of our culture and economy, and so it
remains a tangible reminder of our social history.
Feudalism, with its strict class system, served as both an inspiration
and a model for the game, which visibly depicts in miniature the results
of the interplay of some of the major forces which interacted to shape
feudal society. The game may very well have been devised by a monarch who
had difficulty planning social and military strategies strictly in his
head, because the game pieces characterize these various social
forces, and have relative values that are in keeping with their
counterparts in real life.
No doubt, Chess has assisted many Kings and Queens to plan the
management of their realms, but those of us who are not monarchs also
stand to benefit greatly from a closer look at the roles both Feudalism,
and the game of Chess, have played in the development of our society. Like
chess, modern day politics can be described as the carrying out of
strategies devised by those in power to maximize their wealth or power.
Manipulation, Intimidation, Violence, Ruthlessness
Never is the elite's manipulation and exploitation of the
working class more evident than when they use violence to maintain their
dominance. History clearly shows that in peace time, they rule with
manipulation, and if even mildly challenged, ...with intimidation. When
threatened, they resort to violence and war with little or no hesitation;
and when seriously threatened, they readily employ a level of violence
that respects absolutely no ethical limitations (e.g., ... Atom bombs,
napalm, agent orange, torture, Mai-Lai, the holocaust, ...these are all
Chess strategies carried out by the current Western elite).
The police, the FBI, the CIA , and of course the armed forces are all
used by the elite as required. Most have been subjected to strict military
indoctrination and trained to follow orders without question. Although it
is rare when the elite cannot achieve their domestic objectives using
peaceful methods such as legislation, police have in the past been
encouraged to be heavy handed and even brutal to dissuade the meek and
moderates from joining peaceful, and worthy protest actions. Police have
frequently used brutal violence to suppress both anti-apartheid and
anti-Vietnam demonstrations, in fact, the murders of four Kent State
University students by the National Guard bear witness to the level of
force sometimes deemed necessary to keep freedom of speech in it's proper
place.
When necessary, the media is employed to justify the actions of
enforcement groups whose strings may have been pulled to arrest
demonstrators by enforcing loitering by-laws or disturbing the peace
by-laws. The use of tactics such as these, to impede or hassle groups that
protest peacefully against aspects of our society, really defines the
boundaries of our freedoms.
Sure there are honest and dedicated editors, politicians, lawyers,
judges, cops etc., but they have little impact on the controlling power of
the elite minority. Generally, they are tolerated and occasionally placed
in the limelight, as it helps to maintain the illusion of a just society.
But when anyone appears such as Martin Luther King, who genuinely
threatens the status quo, the whole elite community start pulling strings
together until the situation is again under control ...one way or another.
At times such as these, for a brief period, the democratic pretenses and
illusions are cast aside and the true nature, of what passes for a
benevolent democracy, is exposed.
In his long reign as head of the FBI, J. Edgar Hoover not only provided
a secret service for the elite, but effectively emasculated many
opposition groups by labeling their activities as "Communist inspired and
financed". It is worth noting that Lee Harvey Oswald had previously worked
for the FBI. Jack Ruby is certainly a matter for speculation.
In previous decades, and especially during the hippie era, it was quite
common to frame a victim or organization by planting drugs on the premises
either before or during a raid, not only to discredit the individual or
the organization, but to provide a pretext to confiscate records or
documents for perusal, to learn a group's strategy or plans etc. In cases
like Watergate, where the planting of drugs was out of the question, it
became necessary to break-in in order to confiscate records.
Furthermore, using infiltrators, both CIA and FBI have controlled the
growth and effectiveness of many a legitimate group such as the National
Students' Association. In the past, the standard routine to discredit any
of the elite's serious critics has simply been to brand them as
Communists.
In addition to using the police and FBI to emasculate any support for
Socialism or Communism in America, the CIA has been used to achieve the
same results abroad. While it began as an Intelligence gathering
organization, it did not remain that way very long. In the last 40 years,
the world has witnessed an enormous number of political coups, most of
which have been instigated and funded by political forces from outside the
country. For superpowers, the strategic and economic rewards related to
the overthrow of non-sympathetic governments usually far outweigh the
inconveniences involved with organizing a coup and installing a puppet
government.
Furthermore, the once confidential Doolittle Report made it abundantly
clear that any and all tactics and actions necessary to achieve these
objectives, were unofficially condoned. Actions to thwart
Communism, whether illegal or not, are usually treated as patriotic
actions, and for all intents and purposes, normally place the operatives
and their actions above the law. Not surprisingly, the CIA covertly
engages in the training, arming, and funding of paid mercenaries whose
guerrilla activities involve assassinating heads of foreign governments,
and acting as hit men (or collectively as death squads) to weed out
political opponents, or simply harass and intimidate villagers and their
leaders into voting in a particular way or risk future punishment.
When political coups have taken place, history has shown that the elite
most often choose military strongmen to assume the role of puppet
dictators, mainly because of their natural orientation to brute force as a
means of maintaining domination, and because they would most willingly
invite the superpower to increase their military support. Consequently,
America has allied itself with the world's dictators and monarches because
they are notoriously the fiercest advocates for maintaining the supremacy
of an economic elite, ...i.e. leaders interested in the perpetuation of
Feudalism. Congress meanwhile continues to turn a
blind eye to the abundant well-documented proof that the American
elite, through the CIA, actively and knowingly initiate programs to
destabilize and overthrow unsympathetic foreign governments, whose
geographical locations and/or resources are considered strategically or
economically valuable.
There is no shortage of documentation showing the CIA's direct
interference in the political machinery of countries such as Guatemala, El
Salvador, Iran, Cuba, the Philippines, Honduras, Nicaragua, Indonesia,
Panama, Libya, Palestine, Lebanon, Egypt, Haiti, Chile, Cambodia, Vietnam,
etc., etc.. In fact, this short list only hints at the extent of American
attempts to force Feudalism on the peoples of foreign countries.
Invariably, the elite engage in extensive and coordinated misinformation
campaigns, both at home and abroad, to justify otherwise unethical foreign
policy alliances and activities.
Prior to the advent of better technology, wars used to be directed from
strategy rooms safely located deep underground in which were located huge
strategy tables. The surface of these tables were covered with
geographical maps of the war zones upon which miniature models of ships,
tanks, infantry battalions, etc., were moved about, and when necessary,
completely removed from the strategy tables in an effort to maintain a
visual model of war zone reality to assist in the formulation of ongoing
strategies. The parallels with Chess are obvious,
especially with regard to the use and expendability of all resources,
human or otherwise, at the disposal of the dominant strategists. At the
combat level, soldiers caught up in the heroics of war, fight for their
very survival seemingly oblivious to ethical and moral realities, or even
to the real causes of the war, while in the relative safety of a strategy
room, indoctrinated generals exercise power over the pawns at their
disposal.
Young men who were considered legally too young to drink alcohol, were
conscripted like lambs to the slaughter to risk their lives and die in
South-East Asia. About 58,000 U.S. soldiers died in Vietnam. Many of those
who didn't make the journey home in a body bag were physically and
mentally maimed. Like their counterparts in Feudal days, they stood to
gain virtually nothing from either victory or defeat. Most were too young
to own anything but a minuscule part of the nation's assets. In fact
plenty of war veterans who risked their lives in Vietnam are currently
homeless and unemployed. Many finally realized that they had been
conscripted not in defense of their own country, but to ensure the future
prosperity of the economic elite. Bitter and disillusioned, many took to
alcohol and drugs in an effort to drown out the harshness of reality after
the war had removed their naivete. Perhaps it was a delayed reaction to
the abrupt introduction to war's reality, and their role in it, that
explains why more than 50,000 soldiers committed suicide after they
returned home!! Broadcasting that fact would have made it much more
difficult to recruit or conscript more pawns (suckers) for their next
chess battle, so chances are you probably didn't get to hear that shocking
statistic.
To add insult to injury, hawkish George Bush picked as
his vice-president, Dan Quayle, himself a devoted hawk who had been among
those sons of the privileged elite who had strings pulled on their behalf
to serve military lip service in the home guard, within rifle shot of fine
restaurants and cultural entertainment. This sort of class discrimination
is yet another manifestation of the social controls exercised for the
benefit of hypocritical economic elite and their families.
With Inter-Continental Ballistic Missiles and nuclear submarines, the
commanders of our armed forces no longer have to be the lean, mean,
fighting machines. Today their stringent indoctrination leave most of them
acting like robots. Properly indoctrinated, the militant enforcement arm
will detonate a nuclear bomb, fire a nuclear missile, assassinate a
foreign leader, or indoctrinate subordinates with the same level of
hesitation. None.
We have all honestly laughed, and truly enjoyed the ceaseless
MASH TV series, which uses a sanitized version of a war zone as a
setting for humor. Unfortunately, due to its longevity, the series gave
the viewer not only excellent humor, but a benign concept of war. In
reality however, gassing millions of Jews to death, dropping atomic bombs
on the civilian populations of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, have like all other
war atrocities, become part of the legacy of chess-like strategies used to
maintain the dominance of our Western feudal lords. Even more
disgustingly, both Hiroshima and Nagasaki had been purposely left
untouched by conventional bombing so that the true effects of the atomic
bomb could be accurately studied. Facts such as these are kept secret for
decades to hide the indefensible strategies of war.
Disguising The Causes Of Wars
While there is a growing awareness among thinking and
caring people regarding the futility of war, the economic elite conscript
whole countries into war simply to increase their personal wealth and
power.
Virtually every war is fought because of economic motives. However,
religion is often used as a smoke screen to conceal the true motives. Look
beyond the religious camouflage, and you will invariably find the economic
elite fighting over the possession of human and natural resources. The
civil war in Ireland provides an excellent example.
To keep wars from appearing like contests for wealth and power, the
elite go to elaborate lengths to disguise the real motives, ...usually
by camouflaging the war in a flag-draped cloak of patriotism. After all,
the elite's economic well-being hinges on their ability to successfully
conscript and enlist the working class to die in their service, just as
serfs were forced to do in Feudal times.
20 Years Grace to Glorify Atrocities
To minimize the risk of the victims of war learning what
the war was really fought for, the elite (through their government
functionaries) restrict access to all embarrassing war details by using
the supposed "threat to national security" excuse, while spreading
whatever misinformation seems most beneficial at the time.
Under present laws, the truth concerning past realities
(especially involving war activities) can remain suppressed as "TOP SECRET
...CLASSIFIED INFORMATION" for 20 years or longer. However, we have all
seen how the shredding of documents has been used repeatedly to cover the
trail of illegal behavior. With that in mind, no one should be too
surprised to find that after 20 years, there may remain only shreds of
evidence with which to begin deciphering the strategies that have shaped
our present reality.
Considering one of the media's main functions is to spread
misinformation and suppress other information at strategic times, it makes
sense to spend a little time forming one's own opinions about the nature
of reality based on the development of events rather than on the
media's version of events. The resulting insights can often fit together
like puzzle pieces to form pictures of reality that have obviously (in
hindsight) been the focus of a cover-up. The use of misinformation and
suppressed information that took place during and after World War II may
horrify you.
The Perspective of World War II whose "Time Has Come"
There is fortunately or unfortunately a significant and
growing collection of evidence pointing to a totally new and shocking
explanation of why events of the Second World War occurred as they did.
The facts regarding actual battles are not in question. These
details have been extremely well documented and retold ad nauseam in books
and some TV documentaries. The holocaust too is not in question.
Evidence that has already come to light, however, points to the fact
that we may have been seriously deceived with regard to who was
secretly allied with whom, and exactly what were the Allies
fighting to achieve (i.e., the objectives behind their chess moves).
Some of the facts you are about to learn will almost certainly shock you
even more than the wealth distribution facts in Chapter 1.
The degree to which we all have been deceived and
manipulated by the elite during and since World War II could very easily
leave you speechless, angry, or in tears. Consider the
evidence about to be presented and see how it compares with the
impressions of the War broadcast through the media on almost a daily basis
for more than 40 years. To begin, let's establish whose power was
being threatened, and how.
Threats to Feudalism and Colonialism Prior to the War
With the exception of Russia, monarchs, emperors, and
dictators held practically all the power in the world at that time. The
major Western powers were all still growing rich from colonial
exploitation.
However, the monarchists and Western colonialists "as a group" were
facing two serious threats to their continuing domination. When these two
threats are properly considered, a perspective of the Second World War
emerges that fully explains many puzzling aspects of the War and its
aftermath. The first to be examined, was the threat of revolt from those
who were being exploited by colonialists.
Russia --- the Emerging Role Model
While the Russian people (who had overthrown their
Feudal Czar only twenty years earlier) posed no immediate military
threat to any of the European monarchs, they did pose a very serious
ideological threat to the continued domination of Feudalism itself. If
Russia grew to be powerful and prosperous, the people of all other
nations would be tempted to get rid of their own Feudal rulers. Prior to
World War Two, victims of colonial exploitation throughout the world
were starting to view the revolution that had occurred in Russia, as a
serious way of getting rid of their own colonial masters.
A task force report prepared for the Trilateral Commission in
1984 entitled Democracy Must Work outlined the necessity of the
Western societies to clean up their socioeconomic acts in order to
ensure the survival of economic Feudalism. The following quote from that
report sheds additional light on the desirability to the Western
economic elite, of Russia's 20 million World War II casualties.
"For a number of decades after the 1917 Revolution the
Soviet experiment was seen by many as the wave of the future. It was,
therefore, only natural that in the wake of decolonialization
following the Second World War many of the new states in Asia and
Africa turned toward the Soviet Union for guidance on their
socioeconomic development. The Soviet Union was perceived by many in
the developing world, and also many theorists in the developed world,
as offering a highly relevant and effective model of rapid
modernization and industrialization. This greatly enhanced Soviet
political influence and gave the Soviet Union added international
standing." It is no doubt an understatement to say that the
West had very good reason to wish for Russia's defeat. The fact that the
Germans did not conquer Russia outright probably shocked more than just
the German Generals. The ideological threat posed by Communism would
have been completely removed had Russia been conquered. As it was,
Russia's staggering losses were the next best thing the Monarchists and
Colonialists could have hoped for.
Hence, the greatest long-term threat to the Western elite was Russia,
not only for her growing industrial and economic strength even prior to
World War Two, but more importantly for her symbolic significance to the
2nd and 3rd World nations.
Surprisingly, situations developing in the Middle East were proving
even more threatening. If you don't readily recall why, there is reason
to believe that you were conditioned by the media not to know
why! Before explaining that statement, let's consider the threats.
Impending Loss of Control Over the Suez Canal
To begin with, the Middle East has been an area of
strategic concern ever since the Suez Canal was completed in 1869. And
while the British had probably not foreseen losing their dominance, the
impact of the Russian revolution was most definitely influencing the
Arab nations as well. The elite were now seriously considering the
possibility that if they ever lost control over the Suez Canal that
passage rights would become a formidable bargaining tool for the
Egyptians. The possibility also existed that in future, Western traders
may have to pay dearly to use the Canal, or be forced to make the long
boat journey around the treacherous Southern tip of Africa.
With the growing demand for Independence among African nations, the
prospects of having to defend their African colonial
interests was looming menacingly. In that regard, losing canal
passage rights would have made it extremely difficult if not
impractical, to defend their African holdings, and especially those in
East African countries. Worse yet, a closure of the canal would have
effectively cut the Western monarchs off from their colonial holdings
throughout the Far East as well!!
In short, the power of the Western elite would have been seriously
diminished almost overnight without uninterrupted travel privileges
through the Canal. Readers who cannot readily picture the strategic
importance of the Suez Canal are encouraged to consult a world globe or
an atlas to realize just how crucial it was, and still is, to the
Western elite.
But that was only half the picture.
The reason that the Suez Canal became such a serious and
urgent issue was that the British Concession to manage the
Canal was about to expire, and Egyptians were voicing their intention of
managing it themselves.
If worse came to worst, and the Middle Eastern nations followed in
Russia's footsteps and succeeded one way or another to expel the
Colonialists, the Western elite's use of the Canal would almost
certainly have been in jeopardy.
An equally vital threat to the supremacy and wealth of the Western
elite involved oil.
Impending Nationalization of Middle East Oil Fields
Even prior to World War Two, Western oil barons were
extracting great wealth from their oil-rich colonial holdings. They were
already well aware that the potential volumes of Middle Eastern oil
reserves were conservatively enormous. However, the
likelihood of the West remaining as friendly allies was being threatened
by Egyptian Nationalists calling for an end to colonial occupation. A
mild sense of panic was beginning to overtake the Western elite because
there was growing support for the Nationalization of oil interests
throughout the Middle East. This move of course would have put an end to
the West's exploitation of Arab oil. The elite knew only too well
that oil was inevitably going to bring not only great wealth, but
immense power to the Middle Eastern countries. In fact, if Middle East
supplies outlasted those in the West, the Arabs could have potentially
amassed enough wealth and strategic power to rival or ultimately
threaten the supremacy of the West!!
For those who dared look even 10 or 20 years into the future, the
combined power of a United Arab World must have been quite a sobering
thought. The problem to be discussed next provided the timing for many
of the key chess moves played by the West.
A Brief Recap of the Facts:
Prior to the start of World War II, the Western elite
desperately needed two things:
- 1) They needed to destroy Russia's image and/or somehow hobble its
growth and development to stem the alarming trend in 2nd and 3rd World
nations to view Russia (i.e., Communism) as a lucrative role model.
- 2) They needed a permanent military base strategically located in
the Middle East to ensure permanent use of the Suez Canal, and to
defend their colonial interests not only in the Middle East but
throughout Africa.
But quiz baby boomers about what threats
existed to the Western elite prior to the war, and you may grow old,
before the issue of Middle Eastern oil, the Suez Canal, or even Russia
ever emerges from their consciousness. Awareness of these issues appears
now to have been purposely suppressed as an integral part of Allied war
strategy. The full reason why suppressing these facts was so important
will soon become self-evident.
Ruthless Chess Moves in the Middle East
You are about to be presented with undeniable evidence
to indicate that the Second World War was initiated by the Western elite
to deal with these increasingly urgent problems. The evidence
overwhelmingly indicates that the invasion of Palestine was a
premeditated plan by the Allies not just to CREATE a much needed
permanent ally in the Middle East, but more importantly to create
a location to establish a permanent military base from which to
ensure the continued use of the Canal as well as protection for their
colonial oil interests in other adjacent countries like Iran, and Saudi
Arabia.
I would ask those readers who are tempted to label this view as
anti-Semitic, to withhold any such pre-judgment at this point. Not only
will the facts speak for themselves, the anti-Semitic issue will
be dealt with very shortly.
The Invasion of Palestine
The first outward manifestation of a play for Palestine
formally surfaced on August 13 1945, when the World Zionist Congress
demanded admission of 1 million Jews to Palestine. It should be
remembered that at this point, the war had ended, the Germans had
surrendered, and concentration camps of all descriptions had been
emptied. Europe was filled with people whose possessions had been
completely destroyed and who were forced to start all over again from
nothing. Many even had to clear away the rubble to get to that state.
However, the Jews who later emigrated from all over the globe to settle
in Palestine had not been born in Palestine, nor had their fathers or
their fathers' fathers. In fact, Jews have as much claim to
Palestinian property as the American Indians will have to reclaim
America two thousand years from now!!
Meanwhile, the Arab World immediately recognized that the West was
trying to install a puppet government in their midst. They were enraged.
- On September 13 1945, Iran requested the withdrawal of U.S. and
British forces.
- On September 25 1945, Egypt demanded an end to British military
occupation.
- On October 20 1945, Egypt, Syria, Iraq, and Lebanon joined
together to establish the Arab League. One of their first acts was to
warn the U.S. that the creation of a Jewish state would lead to war.
When the impending confrontation started to make newspaper
headlines around the world, both the U.S. and Britain attempted to
diffuse the issue by announcing on April 29 1946 that a joint U.S.
British Committee studying the matter, had advised against the partition
of Palestine. The Arabs were not about to be fooled by this superficial
ploy because on January 26 1947, Egypt actually broke off diplomatic
relations with Britain.
On May 14 1948, the British mandate over Palestine ended, and the
Allies proceeded to support the creation of Israel by giving David
Ben-Gurion and his chosen associates full military assistance to begin a
covert imperialistic invasion of Palestine. The well understood
advantage of supporting and installing puppet governments, is that the
elite can implement their strategies without having to assume either
direct responsibility or accountability.{B174}
In reality, the initial invaders were nothing more than
acommando force similar to the CIA financed Contras!!
In the wake of the Jewish Holocaust, the Western
media was used extensively to justify almost unlimited financial and
military support for the creation of Israel, which served as a perfect
smoke screen behind which the Allies could install a puppet government
in Palestine posing as refuge seekers.
The Western media spared no effort in depicting the Allied
invasion forces as refuge seekers, and so were able to successfully
transfer the sympathy, which had been generated for the Holocaust
victims, directly to the invasion forces. If they had not
done this, the citizens of the West, and indeed the world community in
general, would have been more critical of the invasion, and would most
certainly have sympathized with the innocent Palestinians who were
literally being thrown out of their homeland to make way for a
collection of people who already had countries to live in. Jews who came
from places like America were not refuge seekers, they were encouraged
to go to Palestine to help occupy territory forcefully
taken from innocent Palestinians by the right-wing militant faction of
the puppet government's invasion forces.
Mind you, most Europeans were busy picking up the pieces of their
lives after nearly six years of war, and could be forgiven for being a
bit numbed at this stage to the invasion of Palestine. Quite
conceivably, this too figured into the timing of the invasion.
Israel - Middle East Warlord ...Overnight!
With American military hardware and advisors, Israel
almost instantly emerged as the strongest military might in the Middle
East. Within 8 years, this artificially created
nation, which theoretically should have been a collection of the
most grateful people on earth, had already gone to war against each
of its neighbors Jordan, Lebanon, Syria.
And within 5 months of Egypt declaring that she would not
extend the Suez Canal's Concession, Israel invaded Egyptian territory
and advanced to within 10 miles of the Suez Canal.{B175}
It was only too clear to the entire Arab world, that Israel had
become an American military outpost!! The fact that the creation of
Israel had the combined support of the Western elite (to at least ensure
control the Suez Canal), was made evident by the fact that the Americans
(through the Israelis) invaded the Sinai Peninsula heading toward the
canal on October 29, 1956, while both the British and the French bombed
Egyptian airfields to weaken or destroy the Egyptian capacity to resist
the Israeli (American) invasion of their Sinai peninsula. British forces
within the week took Gaza and Port Said. Through a long drawn out
process involving UN occupation forces, the Western elite began their
extended control over the Suez Canal.
Wearing a thin Israeli disguise, the Western elite
invaded and claimed not just Palestine from the Palestinians, but
the lands West of the Jordan River from the Jordanians, the Gaza
strip from the Egyptians, and the Golan Heights from the
Syrians. For 15 years, Israel also held the Sinai Peninsula but
handed it back to Egypt in 1982 under the terms of a (1979) peace
treaty.
Those who would wish to escape criticism for the above
acts of imperialism have been quick to label any such criticism as
either anti-Semitic or anti-American. Neither label is valid. The
criticism contained in this book is directed strictly
toward the Western elite and their Israeli
counterparts. The truth of the matter, is that I have great
sympathy for victims of the Holocaust persecution, as well as for the
Jews encouraged to emigrate from all over the world to quite
unknowingly create a brand new Jewish Feudal
State.
Setting up the Israeli Feudal State
Regarding Israeli domestic policy, Jews who descended on
Israel from all parts of the globe became, for the most part, pawns
under the direction and control of a nucleus of ultra right-wing
militant leaders who were chosen to become part of the emerging Israeli
economic elite. As a result, many who were lured from abroad to help
establish Israel, now realize how they have been manipulated and
victimized. They are coming to acknowledge in ever increasing numbers,
the true nature of Israeli domestic and foreign policies.
Class differences were an integral part of this new
Feudal system. When the call went out to Jews all around the globe to
come to Israel to help establish the country, some of the first to
arrive were Jews of African and Arabic origins who are referred to as
Sephardic Jews. In later years, as more of the Ashkenazic Jews (of
European stock) arrived, many Sephardic Jews, who had served as Israel's
pioneers, were now forced to give up their homes to the Ashkenazic Jews
who obviously consider themselves to be superior to those of Moroccan or
Ethiopian heritage.
Not only that, many are beginning to acknowledge that Israel, like
South Africa, has been enforcing a policy of apartheid,
...against the Palestinians!!
And so a "worse than Feudal" class structure has been established
from scratch. The Israeli bottom 90% are as much victims of
manipulation by the American-installed Israeli elite, as are the bottom
90% of all other countries still dominated by an economic elite. With
regard to the persecution of Palestinians by those Jews who truly
deserve to be called Imperialists, let the world acknowledge that the
Palestinians are not being burned in ovens. However, they are being
forcefully dispossessed of their traditional homelands and property by a
minority of ultra right-wing leaders who have conscripted many normal
caring Jewish human beings into taking part in modern imperialistic acts
against Palestinians, just as many normal caring Germans were
conscripted into persecuting the Jews, and many normal caring Americans
were brainwashed into believing that it was morally right to drop atomic
bombs on the civilians of two Japanese cities. To add insult to injury,
the Japanese descendants of those who survived the war now serve as
slaves to the current batch of Japanese economic elite overlords. And so
it goes.
Even though I have sympathy for the Jewish victims of both German and
Jewish overlords, I have even more sympathy for the Palestinians who
have been relentlessly and agonizingly victimized for the last 40 years.
It is to their plight that we now focus our attention.
Taking Over Palestinian Property
Practically everyday another handful of Arabs die trying
to fight off the onslaught of Israeli imperialism in full view of the
citizens of Western democracies who have been brainwashed by incessant
television shows about the Jewish Holocaust into ignoring whatever
atrocities the Jewish elite may commit.
The systematic takeover of Palestinian lands has normally involved
two phases. Firstly, Palestinian villagers bordering Israeli occupied
lands are intimidated and provoked to the point that an initial skirmish
takes place that can in future be cited as a reason for sending in an
armed commando force (often referred to as the Irgun),to forcefully
overrun the village. Once the area is secure, the homes are blown up
with explosives, or bulldozers are sent in to level the homes previously
owned by the Palestinians who had the choice of dying in defense of
their ancestral property, or fleeing for their lives. Next the
occupation force, (commonly referred to as the Hagganagh), moves in. New
settlers occupy the area and immediately build new houses to claim the
real estate left by the terrified Arabs who were forced to flee.
Why destroy the Palestinian homes? Why not simply allow the Jewish
settlers to take them over? Basically, two psychological tricks are
being employed. Firstly, by physically destroying the actual buildings,
the Israelis effectively diminish the will of the dispossessed
Palestinians to reclaim their property. After all, the most useful
aspect of their property had been their homes.
More importantly, the Israeli elite quite purposely
wish to give the new settlers (the territory occupation force) an
opportunity to delude themselves into believing that Palestinian land
with Jewish built homes automatically and instantly becomes Jewish
"homelands". The bottomline is that no matter how subtle or obvious the
strategy appears to the reader, the trick appears to have fooled the
majority of Jewish settlers into being relieved of imperialist guilt.
When the state of Israel was originally "created on paper" by the
Western Allies, the Jewish population occupied only 6% of the real
estate. Through their violent program of intolerance, harassment,
intimidation, and aggression, followed by their policy of bulldozing
Palestinian homes and installing new settlers, they now in 1989 occupy
70% of the real estate. This scenario has been carried out in village
after village non-stop since 1948!!
Recently, Israeli scholar Dr. Benny Morris shattered the myth of an
Arab exodus in 1948 by showing Zionist leaders' responsibility for the
expulsion of Palestinians, with the help of the occasional massacre,
between 1947 and 1949. Americans among others must no longer tolerate
their country's support for this barbaric behavior without fully sharing
in the blame!
The Jews have done to the Palestinians precisely what they blame the
Germans for having done to them!!
If it looks like Israeli Imperialism, and waddles like Israeli
Imperialism, and quacks like Israeli Imperialism, then ...
Handling The Palestinian Protests
To ward off any future dispute over the validity of
Israel as a nation, the Western elite, who dominated the newly formed
United Nations Organization made sure that Israel was given official
international credibility and recognition by using their influence to
install Israel as a member of the UN within a year of the initial
invasion.
The Western conspiracy against the Palestinians, at least in
hindsight, should be obvious. To begin with, the Palestinians were
dispersed as refugees throughout the adjoining Middle Eastern countries,
thus making initial coordinated protest next to impossible. When these
genuine Palestinian Freedom Fighters eventually organized themselves
into the P.L.O. to protest openly, the Western elite purposely
refused to recognize the legitimacy of their organization, and for the
past 40 years, have continually denied them the opportunity of openly
discussing the issues using peaceful methods of negotiation{B176}
When the Palestinians finally turned in total and
utter frustration to hostage taking to draw world attention to their
situation, the West couldn't have been more pleased because they then
launched a media campaign to thoroughly discredit the Palestinian
protests by making the term "P.L.O." synonymous with terrorism.
The American elite to this day threaten to cut off funds to any of
the UN organizations which allow the PLO to participate as a member
nation. Even 40 years later, the Western elite are still trying to deny
the existence of a people with at least 2000 years of claim to
Palestine, but who were sacrificed (somewhat like the holocaust victims)
as pawns in a global game of chess. Because Israel was accepted as a
member of the UN on May 11 1949, less than one year after its creation,
it should be perfectly clear that Palestinians were being purposely
gagged, persecuted and maligned simply to allow Israeli (Allied)
imperialism to continue.
A Mountain of Telltale Evidence
The circumstances existing prior to the creation of
Israel leave little doubt that the West had every reason to wish for
Russia's downfall, as well as Israel's creation. Next, everyone would
have to agree that the Holocaust was carefully planned, and carried out
just as methodically. So all that we are trying to determine is not
whether anyone would sacrifice several million Jews, but what the
exact reasons were for doing it.
We will now consider additional telltale evidence supporting the
argument that
the Holocaust victims were purposely sacrificed not to
satisfy one of Hitler's fanatical whims (as the West has always
stated), but to generate worldwide sympathy for the Jews so that the
Allied forces could successfully create a territory in the Middle East
in which they could legitimately establish a military base to
safeguard their colonial interests throughout the
area. First of all, the German High Command would have
been acutely aware that Germany would have suffered the same dire
economic consequences if she too had been denied passage through the
Suez. So logically, Hitler would have gladly welcomed a plan to
establish an Allied military base close to the Canal.
But because Germany had more reason to be concerned about the spread
of Communism over her borders from Russia, than about the loss of oil
concessions in the Middle East, it would have been a very logical
division of labor for Germany to attack Russia (with the assurance that
the Allies wouldn't interfere), and for America and Britain to invade
Palestine and set up their military base to safeguard the Canal.
If Hitler did hate the Jews, then a plan for him to
purposely sacrifice several million Jews to ensure the successful
creation of Israel, that would in time absorb the remaining Jews left in
Germany, must have sounded to him too good to be true.
As we are all aware how readily the American High Command resort to
destroying evidence which incriminates them, it would be fair to say
that by now, all the Allied governments have had time to purge their
records completely of any overtly incriminating details that may have
remained. Nevertheless, both Britain's and America's actions clearly
point to covert goals, strategies, and agreements.
You be the judge.
9 More Puzzle Pieces That Now Fit Perfectly
- 1) The Rearming Of Germany
As a condition of losing
the First World War, Germany was prohibited from rearming! However, we
are supposed to overlook or perhaps see no significance in the fact that
the allies not only helped Germany rebuild, they allowed her to rearm so
well that the combined armies of the rest of Europe supposedly took till
1945 to defeat her. Although it is possible that German leaders were
unaware of why Germany was being allowed to rearm, it is rather
unlikely. At the very least, it would be logical to assume that Germany
could have been enticed by the Allied elite to attack Russia. A
tentative agreement regarding the potential division of spoils could
easily have been worked out among the Feudal elite. In fact, the Allies
may have had the alliance treaty with Russia as a red herring to
partially disarm Russia, who would have naturally counted on her allies
to provide at least some military assistance if attacked.
- 2) Allied Knowledge of The Holocaust Kept Secret
After the war, we were told that Britain had cracked the
German communications code as early as 1941, and that Churchill
definitely knew that Coventry was to be heavily bombed. But, he
purposely allowed Coventry to endure a German bombing
blitz on April 11, 1941, without forewarning the city. Why? The city was
supposedly sacrificed in order to keep secret the fact that the
Allies could listen in on all of Germany's strategic plans since
early in 1941.
However, we are still asked to believe that the Holocaust came as a
shock to the allies in the closing days of war, which
occurred 4 years after the British had cracked the German communication
code!!
Are we to believe that every time the Germans discussed the details
of building the ovens, and the logistics of collecting and transporting
millions of Jews, that the Allied eavesdroppers were on their tea and
coffee breaks? Why then did the Allies allow the holocaust program to
continue for so long? Why wasn't stopping the holocaust an Allied
military objective?
Disgustingly, the evidence points clearly to the fact that the
Germans were purposely allowed to rearm, just as Coventry was allowed to
be bombed, and the holocaust knowingly allowed to continue secretly. It
should be apparent, at least in hindsight, that sympathy for the Jewish
holocaust victims played a crucial role in the success of the elite's
Middle Eastern objectives. Who then can, in conscience, afford to
disregard the crucial connection between world sympathy for the creation
of Israel, and the fact that the allies appeared to have kept silent
about the slaughter of Jews, allowed the holocaust to continue, and then
made the holocaust the focus of world horror prior to lending their full
support for the creation of Israel?
Besides, how much difference is there between Churchill allowing the
citizens of Coventry to be unsuspectingly sacrificed by bombing in order
to achieve a more important objective, ...than for Hitler to send
millions of unsuspecting Jews to their deaths in a gas chamber so that
the Allies could retain control over the Suez Canal, and prevent their
oil fields from being nationalized? In fact, was Churchill's action not
just another part of the despicable charade? Even if it were not, the
difference is moot. Neither is valid.
- 3) Nazi High Command Given Sanctuary, Assistance, and
Employment by Allies
Perhaps the most damning evidence of
collusion with Germany lies in the fact that many Nazi war criminals
fled successfully to Western nations and other Allied countries, and
that some even ended up with U.S. government jobs. America it turns out
has been sitting on information that could have sent some ex-Nazis to
jail. One after another, cases have come to light that pointed to the
fact that after the war, many top Nazis were secretly given refuge and
special treatment by the Allies, and in particular by America and
Britain.
It is now openly acknowledged by the American government that Klaus
Barbi, the butcher of Lyons, worked with the CIA for some time
before he was assisted by them to secretly relocate to Bolivia!
Werner von Braun, whose V1 and V2 rockets caused firestorms in
London, soon became beloved by America for his work in their space
program.
Until the day Rudolph Hess died under suspicious
circumstances, huge Spandau prison, capable of holding hundreds of
prisoners, was kept open to hold him, and him alone. Never before has
anyone been isolated to that degree. The whole scenario appears rather
ridiculous until one views the situation from the previously outlined
perspective. The Allies may have been forced to do precisely this, had
they given their word to do what they could to assist and comfort
members of the German High Command should the Germans not triumph.(as
they did not) More importantly, it would be further logical to assume
that the Allies could not take the chance that Hess would in a moment of
weakness, expose embarrassing war strategies to his fellow prisoners!
Many other known Nazi war criminals found easy and swift refuge in
Canada and in many South American countries allied to the Western bloc.
- 4) Quid Pro Quo Arrangements Involving Industrialists
Are we expected to see no significance either in the fact that
Krupp's mammoth Rheinhausen steel works that had armed Hitler
was, in fact, the only Ruhr valley steel mill that DID NOT get
wiped out by allied bombing during World War II. Moreover,
although Mr. Krupp, the German owner of that steel works, was convicted
of war crimes at Nuremberg, he was out on the street again as a
free man by 1951. Later, the (CIA installed) Shah of Iran bought
a 25% interest in Krupp's company for $550 million. {B177}
- 5) Communist vs Allied Non-Communist War Losses
Not
surprisingly, when Russia was attacked by Germany, she received
practically no assistance from her supposed Western Allies. Isn't it
rather odd that the combined non-Communist Allied losses only amounted
to slightly more than half a million, while Communist Russia, (our
ally), lost over 20 million? Just for perspective sake, noteworthy
statistics for war dead from 1939-1945 are as follows: {B178}
- Great Britain ...244,723 killed
- By the rest of the British Commonwealth forces (Canada, Australia,
etc.,) ...109,929 killed
- U.S.A. ...230,173 killed
- ...U.S.S.R. ...20 Million killed!!!
Although she remained unconquered, Russia's social and
economic development was stunted for decades, especially due to the loss
of approximately 95% of her able bodied men between the ages of 18 to
24. We helped our Russian allies all we could ...didn't
we?
- 6) The Allies transformed the killing of several million Jews
into The Great Holocaust, but publicly refused to devote any
significance or attention to the fact that the Germans had killed over
20 million of our supposed Russian allies!!
The American
public were not hounded into feeling sympathetic for the Russians as
they were for the Jews, because the Allies weren't installing Russians
to run their new military base in the Middle East! Similarly, the Jews
themselves attached little significance to Germany's massacre of 20
million Russians. The fact is made even more significant because it was
the Russians who captured Berlin, and in a sense put an end to
the Holocaust deaths!
- 7) Not only that, after the war the American media then went
out of its way to purposely link the existing concept of
"persecution of the Jews" ...with Russia!!
America has for
decades accused Russia of persecuting the Jews for not allowing them to
leave Russia, when in fact, the travel restrictions affected all
Russians in the same way. However, the American media succeeded in
purposely transferring the "persecutor of the Jews" label, earned by the
Nazis, directly to the communists.
Now that the propaganda value has drastically diminished, America's
supposed concern for Soviet Jews is at last being exposed for what it
always was, a method of discrediting Russia, and a tool to generate
propaganda support for Israeli imperialism. The truth of the matter is
that America has secretly been making it much harder for Soviet Jews to
immigrate to America despite its image to the contrary.{B179} Not
only is there now a 12-18 month waiting period for Jews applying to the
American consulate in Moscow for immigration to America, former Attorney
General Edwin Meese introduced legislation that made it necessary for
Soviet Jews to convince the Immigration and Naturalization Service that
he or she suffered from a "well-founded fear of persecution."
Additionally, legislation is currently being proposed that would
reject any Soviet Jews who could not prove that they had "close
family or other ties with America". America is now using
every trick in the book to reject the immigration of Soviet Jews
to America!!
- 8) The McCarthy Era - A Purge of Socialist Sympathies in
America
To prevent Russia's war losses from generating
sympathy in the West for Communists, history text books for baby boomers
made little mention of Russia in connection with the Second World War.
>From the distorted movie accounts of the war, few would believe that
it was not the Americans who marched into Berlin! American movies seem
to feature only persecuted Jews, heroic Americans, and fanatical
Germans, in that order. {B180}
Not only that, a few short years later, America was subjected to an
era of McCarthyism in which every critic of the government, or society,
was branded as a Communist. Considering the debt owed by the allies to
Russia for her part in defeating Germany, the anti-Communist fever
whipped up during the McCarthy era, by the media and the FBI among
others, again posed more questions than it answered.
- 9) 45 Years of Pro-Jewish (sympathy-generating) World War II
Propaganda
During the McCarthy era, society was purged of
socialist sympathies in one fell swoop, and nowhere more so than in
Hollywood.
Once that had been done, Hollywood churned out an endless stream of
war movies in which America saved the world. So much so, that most
Americans probably feel that they won the War pretty much
single-handedly. Although Communism rapidly replaced Hitler as the major
threat to freedom and democracy, the survivors of the holocaust have
remained the underdogs in dire need of America's protection and
financial aid.
In order to justify keeping Israel as America's top recipient of
foreign aid, the American public has been subjected to an incessant and
blatant media campaign relating to the Second World War, and focusing
especially on aspects of the Jewish holocaust. When Israel had stepped
up her campaign of killing Palestinian rock-throwing children, America
TV viewers were bombarded virtually on a daily basis with war
movies, documentaries, and special "made for TV docudramas" depicting
the horror of the holocaust.
Programs involving Nazi and holocaust themes have been broadcast and
re-broadcast so much by now that, as anticipated, the Jewish holocaust
is etched into the American psyche as the world's single worst atrocity.
No matter how severe other atrocities such as the dropping of atomic
bombs on civilian populations have been, they are treated as merely
unfortunate but necessary occurrences.
When there are no more Palestinian properties to confiscate, the
holocaust movies will probably taper off. However, the movies will in
all likelihood not stop altogether, because Israel will no doubt remain
a center for much of America's covert military activity.
Summary and Conclusions:
We are no longer considering whether a man or group of men could have
purposely devised such an horrendous premeditated plan, involving many
countries, and sacrificing the lives of so many millions of people, with
chess-like strategy and cold indifference. Hitler's actions left no
doubt about that.
However, the allied assistance given the Germans
BEFORE the war, the relatively low loss of life by the allied
non-Communist forces DURING the war, and the assistance given
to the known Nazi butchers AFTER the war, clearly justify a
closer scrutiny of the correlation between Hitler's plans and covert
Allied objectives. Complicity can be both indirect and
covert. I hope no one is naive enough to believe that either the English
or American power elite are above complicity in such heartless genocide.
To hold such a ridiculous idea would require an amnesia attack that
would obliterate memories of dropping atomic bombs on civilian
populations, ...sacrificing the citizens of Coventry, ...bombing the
Asian countries of Vietnam and Cambodia almost off the face of the earth
using horrendous quantities of both Agent Orange and napalm, ...or
working closely with such human rights violators as Noriega, Nazi
butchers, Augusto Pinochet, Baby Doc Duvalier and his death squads,
apartheid forces, etc., etc., etc., etc.,
In any case, certain facts have significance on their own:
In the Second World War the Allies benefited greatly from Germany
warring against Russia. They benefited greatly from the holocaust
sympathy that allowed for the creation of their Middle Eastern military
base. Moreover, it should be recognized that all the working class
populations of countries involved in the Second World War were herded
into participation by a handful of powerful leaders. It appears that in
addition to the Jewish holocaust victims, and those who helped create
and enlarge the new country of Israel, the German people themselves were
as equally oblivious to the real chess strategies and motivations known
only by the power elite at the top.
The most convincing evidence of Allied military
objectives, however, lies in the events that unfolded after the
Western elite had firmly established their new military base.
America's Thinly Veiled Military Outpost
The justification given to the world for the creation of
Israel was to provide the Jews with a chance to form a peaceful
nation where they could live "free from persecution". However,
Israel quickly became instead, one of the world's leading military arms
manufacturers, and merchants for equipment designed to KILL.
With an inflation rate at times reaching 200%, it has become evident
to a growing number of Israeli citizens that the America aid received
over the past 40 years has not been spent to stabilize their economy, or
to benefit the bottom 90%. Instead the money has been used to establish
Israel as the center for Allied operations in the Middle East. Much of
the $37.7 billion dollars taken from American taxpayers from 1971 to
1987 has gone toward setting up Israel as one of the world's leading
manufacturers of military weapons.{B181}
The fact that Israel's chief export is weaponry should
remove anyone's naivete, but the fact that this tiny nation is
stockpiling nuclear weapons ought to convince all but the
politically brain-dead that Israel functions as an American Military
Outpost.
As far as the American elite are concerned, any military supplies or
personnel provided by Israel to help fight America's colonial wars
around the globe conveniently amounts to additional "off-budget" defense
expenditures which lie beyond the control of Congress. Meanwhile, Israel
remains totally reliant on American support for its financial, as well
as its political survival. Not surprisingly, this translates directly
into "favors for favors". Many are now fully aware of the degree to
which Israeli advisers and Israeli-made weaponry are being used to fight
the Western elite's colonial wars raging throughout Africa and Latin
America. Weapons belonging to the thugs and dictators of the world are
increasingly bearing the "made in Israel " sticker.
Consequently, many thinking and caring Jews are at last beginning to
question their country's military involvement outside Israel, and
in particular those in remote Latin America.
While it is beyond the scope and intent of this book to list Israel's
foreign military involvement, several of her foreign military adventures
are worth mentioning due to their unusual and noteworthy
characteristics.
- (1) The first example occurs in Africa.
When Spain
abandoned its colony of Western Sahara back in 1975, King Hussein of
Morocco sent his troops South to claim the territory for his own use due
to the fact that Western Sahara is extremely rich in natural resources
such as oil, and has the world's second richest deposits of phosphate.
When the indigenous peoples resisted, they were militarily chased out of
the country.
Israeli advisers have assisted the Moroccan King to adopt
and carry out the same strategy Israel so successfully employed to
take over Palestinian lands. In other words, the houses of the
Saharawi people, who fled for safety, were torn down and replaced by
modern housing complexes built by the Moroccan monarch. Then a program
was commenced involving cheap loans, etc., to lure Moroccan
citizens to relocate into the new territories in an effort to
claim and occupy them.
To keep the Saharawi from physically returning to their country, the
Moroccans built an earthen wall that runs the entire length of the
country. The wall is not only mined, but guarded by 150,000 fully armed
Moroccan soldiers. At present, about 165,000 refugees (mainly women) are
still located in a tent community in the Western section of Algeria. The
surviving menfolk desperately continue their attempt to reclaim their
homelands.
- (2) In Central America, Guatemala provides yet another
excellent perspective on Israeli/American intervention
.
Since the CIA backed coup toppled the popularly elected President Arbenz
back in 1950, over 150,000 citizens have been killed by the American
supported puppet government, and more than 30,000 went missing and have
never been seen again.
What has Israel got to do with that? Well, the Israelis were
responsible for installing a computerized system of population control
and surveillance. All Guatemalans have been issued with
computer-oriented picture identification cards which they are compelled
to carry at all times. As citizens go from one control area to
another, they have to pass through checkpoint stations which
maintain an up-to-date computer record of their whereabouts and a
permanent record of their movements. As in El Salvador, Guatemala's
death squads still operate covertly on behalf of the country's elite,
this surveillance system greatly facilitates the process of intimidating
and when necessary, locating and selectively killing off political
opponents. Of course, the Israeli advisors based their
surveillance system on the South African "passbook" system, which
had until recently been used so effectively to assist in the enslavement
of black South Africans.
- (3) The true mercenary nature of Israeli militants was
exposed once again, as recently as September 1989, when a raid on a
Colombian drug lord outpost uncovered the fact that Lieutenant-Colonel
Yair Klein was one of two very well known Israeli militants who
had been hired to train army personnel for the Colombia drug
lords. {B182}
No doubt much of the recent civilian
destruction and related terrorist activity being carried out against
Colombian civilians and elected officials is directly attributable to
the lessons taught by these Israeli consultants. In addition, a former
CIA agent helping to covertly supply arms to the Contras had disclosed
some while ago that CIA supply planes, (which enjoy quasi official
immunity from customs) were often used to smuggle drugs back into
America. It certainly leaves serious doubts in my mind as to which group
the American elite support most. On the other hand, it could be yet
another instance of divide and conquer tactics.
- (4) Moreover, after the CIA had helped to install Manuel
Noriega as Panama's dictator, a well known Israeli military man,
Michael Harrari, took over as Noriega's closest advisor, and the head
of his secret service. Incidentally, America's recent invasion of
Panama should come as no surprise to those who appreciate that the
Western elite will do ANYTHING to ensure their continued cheap use of
the world's two strategic Canals. Not only did the CIA install Noreiga
in the first place, they openly tried to assassinate him when he
became difficult to manage.
- (5) In the 60's, Israel received enough funding from the
CIA to support activity in about 30 Black African countries. She has
also for some time excelled at training soldiers. Although this
pursuit sounds pretty tame, it takes on proper perspective by pointing
out that one of the more famous African trainees who journeyed to
Israel to learn killing techniques was Idi Amin of Uganda.
News reports in later years certainly confirmed that the Israelis had
indeed taught him well.
Farming Out the Covert Dirty Work
Because the America elite are becoming more aware that
their financial and military support for the world's dictators is being
interpreted more "literally" nowadays, Congress bows occasionally to
public pressure, and agrees to cut off Congressional funding for
particular military operations or specific regimes. However, the elite
are not about to be prevented from doing what they want by anything as
ultimately programmable as public opinion.
Mind you, in the short term the elite have found it convenient to
quell domestic and world censure by allowing Congress to cut off funds
while at the same time farming the work out covertly to Israel. An
obvious example involves El Salvador, where Israel virtually took over
America's war after the U.S. Congress supposedly shut off foreign aid
back in 1977.
The fact that Israel operates as an extension of America's military
machine is evident in countless ways, but the farming out of covert
dirty work to bypass whatever democratic influence the American people
can muster up is perhaps the most galling.
Similarly, when Congress bowed to public pressure to cut off funding
to the CIA-backed Contra mercenaries, Israel (the arms merchant) stepped
in to negotiate a price for the American arms being sold to Iran to
obtain covert money to keep the Contras funded as usual. The arms
shipment was also routed through Israel to provide a cover for the
illegal activity.
Although the plot was fully exposed, the American media went into
overtime to whitewash the affair. The arms sale was transposed into a
patriot act by Reagan to buy freedom for the American hostages.
Ollie North was transformed into a patriotic National Hero. In
short, the media successfully transformed the illegal
democracy-defeating deceits of the Iran-Contra affair into sweet
smelling acts of patriotism that gave Americans lumps in their throats
and made many proud to be American again.
The simple truth of the matter is that year after year, Israel
remains the chief recipient of American "foreign aid". {B183} In
fact, the rate of development of not only Israel's Aircraft Industry,
but her nuclear capacity as well, should leave very little doubt as to
the transfer of high level information and technology between the two
elite groups.
As long as the elite have dirty work to get done, Israel will
function as America's covert 51st state. In any event, it is totally
meaningless for America to declare that it has no military involvement
in a particular country, if in fact, the country is overrun with Israeli
advisors, and supported with Israeli made military hardware. To
distinguish nowadays between American and Israeli advisors and/or
weaponry in 2nd and 3rd World countries should be a distinction reserved
for the politically naive.
Now that Israel's role as arms merchant has been
reviewed, let's examine how she has been used as a base from which to
initiate unrest between Arab countries.
Dividing and Conquering the Arab Nations
The Arab threat to the Western elite's domination, was
fought on many fronts. Establishing Israel as a military base in the
area was merely the first step. To appreciate how the Arab threat was
dealt with, it is only necessary to keep in mind one of the most
fundamental aspects of diplomatic strategy, the tactic of Divide
and Conquer.
Middle Eastern diplomacy provides a perfect contemporary example of
this tactic whereby the Western elite used their political diplomacy and
arms sales to successfully pit the Arab countries against each other to
diffuse their power. All combatants become pawns of the provocateur(s).
The ultimate winner of this type of strategy is the provocateur, not
necessarily the combatant who wins a specific war. For example, no
matter who claims victory in the Iran-Iraq war, both nations have been
weakened and impoverished in countless ways by over seven years of war.
On the other hand, the Western elite have grown rich from fueling the
conflict with sales of arms to both sides! As the wealth and manpower of
Arab nations are wasted on war, (as with Russia's loss of 20,000,000 war
casualties) the threat posed by a United Arab Community decreases
accordingly.
With that in mind, let's now review how Middle Eastern events
unfolded after the Western elite moved into their neighborhood.
With regard to Libya: It should be well
noted that the Western press has spared no effort in discrediting
Colonel Qaddafi of Libya, because he has been one of the few Arab
leaders bold enough to risk bearing the brunt of American aggression in
order to offer humanitarian and military support to the Palestinians who
had been violently dispossessed of their property and homes. In
retaliation for Qaddafi's repeated public denunciation of US Middle East
policy, America began a concerted and successful media campaign to
totally discredit him by making him out to be fanatical dictator willing
to support terrorism. But the carefully orchestrated harassment didn't
stop there.
The American navy was called in to stage a thinly
veiled provocation off the coast of Libya, supposedly to defend the
obscure waters of one of Libya's coastal bays for international use. The
whole scenario was meant to set the stage for a media blitz at home to
psychologically prepare the American people, and perhaps the world at
large, for their direct premeditated aerial assassination attempt
on Qaddafi's residence deep inside Libya. Qaddafi survived America's
assassination attempt, but his son was injured.
At what point do assassination attempts cease to be acts of
terrorism to congressmen and the American public? ...only after the
"freest media in the democratic world" sugarcoats them into acts worthy
of patriotic pride!!
The level of propaganda used to whitewash events like these, are
typical of the propaganda campaigns carefully orchestrated to shape and
control the opinions of the American public. Psychological media tricks
have been refined and improved constantly, to ensure a quick predictable
response from American citizenry, whose subsequent opinions are noted by
the carefully controlled public opinion polls, and fed back as
reinforcement.
No doubt, had America succeeded in assassinating Colonel Qaddafi
there would have surfaced out of the woodwork old supporters of the
previous monarch whom Qaddafi had replaced, and whom the Americans would
have supplied arms to, as they did in Nicaragua to Anastasio Samosa's
old thugs whom were given the euphemistic title of "Contra Freedom
Fighters" by the CIA who created them.
With regard to Iran: It is now well documented
public knowledge that in 1953, the CIA covertly overthrew the popularly
elected leader of Iran, Dr. Mussadegh, to re-install the Shah who, like
all monarchs before and after him, was a genuine elitist. To achieve
this, the CIA hired street gangs to kick in the windows of any car on
the street which did not prominently display a picture of the Shah.
These and other CIA funded tactics intimidated Dr. Mussadegh and caused
him to flee for his life after the mob completely destroyed his
headquarters.
The CIA then immediately flew the puppet Shah back into Iran to take
over the country, and proceeded to quickly arm him to the teeth, as they
were also doing with Israel. What the CIA did not count on, however, was
that a severe fundamentalist backlash headed by the Ayatollah Khomeini
would eventually return power to the Iranian people.
When the Shah realized that his days were numbered, he literally
robbed the nation of billions of dollars and took the wealth out of the
country. As the American elite were the Shah's greatest allies, much of
the money stolen from the Iranian people ended up on deposit in American
banks, and invested in American real estate. America not only helped the
Shah to remove the nation's wealth, they refused to return the stolen
wealth even after the Shah had died.
The American hostages were taken, and are being held only because
America refuses to return the stolen wealth!!
After the Shah was replaced by the Ayatollah, the
Western elite have had to settle for instigating Middle Eastern
conflicts, and keeping them on the boil wherever they could, in an
effort to keep the Arabs truly divided and conquered.
The Iran Conta affair totally exposed the divide and conquer strategy
for those not totally brainwashed by American propaganda -which tried to
justify the sale of arms as a means of getting back the hostages. The
opposite in fact was true. It was the Reagan administration itself which
bargained with the Iranians NOT to release the hostages.
Repeatedly, foreign policy is shown to be little more than chess like
maneuvers designed to keep the Feudal elite in power.
The fact that Oliver North was treated as a national hero by the
press for his part in assisting President Reagan's White House staff to
sell arms to Iran leaves very little more to be said about Oliver North,
the media, President Reagan, his appointed staff members, Israel, and
the Congress.
The shooting down of the Iranian passenger jet with 290 passengers
(as previously described in the media manipulation section on page 3-21)
was very thinly disguised terrorism which reeked of intimidation,
bullying, and vengeful retaliation.
With regard to Lebanon: Although the lives
of many innocent passers-by have been lost through car bombs exploding
in the streets of Lebanon, the American public rarely hears of the
documented evidence linking the CIA with this terrorist activity.
Citizens of the Middle East are also much more aware that America
also supplied both moral and military support for the Israeli invasion
of Lebanon. In fact, it probably supplied the sky flares that the
Israeli army used to turn night into day to allow the Christian
Phalangists to continue throughout the night their cold blooded massacre
of hundreds of men, women, and children in both the Sabra and
Shatila Palestinian refugee camps.
Did the Israelis learn nothing from the holocaust? There should
have been no surprise when America's own occupation of Lebanon was met
with such fanatical hatred and resistance, to the point that they were
even forced to abandon their embassy.
With regard to Egypt: One might also begin
to question just whose covert actions were behind the assassination of
Anwar Sadat of Egypt, considering he had the same sense of nationalism
as Mossadegh of Iran who was overthrown by the CIA because he intended
to nationalize the Iranian oil fields. In Egypt's case, nationalistic
Egyptians intended to take over full control of the Suez Canal shipping
lane, a responsibility the Egyptians had every legal and territorial
right to assume.
With regard to Iraq: Just when Iraq was
nearing completion of her first nuclear power plant, Israel staged an
unprovoked aerial attack on the plant and totally destroyed it.
This act constitutes another of the more blatant acts of Israeli
(American) aggression designed to keep the Arab peoples from becoming a
threat to Feudal domination.
Since the first printing of this book, America has in full view of
the world, quite literally bombed Iraq's civilian infrastructure,
as well as it's defense infrastructure back into the middle ages.
Once again, America's media spent time preparing its citizens as well
as the rest of the world to be partner to the secret slaughter it had
planned. The media repeated ad nausea that not only was Saddam a
terrorist madman, but that he was only months away from completing the
manufacture of nuclear bombs with which to attack all Democracy and
Freedom loving people.
The reality of the matter is that like "shooting fish in a barrel",
the American elite quite callously took the opportunity to field test
their latest hi-tech weapons, and in the process massacre about 200,000
Iraqis. The fact that America lost only about 60 soldiers, some of which
were killed by their own side, should leave little doubt about the real
threat Iraqi troops posed to the West. No doubt this brutal display of
bullying will also serve to make other 2nd or 3rd world nations
capitulate in future rather than arouse America's ire.
It should be well noted that in countries like Kuwait (which the West
created less than a century ago, as it created Israel), and in Jordan
where a King is still in power, Arabs are allowed to remain in power
--but only because they run their countries as Feudal empires.
Because the West has its Israeli military arsenal fully entrenched,
it has no more need of occupying other Arab lands, it only needs to keep
the non-feudal countries hobbled.
The bottomline is that instead of the Arabs enjoying
a Golden Age of Prosperity, they are pitted against each other
(divided and conquered), squandering away vast sums of their oil
wealth on expensive, though not the latest or the best, weapons of
war.
Shuttle Diplomacy
It doesn't take much more imagination
to conclude that the peace missions and shuttle diplomacy that the West
initiates to find peaceful solutions to conflicts around the globe, are
basically business trips to sell arms to both sides and keep the
conflicts boiling. America the "Peacekeeper", has already sold vast
amounts of her (ex-state of the art) military equipment throughout the
Middle East, thereby making possible the equivalent of an Arab
Holocaust which has ensued.
And what do you know, here we are in the 1990s already.
All in all, the Western elite achieved both their goals. Although
Russia was not overtly conquered, her economic development was delayed
by at least two decades through the war loss of approximately 95% of her
able-bodied men between the ages of 18 to 24. Then, by initiating an
arms race, the Western elite were able to keep Russia's productivity
focused on military goals rather than on producing refrigerators, cars
and television sets for her people. When the normally stoic Russians
finally ran out of patience, an era ended.
In the Middle East, the Feudal elite were totally successful. Israel
is firmly entrenched, Western oil interests in the Gulf have remained
intact, and so has their indirect control over the use of the Suez
canal. Lastly, the chance that Arabs would unite to threaten the
dominance of the existing Feudal elite has been totally obliterated.
Therefore, if we are to learn any lessons from the past, the degree
to which the allies played the covert role of PROVOCATEUR, both
during and after World War II should become a topic of
much further consideration, discussion and investigation. The fact that
a few rich people can continue to use the bulk of humanity as expendable
pawns in a chess game is intolerable.
We have to begin our assault on Feudalism as quickly as possible,
because the elite are certainly not sitting idle. The next chapter is
devoted to a discussion of their current strategies, which should give
you even more incentive to get involved.
Chapter 6 The Elite's Current Strategy
Emerging Global Controls
At present, the economic elite enjoy autonomous control
over their own specific countries, and continue to get richer from foreign
industrialization. So while the standard of living for the already
disadvantaged bottom 90 percent within Western nations continues to drop,
the super rich are using their profits to buy up an even greater
percentage of real assets both at home and in the developing nations.
Morally speaking, the socioeconomic leveling effects of locating
industries into 2nd and 3rd World countries could be looked on as a
positive global development, if it were not for one important fact.
The western elite who hire these people intend to pay them as little
as possible, for as long as possible.
They can get away with paying them as little as possible because
the workers are generally speaking unorganized and already impoverished by
their own elite. The elite hope to get away with cheap labor as long as
possible by introducing the same type of political, economic, and
media controls in the 2nd and 3rd World countries, as have already been
refined in the West. Unless this is done, 2nd and 3rd World workers may
become as difficult to exploit as workers now are in the West. Worse yet,
they may demand nationalization of the foreign owned industrialization
just as the various Arab countries had pressured for nationalization of
their oil interests.
The process of forming an integrated global Feudal empire began in
earnest with the formation of the Trilateral Commission. It is worth
mentioning once again that since its inception, the Trilateral
Commission has funded numerous studies which deal with key aspects of
controlling whole populations. Since the TC infiltrated the White
House, it has collected a frighteningly comprehensive pool of knowledge,
all of which will be used to establish the new global order.
The Trilateral Commission has done its Homework
The following incomplete list of Trilateral Commission
book titles should give a concerned reader reason enough to believe that
this elite group means business.
- 1975 Report on the Governability of Democracies
- 1978 Task Force reports on Commodities Issues
- 1978 A compilation of reports of the Task Force on Oceans
- 1978 Energy - managing the transition
- 1979 Collective Bargaining
- 1979 Report of the Trilateral Task Force on Industrial Policy
- 1980 Elite Planning for World Management
- 1982 Economic Relations with the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe
- 1983 Sharing International Responsibilities among the Trilateral
countries
- 1983 Task Force on Security and Arms Limitation, Defense and Arms
Control
- 1985 East Asian Security and the Trilateral countries
- 1986 Conditions for Partnership in International Economic
Management
Based on information gained from these studies, the
TC members are presently hard at work forming infrastructures to
coordinate control of all the economic Feudal populations on an
international or global scale, rather than just as
independent national Feudal empires. As you read this,
international contracts and legal agreements are being made by members
of the new Trilateral oligarchy.
Needless to say, the social overviews provided by these studies will
be invaluable in assisting the elite to plan future economy milking
schemes such as our current "debt for equity" swapping.
Once the standard of media conditioning, and the
standard of living in the developing countries has been
raised to the point that eliminates a dangerous level of desire for
Communism or Socialism, the standard of living for the 2nd and 3rd
World Feudal serfs will rise no more, and in the meantime, the standard
of living for the Western worker will gradually fall to meet it. Then
it's back to business as usual, but on a new dangerous global
level of integrated and coordinated control.
Consolidation of power has occurred and is still occurring on many
levels, and in many different countries. In fact, the framework for a
consolidated Feudal empire dominated by the super rich is already in
place! Let's take a moment to consider the various ways that this is
occurring.
Expanding the Feudal Domain
The feudal elite are presently embarked on an
expansionary program, the limits of which are difficult to ascertain.
However, some tell-tale signs give an indication of what the elite have
in mind.
Chess strategies ...without the balance of power
The most disturbing aspect of the disintegration of
Communist leadership in Russia, is that now that the balance of power
has disappeared, America insists on continuing the most costly military
escalation that the world has ever known. It has openly stated that it
has no intention of slowing down its Star Wars project. One should
indeed be concerned why.
The second tell-tale evidence of future chess style planning
is that simultaneously, America is enthusiastically urging Japan to
fully rearm. The publicly announced encouragement, especially at
this time, are as indefensible as they are ominous. No country is
threatening either Japan or America, in fact, what used to be the
U.S.S.R. is willing to disarm unilaterally. Another ominous sign is that
Japan just recently changed its constitution to allow its
military forces to operate outside of Japan (for the first time
since WW2). It doesn't make too much sense unless you keep in mind that
Japan is the second part of the Trilateral Commission, and that Germany
is the third.
Without a balance of power to inhibit them, the Western elite are
without a doubt now accelerating their covert war(s) against non-feudal
powers. Grabbing back East Germany into the Feudal camp was a cinch
while Russia was so preoccupied with calls for independence from so many
of its republics. And in that regard, it would be naive not to assume
that many of the conflicts raging throughout the former Soviet republics
are presently being fueled, if not spawned covertly by the West. The
opportunity to divide and conquer has never been better!!
So while you are being encouraged to feel safer because the "Cold
War" is at last over, don't. Take another look. Don't be lulled into
believing that America is less likely to use its hi-tech military toys
just because it has agreed to phase out some outdated military
hardware. Itwould be foolish to think that the
risk of war has decreased if the personnel operating the scrapped
weapons are simply redeployed to operate even more sophisticated
weaponry.
Rather than think of the "Cold War" as the non-combative
confrontation between America and the U.S.S.R., a better perspective of
the term would be that the "Cold War" is, and has always been, the
non-combative struggle between Feudalism and its opponents.
And if the Cold War is looked at in this light, there is plenty of
evidence to show that the "Cold War" is not over, it is in fact actually
accelerating!! Why? Because opponents to feudalism still exist.
Throughout the globe, there is a growing awareness and intolerance of
the Western elite's exploitive and interventionary practices.
In Europe, the mood over the last decade has turned
strongly against the American military presence. In fact repeated
popular street demonstrations (advocating the removal of American
missiles from not only German soil, but from the whole of Europe) have
been the largest such demonstrations in history. The working class of
Europe are slowly rejecting the American military overlordship and have
openly indicated their intention not to let America use Europe as her
next battlefield. Besides the benefit of taking back some real estate
into the Feudal kingdom, the reunification of Germany was probably
designed to disrupt the solidarity of the anti-American movement by
throwing the country into internal confusion.
In Latin America, the Arias peace plan clearly
indicated the resolve of the new and wholly Latin American center-left
power bloc alliance that has formed in that hemisphere. The involved
nations have clearly indicated to the world that they intend to decide
the destiny of their own hemisphere without Western political
intervention. With the exception of the U.S. itself, the members of The
Organization of American States (OAS) were unanimous in their
condemnation of America's invasion of Panama in December 1989.
In Africa, the writing is on the wall in foot high
letters, and the Western elite both in South Africa and America silently
acknowledge that the racist whites of South Africa can no longer
continue to deny blacks the right to vote. The situation especially in
the wake of the repeated massacres, is now a powder keg.
In the Middle East, anti-American hatred is everywhere.
On this front as well, Israel's relentless atrocities against the
Palestinians are progressively coming under growing criticism.
Dissatisfaction with the Western elite's policies no longer comes
from one or two specific and easily definable targets as in the 50's,
but from the world at large! Again, if it looks like military
escalation, and it waddles like military escalation, and it quacks like
military escalation, then...
Consolidating Political Power
While the elite regularly use their military power to
enforce and maintain Feudalism, they are working very diligently in the
boardrooms to install a global Feudal government instead of running as
they currently do with each country forming a separate Feudal empire.
With the rise of international corporations, the need to consolidate
feudal power has become unavoidable.
During the last two decades, the Trilateral Commission has (under the
leadership of its founder David Rockefeller) used clout in the White
House to successfully establish basic power and resource sharing
agreements between the principal Trilateral Commission partners.
With much of the power sharing arrangements sorted out among existing
members, Mr Rockefeller is now turning his attention to Latin America
with the intention of establishing an organization which effectively
will link the American elite with the dominant financial elite from
Latin America. The new organization will in all probability function
as a Latin American tentacle of the existing Trilateral Commission. It
will be known as "Congress of the New World".
So far, major Western banks have loaned hundreds of billions of
dollars to Western sympathizers throughout Latin America. As chairman of
Chase Manhattan Bank from 1969 to 1982, Rockefeller was in a position to
dish out many billions in loans, and thus strengthen the connections set
up earlier by his brother Nelson. {B184} The inequities of wealth
distribution that resulted from the massive influx of money to Latin
America have created a loyal wealthy minority, who are now ripe for
absorption into the budding global Feudal community.
Astoundingly, the Latin America elite have already sent about $300
billion (flight capital) out of the country for safe keeping in
Swiss and American banks. Without too much
imagination required, one can speculate that much of the loaned bank
money was quickly and easily siphoned off into bank accounts of a
corrupt minority who immediately shipped their new wealth out of the
country to escape the ravages of runaway inflation that everyone else
was forced to endure. Unfortunately for the populations of Latin
American countries, the flight capital ($300 billion) has already
exceeded the total Latin American debt of $257 billion!!
{B185}
In countries like Argentina, where the inflation rate approaches
1000%, resentment against the greedy elite is running so high that the
Western elite are now eager to maintain the flow of money to avert
popular uprisings. {B186} At this point, Rockefeller is lobbying
strongly for Japan to substantially increase their investments in that
hemisphere not only to harness the cheap labor of desperate workers who
have been reduced to the brink of poverty, but to ensure that left-wing
leadership is prevented from gaining power. Japan should not need too
much encouragement because Latin American countries, even as oil-rich as
Mexico, still only pay their workers an average of $1.80 per hour.
{B187}
To help finance this relationship with the Latin America elite, the
American elite have manipulated the U.S. government and indirectly the
American people into keeping the money flowing to their friends by
introducing legislation to replace the existing defaulting loans with
taxpayer guaranteed equivalents.
Reshaping Power in America
Consolidation of authoritative power simply translates
into greater centralized control for the elite. Because the Trilateral
Commission is firmly entrenched in the highest positions of elected and
unelected power in America, George Bush, as President, can now
coordinate the growth and development of a global Feudal empire with
unprecedented ease. Not surprisingly, he has repeatedly voiced
his determined intention to INCREASE the powers of the presidency as
well. Obviously he feels that the president's ability to VETO the wishes
of the elected majority is not enough.
The powers of the National Security Council are being expanded. New
committees have been formed that indicate that a move is underway to
coordinate, consolidate and/or integrate the powers of the National
Security Council, the State Department, and the Central Intelligence
Agency. Readers who wish to read more regarding this important
development can read the article entitled "NSC change" in the February
11, 1989 issue of The Economist. {B188}
In addition, George Bush has asked his Attorney
General, Dick Thornburgh, to bring control of the nation's "organized
crime" strike forces under the direct power and control of the Attorney
General's Office. At present, they operate independently in various
states around the nation. This move would give any president improved
control over just who does, or doesn't, get investigated
or prosecuted. With regard to this type of power, it should be noted
well how little Mr. Bush was pressed by the media or anyone else
for that matter, to declare his level of involvement in the Iran-Contras
affair (and especially not by the Attorney General Ed Meese, who was in
charge of the investigation). One would indeed have to be naive to
overlook the fact that the covert Iran-Contra group did, nevertheless,
operate out of the White House basement while George Bush roamed the
White House as vice-president. (...an appropriate title).
Unlike some of the elite's former presidential puppets, Mr. Bush
possesses a keen intellect and a well developed command of both
psychology and diplomacy. In short, because he can be both cunning and
persuasive, he possesses a capacity to implement the goals of the
Trilateral Commission, and thus strengthen the dominance of the Feudal
elite like few before him.
What makes him so truly dangerous is that having recently been the
head of the CIA, he embodies the consolidation and coordination of overt
presidential power, with covert secret service power. Beyond outright
dictatorships, few Western government leaders have been in a position to
coordinate the integrated use of overt power with covert power.
So, while the presidency inches toward a dictatorship, the White
House progressively becomes the base for covert criminal operations.
Bush's previous role as head of the CIA has established a link between
the presidency and the CIA that is more than faintly reminiscent of
Hitler's extension of power using the German secret service. Who could
dispute that the German SS carried out Hitler's wishes like a squad of
"patriotic" Oliver North clones? After George Bush's invasion of Panama,
and his attempt to assassinate a foreign head of state, his colonialist
mentality is hardly in question.
To inaugurate the whole process President Reagan put the whole
country on a staunchly conservative tack through pro-elite appointees to
the U.S. Supreme Court. The tail is wagging the dog!
The existing democracies will continue to be reshaped
legislatively to implement the directives of the emerging corporate
government.
Economic Consolidation
Economic power is rapidly being consolidated into fewer
and fewer hands as a result of the wave of corporate takeovers and
conglomerate mergers currently taking place in all the Western
democracies. Note, however, that it is vitally important to draw the
distinction between economic power and economic ownership.
The corporations, that the elite control, are often
owned almost entirely by the banks who finance them.
By refinancing their corporations largely through money
borrowed from banks, the elite are effectively selling their
uncompetitive, ailing corporations to the working class because money
from workers' pension funds constitute such a significant chunk of
today's bank deposits. Although they are retaining
control of their corporations, the elite are quickly and quietly
pulling their money out of American-based industries, and reinvesting it
in cheap labor countries. In the wake of a wave of leveraged
takeovers, 64% of the value of America's corporations is owed to banks.
{B189} Therefore most of the business risk in America has by now
been secretly transferred to bank depositors who quite unknowingly stand
to lose their life savings if a serious economic downturn ever
bankrupted the businesses that their bank deposits are now financing.
Based on debt, many corporations are teetering on the brink of
insolvency.
As long as the corporations generate profits, the elite can skim them
off. But once they go sour, as they would if a serious depression
occurred, the elite who no longer have their money in the corporations
(only debt through financing), would be free to walk away and allow the
banks (i.e., pension funds) to absorb the losses.
The elite with banking interests are not really risking much of their
money either, because they themselves have been compelled by law to
invest about only 4% of their own money as capital equity. The rest
belongs to the bank depositors. In reality, the banking elite are
practically not concerned with repayment of loan principal from
the 2nd and 3rd World countries, they are really only concerned with
reaping in the interest payments on the depositors' money they
lend out. That is why taxpayer money was channeled to the International
Monetary Fund and the World Bank to enable additional funds to be loaned
to potential defaulters to ensure that they could at least pay their
interest payments.
And so bank depositors and future pensioners are the real
holders of the 2nd and 3rd World debt, in addition to being the
holders of America's staggering corporate debt!! But the
banking elite don't make a habit of shouting that from their
rooftops. Because most of the easy profits derived
from leveraged buyouts have already been creamed off in America,
takeover pros like Drexel Burnham, and the legal firms which specialize
in takeover bids, are already setting up shop in Western Europe. The
economic elite are about ready to drain the Western European economies.
In contrast to America's debt to equity ratio of 64%, Britain's
stands at about 16%. In other words, 16% of value of British businesses
has been borrowed (mainly from banks), as opposed to 84% which is paid
for, so to speak. {B190} The figure for the rest of Western
Europe is probably not too far off, but a few years from now, takeovers
and mergers will have undermined the Western European economies as well.
But that's not all.
A New Global Currency?
The elite have even begun the groundwork for a new
monetary system with a basket currency from 10 countries, already in
limited use in Europe, called the European Currency Unit (ECU). Although
the ECU is rapidly taking hold throughout European countries, many other
countries around the globe are adopting the now 10 year old currency to
oblige their European trading partners. {B191} The manipulation
of interest rates, and the devaluation of horrendous amounts of savings
could be then accomplished overnight with the greatest of ease. It is
the author's guess at this stage that the reason the Western elite hope
to adopt one currency is to facilitate the adoption of a universal
system of Feudal taxation.
Time will tell.
Future Employment Trends
Increased cooperation among Trilateral countries has
produced many visible changes within America. In the workplace, for
example, it is becoming apparent that leaders in the Trilateral feudal
empires are adopting each other's best methods for controlling and
exploiting their respective work forces. Unfortunately, the Japanese
have lived under an Emperor, and so they are culturally attuned to the
concept of subservience, and suppression of individual freedoms. Because
of this, American industry is increasingly emulating Japanese industrial
methods and policies with regard to employee management techniques. The
following trends, most of which have been copied from the Japanese, are
now being introduced into the American workplace.
-
1) Longer Working Hours(Overtime or unemployment, take
your pick.)
At one stage in America, a 37 and a half hour work
week was becoming the norm, now job and employee cutbacks are
progressively producing a situation where you are either unemployed, or
working full-time with plenty of opportunities for overtime. Wage
cutbacks, and inflation caused by the ongoing devaluation of the dollar
are helping to make increased overtime as much of a normal condition of
employment in America, as in Japan.
Officially, Japanese workers work an average of about 15 hours
overtime per month. Unofficially, 40 to 50 hours overtime per
month (usually at a rate of time and a quarter) is common. Their rush
hour occurs after 9 pm!! As a result, Japanese home life is practically
non-existent! Increasingly, their suicide rate reflects the stress of
employment oriented lives. {B192} Moreover, refusing to
work overtime puts their jobs in jeopardy, although this is rarely an
issue in Japan because, despite their high wages, their dependency on
overtime is necessitated by a highly inflated cost of living which
predictably marches ahead of their increasing wages.
-
2) Home-based Employment ...low pay, no benefitsMuch of
the labor that currently goes into the Japanese made electronic
equipment that flood into American homes is the product of work done
at home by Japanese piece work laborers. Not only
are the wages only a fraction of those paid to employees of large
corporations, but benefits such as medical care and pensions are
virtually non-existent.
In other words, legislation passed in the first few days of George
Bush's administration (to allow the Mexican garment industry workers to
work at home) threatens to open the floodgates for industrialists to
conscript unemployed Americans to do piece work at home for minimum wage
(or even less), and with possibly no benefits (i.e. no medical, no
dental or no pension). {B193} As was mentioned earlier, there is
even a current push on by the elite to have the immigration laws changed
to facilitate the emigration of citizens from Eastern European countries
to flood the American labor market with extremely cheap labor.
3) Sales Positions paying "Straight Commission"
With a recession on the horizon, sales employees working
for straight commission will suffer badly. Instead of a company having
to pay lay-off severance pay to long standing employees as sales volumes
taper off, employees who can't sell enough to make a living will either
accept less, or lay themselves off with no claims for severance pay.
4) Employee Pay Plans Linked to Company Profits
Profits have ceased to be a yardstick measuring anything
meaningful. {B194} With debt for equity swaps and other
accounting ploys, a company's profits can easily be manipulated to
whatever levels the company CEO wishes them to be. Successful firms like
Walt Disney have paid no taxes for years at a stretch. Therefore, if
employers can convince their employees to accept profit-oriented bonus
incentive plans, they can justify paying workers much less, especially
during recessions. In Japan, workers receive an average of 25% of their
pay in the form of bonus. The practice increases productivity all right,
along with increased mental stress, an abnormally high national suicide
rate, and a tendency toward longer working hours.
5) Employee Stock-Ownership Plans
ESOPS were explained fully in Chapter 1. With ESOPs, the
value of employees' pensions is dependent upon the fluctuating value of
the company's stock. If a company goes bankrupt, employees lose both
their jobs and their pensions. ESOPs will be promoted heavily by the
government, and will constitute the next great wave of worker
exploitation. Don't get suckered in by this one. {B195}
6) Employer-subsidized Loans
Employer sponsored, employer subsidized, and employer
guaranteed home loans are now being used as successfully in America as
they have been in Japan, as a means of ensuring an employee's docile
subservience. In other words, the risk or threat of losing one's home
puts the employee at the employer's mercy even more than a
non-transferable pension has in the past.
Class-oriented Health Care
In a similar move to bond employees to their companies,
American corporations are quickly adopting Japanese methods with regard
to employee health care plans. An example will best serve to describe
the problems that are arising.
The St. Louis-based communications company, Southwestern Bell has a
employee health care plan that is provided by the Prudential Insurance
Co. If an employee uses one of the doctors selected by the Prudential
Insurance Co. a standard doctor's visit costs about $5. If the employee
chooses to use a doctor not selected by the insurer, the employee
must pay a $300 deductible as well as paying 20% of the costs. The
alternatives leave most employees little real choice.
Southern California Edison is considering a plan that uses an
"exclusive provider" condition, where only patients using the
selected doctors will be covered.
Aetna Life & Casualty, the firm which provides health insurance
for Florida Power and Light Co., has hired its own nurses to
visit the hospitals where FPLC employees are being treated. Under the
terms of the plan, the nurses are empowered to monitor the patients
treatments, audit their bills, and even recommend that a patient be
discharged. Although the patient's doctor has the final say, the
insurance coverage can become a potential matter for dispute.
It is no secret that health care insurance programs with
"preferred providers" (i.e. selected doctors) are chosen by
corporations because the plans are cheaper with regard to employer
contributions. An Insurance company bent on maximizing its own profits
is in the position of choosing between more expensive doctors with
proven abilities, or inexperienced graduates. It is not surprising then
that surveys report workers complaining about having received inferior
health care. The potential conflicts of interest, and the opportunities
for abuse should be obvious, especially with regard to
employment-oriented illnesses.
In addition, employees are having to face substantial increases in
paycheck deductions to meet health care costs which are rising at
almost twice the nation's official inflation rate. As with car insurance
deductibles, health insurance deductibles mask the continuing
reductions to America's standard of living. {B196}
The new "preferred provider" health care plans, being offered by 30%
of the nation's corporations are so unpalatable to American workers that
at present, 60% of the 85 strikes (which The Federal Mediation and
Conciliation Service is at present mediating) involve health benefits
issues. {B197}
Many firms which owe future retirement medical benefits to current
employees are threatening to go into Chapter 11 bankruptcy as a means of
bargaining down the liabilities owed to employees who had looked upon
the retirement health care benefits as a compensation they had accepted
in lieu of higher wages. In a recent settlement between AT&T and its
unions, health care liabilities to its retirees was more than halved.
{B198} These are but the beginning symptoms of a massive health
care crisis looming for America's aging baby boomers who will be forced
to accept a decreasing standard of health care during their retirement
years.
The alternative to a "preferred provider organization" (PPO), is to
choose a "health maintenance organization" (HMO) plan. Under this
arrangement, the employee would go to the company's health clinic and
see a doctor or a nurse practitioner who effectively serves as a
"gatekeeper" to the rest of the health care benefits. If the
"gatekeeper" refuses to recommend a procedure or a specialist that you
feel is required, your only alternative is to get the work done at
your own expense outside of the HMO system. {B199}
Moreover, HMOs are increasingly hiring nurse practitioners to do the
bulk of the work that normally has been done by doctors. This is
mentioned not to slander the nation's hard working nurse practitioners,
but simply to point out that a two tier system of health benefits is
clearly emerging.
The nation's doctors and specialists will cater to the needs of
the wealthy, while the nation's wage earners will receive the
bulk of their medical care from nurse practitioners in health
maintenance organizations.
What kind of health care will the rich enjoy? The article in
the Jan 8 1990 issue of BusinessWeek entitled "Hospitals you may
hate to leave", tells of the other growing trend in health care:
luxury hospital rooms. To quote briefly from the article:
"When the visitor entered his room, a fruit basket was
there to greet him. The room which boasted a river view, was decorated
with oak furniture and Oriental rugs. At dusk, room service brought
his order of lobster and white wine. He watched a movie from the
in-house library and then went to bed." Variations of this
scenario are now offered by at least 200 facilities around the U.S.!!
{B200}
Intense lobbying recently killed a tax
provision that would have forced companies to offer the same health
benefits to workers as to executives! {B201}
Let's not forget too, that of the 35 million Americans who entered
1990 without health care coverage, over half were employed! And so, for
the bottom 90%, the conditions and terms of conventional company health
care plans are slowly being either discarded or altered by
Japanese-style methods which shackle employees to health care plans
which give employers additional control over their employees. The
growing trend of bonding workers to employers through financial
indenture, is a topic that most Americans should be more concerned
about. It is the basis upon which 21st century slavery is being built.
Media Consolidation
In order to stop this regressive slide back into the
political and economic Middle Ages, we must have an informed public.
However, under present conditions, this is practically an impossibility.
As was already outlined, a handful of media owners like Robert Murdoch
already own and operate the components of a global communications
network (potentially a Big Brother style media system). {B202}
Takeovers and mergers will put the finishing touches on a global
"thought conditioning network" that will effectively provide coordinated
news and information manipulation throughout the emerging corporate
empire. The media's role, as always, will be to use 5th Avenue marketing
techniques to sell whatever social changes best suit their plans. It was
no accident at all that within days of the Communist party ceasing to be
the dominant party in certain Eastern European countries like Hungary
and Czechoslovakia, Rupert Murdoch was already making serious efforts to
buy up their media. What a perfect opportunity to launch a divide and
conquer campaign!
Even book publishing companies are being bought up and merged into
huge multinational corporations. The ability to be price competitive is
hardly the issue. What is at stake is freedom of the press. Rupert
Murdoch has, for example, recently consolidated his various book
publishing companies in all parts of the world into one global
publishing operation called "Harper and Collins Publishers". In
other words, it will become increasingly more difficult to publish
material that speaks out against the elite, and easier to market and
promote material supportive of the aims of corporate Feudalism.
(Incidentally, this book was originally written in the late 80's but
remained unpublished despite considerable effort on the part of the
author to find a publisher.)
Furthermore, the increased coordination and cooperation between the
economic elite of Japan, Western Europe, and America, is manifesting in
many ominous ways.
Big Brother in American homes ...soon!!
New high-tech devices for monitoring people's reactions
to the programming they are watching on TV will soon be entering the
first American homes. The Nielsen polling people, who have so often
provided administrations with the "evidence" of general public support
for controversial foreign and domestic policy, are now working on a
joint project at Princeton with members of the David Sarnoff Research
Center (a subsidiary of SRI International from Stanford, California) to
develop a device called a "passive people-meter".
The device, modeled on the human eye, would be able to identify the
various members of a family by their unique facial features. It could
sit on a TV, and monitor viewers reactions to the content of TV
commercials or to Presidential speeches, etc., etc..
Needless to say, the potential for abuse is truly frightening. Can
you just imagine the buyer rebates that might some day be offered to
individuals who purchase a TV with this people watcher device built
in? The power of consolidated ownership of the media must no longer
be taken lightly. {B203}
Propaganda for Schoolchildren
As far as mind control techniques are concerned, there
is a new trend being introduced into American public schools that has an
equally serious potential for abuse. Closed circuit television networks
are NOW being supplied free to schools that show specially selected
accounts of news events complete with product commercials aimed
specifically at the particular age groups for whom the shows have been
prepared.
Some schools felt so ingratiated for the equipment that they even
allowed the suppliers of the equipment to hang their commercial product
advertisements up in the school hallways. The potential for mind control
abuse is simply staggering. The degree to which the suppliers of the
equipment are prepared to go is perhaps best evidenced by the fact that
the wall-mounted ads for the younger (physically smaller) schoolchildren
have been mounted "at their eye level" for greater impact.
Are you paying school taxes so that your schoolchildren can be held
as captive audiences and subjected to specially prepared thought
controlling information and commercials during their school hours?
What's more, parents would be totally unaware of what visual
conditioning their children were being subjected to. Remember, one of
George Bush's primary election campaign planks was his intention of
forcing schoolchildren to repeatedly swear their allegiance to the
existing socioeconomic system based on Feudal principles. Warp those
little minds early, while they are still easy to mould. In fact, when
minds have been suitably prepared and conditioned, lies are easily
passed off as truth.
Chapter 7 Considerations Regarding "The Ultimate Social
System"
Wisdom From The State Department
In the September 4 1989 issue of Time Magazine, an
article appeared entitled Has History Come to an End? {B204}
The article was referring to the recently published manifesto of
capitalist wishful thinking entitled The End of History? put
forward by Mr. Francis Fukuyama, deputy director of the U.S. State
Department's policy planning department. In it, Mr. Fukuyama contends that
the American political system appeared to represent the ultimate in social
and political evolution.
As he himself put it,
"What we may be witnessing is not just the end of a
particular period of postwar history, but the end of history as such:
that is, the end point of mankind's ideological evolution and the
universalization of Western liberal democracy as the final form of human
government." {B205} In light of the fact that a State
Department spokesman can publicly promote such delusions of grandeur for a
system that only two years ago suffered a failure of its economy that
almost mirrored the disastrous crash of 1929, and for a system which now
has the dubious distinction of being the world's leading debtor nation,
one must seriously resist the temptation to burst out laughing.
When the murder capital of Mr. Fukuyama's ideal society is also the
seat of its government and one of its major centers of drug abuse, it
would appear that, if nothing else, he doesn't demand much of an ideal
system.
In any case, the American elite have in desperation resorted to this
feeble attack on socialist theory. Although this story is
only in its infancy, it is showing all the signs of being earmarked for a
major coordinated and sustained media propaganda campaign, so get prepared
to hear over and over again that the American system has at last triumphed
over the ideals of socialism.
His attempt to wrap Feudalism and Neocolonialism in the stars and
stripes and hoist it up onto a pedestal for the world to pay homage, is
little more than another attempt to pull the wool flags down over the eyes
of gullible readers. Whether or not he will succeed in influencing the
American public to renew their allegiance to Feudalism has yet to be seen.
He does nevertheless provide a patriotic focus to divert attention away
from the serious hardships faced by the working class, and buys time to
allow the elite to complete their withdrawal of equity from the American
economy.
He went on to state that as for Marxism-Leninism, "while there may be
some isolated true believers left in places like Managua, Pyongyang or
Cambridge", no large state that espouses it as an ideology even pretends
to be in the vanguard of history.
Mr Fukuyama appears willing to overlook that not only did Russia put
the first man in space, she currently leads in space station technology.
The State Department seems only too willing to play down the present and
future significance of Russia's pioneering leadership at the forefront of
man's cosmic debut.
He went on further to say that, "The egalitarianism of modern America
represents essentially the attainment of the classless society envisioned
by Marx".
I could be wrong, but I don't think Marx dreamed of an "egalitarian"
Utopia where the richest 1% would own more assets than the bottom 90%.
{B206} Perhaps he has also overlooked that unlike America,
neither China nor Russia (which have approximately five and a half
times the number of citizens to feed clothe and house) allows their
citizens to go hungry or live on park benches and under bridges.
Although Mr. Fukuyama's thesis amounts to little more than a desperate
attempt to mask and ignore the seriousness of America's social, economic,
and political deterioration, it does draw attention to the need of
honestly considering "the nature of an ultimate social order". To
do this, we will consider the best and worst characteristics of our
existing social systems.
The Folly of Nationalism and Economic Greed
The depletion of our ozone layer and the loss of marine
life in our lakes as a result of acid rain draws attention to the fact
that our interdependence goes beyond mere national real estate boundaries.
Due to the current rate of species extinction, and due to the damage
already inflicted on the planet's ecosystem, time is now of the essence.
Mankind is on the brink of destroying not only itself, but the planet as a
living organism. We must acknowledge that selfishness and greed is driving
the economic elite of many countries to ignore the basic rights and needs
of others. We can no longer afford to sit idly by while a handful of
individuals push all life on the planet to the brink of extinction.
We must focus on the reality that humanity is a functioning element of
a much larger entity, the survival of which depends on man's ability to
control his baser instincts of selfishness and greed. The economic elite
must recognize how their role of dominance as well as their claim to the
bulk of global wealth, have both lost their validity.
In his book, The Critical Path, Buckminster Fuller shows that
the planet's resources are still so abundant as to clearly indicate that
famine, hunger, and poverty are artificial conditions imposed on humanity
unnecessarily. {B207} And that is the pity. There is no rational
need for the bulk of humanity to endure the hunger and deprivations
brought on by the activities of a few selfish individuals.
My personal experience in traveling through nearly forty countries has
shown that the average human being, irrespective of nationality, readily
and eagerly extends generous hospitality and friendship to strangers. The
more I traveled, the less I felt allegiance to any particular race,
religion, culture, country, or political system. Perhaps it was this
freedom more than anything else that allowed me to see somewhat
objectively that racial, political, cultural, and religious barriers don't
naturally occur in man, but are the hangover of collective social
actions organized by a mere handful of powerful individuals who have
manipulated whole populations to support their personal appetites for
wealth and power.
The bulk of humanity would prefer to be left alone to live simple
peaceful lives. Instead, they are made to bear the economic and political
backlash of a small minority of economic elite around the world, who are
busily exploiting both the human and natural resources of the planet to
make fast and easy personal fortunes with virtual disregard for the social
repercussions that follow in the wake of their activities. Hence, poverty,
hunger, and war continue to overtake man's struggle for basic needs.
The destruction of the Brazilian rain forests is a very important case
in point. As was discussed earlier, the rain forests
are being destroyed mainly because the rich can avoid taxation by doing
so. The planet's air supply is being jeopardized to line the pockets of a
few wealthy Brazilians. {B208}
Whether we adopt the modern concept of mankind living in a global
village or as crew members of spaceship earth, we must begin to
live more harmoniously by focusing less on our separateness as individual
nations, and concentrating more on global cooperation. We cannot,
however, allow domination by an economic oligarchy to be confused with
true global cooperation.
A global government run by the economic elite would mirror the
inequities of feudal conditions but on a greatly magnified scale.
Both Feudalism and Colonialism are diametrically opposed to
global cooperation!
Many other species before us have learned to cooperate and have
probably had to go through similar struggles at a different level of
awareness. We will have to do it too, and we can start by acknowledging
the respective strengths and limitations of our existing ideologies in an
effort to replace fear and hatred with understanding.
Capitalism, Communism, And Socialism
Although the world is no longer torn apart by a conflict
of ideologies, Capitalism vs Communism. The truth is that both systems
exemplify characteristics of human behavior, that while appearing to
oppose each other, are destined to work together.
Capitalism is an economic and social system that evolved from the
association of individuals who possessed an ability to dominate their
respective societies. Because of their dominance, it provided these
individuals with an opportunity to exist and flourish relatively free of
restraints. A free spirit is the natural breeding ground for innovative
discoveries, and rapid development, as the rapid progress in Western
technology triumphantly confirms.
The dominant members have therefore always promoted the system as the
ultimate expression of freedom for an individual. That certainly might be
true for the dominant members, but the reverse is true for the remaining
members of that society. This type of economic system surfaced in earlier
Western societies as Feudalism.
It seems a truism that an excess of anything leads to problems, and in
that sense, extreme individuality and independence manifests itself as
selfishness, which when combined with dominance, produces social feelings
of superiority, and hence class distinctions arise for the group who no
longer perceive their fellow men as equals. This is the plight of Western
nations today.
Dictatorship naturally arises out of
democracy, and the most aggravated form of tyranny and slavery out of the
most extreme liberty.
PLATO
Logically, the natural
reaction to class distinction and dominance is an appreciation for
cooperation and brotherhood which manifests clearly in the symbiotic
relationships so prevalent in nature.
Humanity's first serious attempt to design a symbiotic society, which
would eliminate the social inequalities that result from social and
economic class distinctions, led directly to the social ideals and
principles upon which Communism and Socialism are based. Both systems put
much emphasis on brotherhood, cooperation, and equality.
Consequently, humanity's need to control the abuses of selfishness and
greed, was an evolutionary inevitability. The Communist reaction was as
destined as the abuses of freedom.
Conversely, suppressing man's individuality and freedom excessively
while striving toward unselfish cooperation and brotherhood, is as
predictably a potential extreme of Communism, as greed is within
Capitalism. Imperialism, practiced by any belief system, is an intolerable
affront to the free will in man.
The benefits of resolving the duality of these ideologies remain to be
sufficiently appreciated as a natural step in humanity's social evolution.
A free spirit excels in pioneering and discovery; a cooperative spirit is
the spirit of the hearth, ...a necessity for quality in every day living.
Humanity as a species is characterized by the need for the "virtues"
of both Capitalism and Communism, ...without the "excesses" of either!
Although the hybrid system would manifest itself more as present day
Socialism than either of the parent ideologies, Socialism is still in the
developmental stage, but its potential as a framework from which to
develop mankind's symbiotic potential is undeniable. Sweden's success with
Socialism points to a middle ground solution that has already brought the
Swedes a higher standard of living than America's. In fact, Socialist
countries in general enjoy higher standards of living than either strictly
Communist or Capitalist countries.
In reality, we are all symbiotic parts of one entity, and the challenge
is to emerge with all of us pulling together, instead of in opposite
directions, as we are blindly and uncontrollably doing now. As responsible
members of the planet, it must become our goal and responsibility to work
toward symbiotic cooperation by recognizing the value of the individual
as well as the brotherhood of mankind.
Global harmony can be achieved not by choosing Capitalism,
Communism, or any other "ISM", but by eliminating the extremes, the
excesses, and the lack of cooperation in whatever system we are living in.
A more cooperative relationship must be worked out. However the
time involved for this may be greater than the planet can afford, the
proliferation of nuclear weapons, and our headlong race into the field of
genetic engineering draws urgent attention to the fact that unless we slow
down our scientific progress and begin concentrating on a holistic
perception of the part we play in the larger scheme of things, we may
regress the planet to where our blue-green algae communities begin their
second childhood.
While we all ought to be thankful for the diversity of culture and
cultural skills that have developed over time as a result of isolating one
group of humans from another, we can no longer afford to allow the
darker side of mankind to use nationalistic pride and patriotism to
motivate humanity into remaining as warring tribes.
In the meantime, and for the want of a small mid-course correction, the
whole planet will continue to live through the agony of poverty, hunger,
and all the other unnecessary social abuses we are inflicting on
ourselves, and on the rest of the plant and animal kingdoms.
Because religious differences also appear at present to pose barriers
to international cooperation and harmony, no discussion of what
constitutes the ultimate social order would be complete without facing the
problems that arise due to the existence of varying religious beliefs.
Rising Above Religious Differences
The social desirability
and value of religious freedom is as equally valid as the existence of any
other form of freedom. Throughout time, men have acknowledged their own as
well as society's moral, ethical and spiritual needs as a basis for
quality of existence. Unfortunately, the issue of religious freedom itself
stands as a barrier limiting cooperation between the opposing ideological
systems of Capitalism and Communism; but I think only through a lack of
understanding. It must first of all be fully recognized that religious
freedom encompasses not only the freedom to believe, but the freedom not
to believe, and the freedom to express uncertainty as well. Unfortunately,
many well-meaning missionaries have been guilty of attempting to force
their particular religious beliefs on other societies. Knowingly, or
unknowingly they have been guilty of religious imperialism, which is a
forceful suppression of religious freedom.
Despite obvious contradiction with the concepts of Christianity and
brotherhood, churches used to be filled with slave owners. In fact,
racially and economically segregated congregations still persist in
America today.
It was not surprising then that when Communists first discarded the
dominance of an elite minority, they also chose to discard the hypocrisy
and oppression of the church. A resurgence of religious activity and
freedom within the Communist countries could be ironically pointing to the
fact that Communism may have too hastily thrown out the religious baby
with the economic bath water.
People in all countries have traditionally looked to their spiritual
leaders for guidance in finding a path out of their social problems. The
expectation has not been unreasonable, and the role of the church as a
conscience guiding social evolution is certainly valid. However the
churches have been guilty of confusing their congregations by periodically
displaying behavior that appears hypocritical of the values they
traditionally purport to uphold.
It would do well to remember that the merits of a religion should
not rely on how its clergy or congregations interpret and manifest the
faith's religious dogmas, because social forces are capable of creating a
substantial gap between the ideal behavior aspired to by a religion, and
the conduct of the humans presently in charge of passing on the
traditional beliefs to future generations.
Excesses and shortcomings can occur within religious systems as easily
and surely as in secular systems, so it should therefore become an equally
important responsibility to recognize and eliminate them in our religious
systems. The administration of church wealth has played a detrimental role
in the growth within the churches of an economically privileged elite who
have been running their churches as Feudal empires, with economics playing
an inordinate and inappropriate role. The conduct of our society's latest
religious offspring, the TV evangelist, has brought the problem sharply
into focus.
The need to address the shortcomings of religious administration
becomes unavoidable in order to dispel the hypocritical behavior caused by
the mismanagement of wealth within the churches. We can certainly
recognize the shortcomings of church administration without casting any
aspersions at the dogma of the religion itself.
The quest for spiritual awareness still plays a vital role in the
planet's development. Not surprisingly, spiritual values remain an
integral aspect of many cultures. However our regrettable lack of social
harmony has occurred due to the fact that our focus on advances in science
and technology has been at the sacrifice in growth of our spiritual
tolerance, awareness and development.
Gandhi's Contribution
Mahatma Gandhi's contribution to
humanity has yet to be appreciated by many outside of India. His living
example of altruistic motives and personal self-mastery were focused into
his lifelong activity of seeking world peace and harmony through
non-violent methods. His dominant message was that change, no matter how
urgent and necessary, must be achieved using non-violent methods
only.
Gandhi gave his last breath without malice and with
compassionate understanding, to an assassin whom he realized had not yet
acquired freedom from compulsive instinctual behavior. He sought to
enlighten those who in frustration see no alternative to overthrowing
economic violence than an equal and opposite physical violence.
Violence for whatever reason fuels retaliation. Dictators
and selfish rulers have kept may people on the planet impoverished
throughout time. Without even a rudimentary democratic framework to work
from, many have taken the only path they could see to regain freedom,
...violence. They too were compelled into action because each extreme
breeds its opposite.
Feudalism has no place on a shrinking planet any more. Before it is too
late, a ray of hope must be given back to those who now feel abused and
dispossessed. The problem is systemic and worsens with each new piece of
legislation that facilitates either Feudal or neocolonial exploitation.
Frustrations are manifesting more and more in the proliferation of violent
and self-destructive behavior. The exploding alcohol and drug problems are
symptomatic of an emotionally disturbed nation. Some are turning to drugs
as an economic means of survival, but an increasing number are using drugs
to try to at least temporarily escape the realities of a deteriorating
society.
Fundamental changes are now urgently required. Let's get started.
Chapter 8 Taking Responsibility for Change
Let's begin the process of bringing about social change by
objectively taking a closer look at the relationship that exists between
the elite and those whom they successfully manipulate and exploit.
- Those who watch passively as the injustice of the "justice
system" becomes more visible, are almost as responsible for the
deterioration as the lawmakers, lawyers and judges who play a more
direct role.
- Those who do nothing more than stop voting when they
recognize that the democracy they live with is not really democratic,
must also shoulder some responsibility for deteriorating social
conditions.
- And similarly, those who recognize the injustice of lopsided wealth
distribution, but do nothing to reverse it, are not victims of
exploitation, but accomplices to it.
In other words, anyone in
the West whose quality of life is decreasing as a direct result of the
hoaxes described earlier in the book, is not automatically a victim of
exploitation.
Victimization is nevertheless very real and usually involves being
totally misled or fooled about an issue, or being in a position
where it is impossible to fight for change. Political prisoners
rotting away behind bars are good examples of the latter form of
victimization.
So although very few individuals in the West are incapable of fighting
for change, almost all are victimized by the elite's misinformation and
subtle programming. The degree to which everyone on the planet has
been manipulated, misinformed and physically victimized by the elite's
greed and ruthlessness --especially in wartime-- is intolerable. More
importantly, unless they are brought under control, it is absolutely
inevitable that the elite will resort to the same levels of savagery again
and again!! How many more Hiroshimas and holocausts will it take
to provide the motivation for 99% of the people to exercise control over
the savages who still dominate our species?
Recognizing Your Power
For years I had considered the elite too powerful, and the
system too massive and bureaucratic to change. Because the elite
controlled the democratic process, I had even for a time stopped voting,
not out of apathy, but out of sheer frustrated awareness. Because the
elite also controlled the media, I saw no possible way for individuals or
even small groups to effectively challenge the elite's control. In other
words, I considered myself to be one of the elite's helpless victims.
However, I no longer see the problem as insurmountable. On the
contrary, getting rid of Feudalism is quite an achievable goal, and you
can play a direct and valuable role.
Just as the pressure of public opinion eventually forced the
government to bring about an end to the human suffering in Vietnam, so
collective public opinion can, and must, bring an end to Feudalism!!
Just as stopping the Vietnam war took less than a decade, getting rid
of Feudalism can be achieved in less than a decade also! It is not only
possible, it is waiting to happen. The conditions providing the motivation
for change are all in place due to the growing greed and selfishness of
the economic elite. The conditions are in fact ideal.
Let's continue this positive line of thinking and optimistically
consider some goals.
Considering Some Goals
** The long term goal should be for mankind to
function symbiotically amongst ourselves, and toward other species. ** The intermediate goal must be to replace social
& economic Feudalism with a system capable of bringing about an
equitable prosperity for all. ** The short term goal must be
the elimination of control of the media by the economic elite.
To begin the somewhat epic task of removing Feudalism, let us first
consult the sages. The most important steps are the first steps, and on
that point, both East and West agree. Western philosophy comments that:
"The secret of success is getting started." Eastern
philosophy points out that: "The longest journey begins with the
first step."
Acknowledging The Problem and Solution
The FIRST STEP toward all three goals is to acknowledge
the problem, that social and economic Feudalism stands in the way of
social progress, and even world peace.
The SECOND STEP is to realize that the successful elimination of
Feudalism requires that you, your relatives, your neighbors, and the
people you work with must be aware of the facts. Before
realizing how people could acquire the necessary information and hence the
motivation to act together as a unit, I had thought the task was hopeless.
This book was written not to scorn the system or the individuals
mentioned, but solely to provide the facts necessary to help initiate a
democratic revival. The more we all recognize the programming we
are being continuously subjected to, the less effective it will be.
Slowly, we will acquire the motivation and eventually the power to stop
being "accomplices", and once and for all put an end to Feudal conditions.
Ironically, until we do so, we won't deserve to enjoy the rewards and
benefits of a more evolved social order.
Getting The Ball Rolling
The THIRD STEP is therefore to begin discussing the
issues and conditions that you find most unjust or unbearable.
Because both the media and the government are controlled by the
very people whose power we wish to diminish, initial changes will have to
come using neither the media nor the electoral process. It must happen
through person to person communication. The fact, that the richest
1 percent own more assets than the bottom 90 percent, must become
common knowledge! Start by telling either a friend or a relative,
TODAY!
You don't have to become a crusader to discuss the relevant issues with
the people you know; you only have to be concerned about the world you
pass on to your children and their children. As often as you discuss the
issues with others, you will have helped not just yourself, your children,
and their children, but all the abused peoples of the world, and
ultimately their children. Social and economic Feudalism has been with
us a long time, but I guarantee you that when enough people start
discussing the issues, independent media like the Public Broadcasting
System will respond by openly airing the facts. The benefits of your
efforts and discussions will gradually become more and more evident.
Politicians will ultimately be forced to seriously confront the issues and
make legislative changes. They can eventually be spurred into acting on
behalf of the bottom 90%. Write and/or talk to your elected officials
about the issues that concern you most. However, to get them working for
us permanently, we must ultimately lobby for changes that would remove
their dependency on the elite for campaign support!! To involve and
motivate enough people to get rid of Feudalism, it will be necessary to
maximize the distribution of information such as is contained in the book.
Tell as many people as you can about this Web site.
I am only one. You are only one. Together we can move
mountains. Spread the word as well as you can. The war in Vietnam came to
an end because enough people cared enough to force the issue. Getting rid
of feudalism can and must be accomplished in exactly the same way! Unless
we as individuals help to make the preceeding facts and perspectives
"common knowledge", the status quo (which means a steadily declining
standard of living), is bound to continue. Your help is invaluable!!
Whatever you do, don't underestimate your power to help change the
world for the better. The internet has at last provided a vehicle for the
bottom 90% to eliminate feudalism. Exert your influence, or let others
dictate your future. The choice is yours. The more people that work
together, the easier, and quicker change will come. Providing there is no
profit involved, feel free to print out part, or all of the book for
distribution to whomever you think may benefit from the information. The
LAST, and most important STEP, is to KEEP DISCUSSING THE ISSUES,
one year, ...two years, ...as long as it takes!!!!
As individuals, we have little or no chance of limiting the power of
the elite. Collectively, we can do it! In fact, every time you
discuss the issues with anyone else, you will at last be effectively
lobbying for your interests. Once the average person refuses to continue
living out the role of pawn, chess as a lifestyle will come to an end.
Unless we start demanding changes, the bottom 90% of us will continue
to be manipulated as pawns in a chess society.
Bibliographic References for Chapter 1
{B1.} "A city
seized by panic" The Economist (Mar 25 1989): p28 {B2.} Dr. Ravi
Batra, The Great Depression of 1990 (New York:Dell Publishing,
1988), p.151 {B3} "The World's Billionaires" Forbes (Jul 23 1990):
p121 {B4} "Billionaires" Forbes (Oct 23 1989): p164, p152 {B5}
"Drug Money Soils Clean Hands" Insight (Aug 21 1989): p14 {B6} "In
poverty's hard clutch, little chance to escape" Insight (Apr 3 1989): p9
{B7} "How we can win the war on poverty" Fortune (Apr 10 1989): p128
{B8} "Why the nickel and diming over the minimum wage" BusinessWeek
(Mar 27 1989): p35 {B9} "America's income gap: the closer you look the
worse it gets" BusinessWeek (Apr 17 1989): p79 {B10} "Fixing the
deficit: where there's no will, there no way" BusinessWeek (Oct 2 1989):
p31 {B11} "How we can win the war on poverty" Fortune (Apr 10 1989):
p127 {B12} "There's nothing universal about plans for universal health
care" BusinessWeek (Jan 22 1990): p39 {B13} "How we can win the war on
poverty" Fortune (Apr 10 1989): p127 {B14} "Rich land, poor kids" The
Economist (Jan 7 1989): p25 {B15}"A slump that's built to last"
BusinessWeek (Jan 8 1990): p122 {B16}"What's dragging productivity
down? Women's low wages" BusinessWeek (Nov 27 1989): p171 {B17}"Plenty
of workers are waiting in the wings" BusinessWeek (Mar 13 1989): p98
{B18}"White-collar bloat" Forbes (Oct 17 1988): p34 {B19}"The real
villain in "Roger & Me"? "Big Business" BusinessWeek (Jan 8 1990): P42
{B20}"These countries are up for sale" Forbes (Dec 25 1989): p130
{B21}"Croesus Incorporated" The Economist (Feb 18 1989): p67 {B22}
"Fact and Comment" Forbes (Jan 8 1990): p27 {B23} "Let's change the
immigration law -- Now" Fortune (Jan 29 1990): p12 {B24} "Now, where
were we" The Economist (June 17 1989): p32 {B25} "Wages of politics"
The Economist (Mar 18 1989): p25 {B26} "Asking for more": The
Economist (Aug 19 1989): p20 {B27} "Not so color blind" The Economist
(Oct 28 1989): p28 {B28} "Black on white" The Economist (Nov 11 1989):
P14 {B29} "Ex-Wizard tries to turn back the clock on voters'
attitudes" Insight (Jan 15 1990): p20 {B30} "Doing without money" The
Economist (Feb 25 1989): p25 {B31} "How to help America's schools"
Fortune (Apr 12 1989): p138 {B32} Harrison, Alan. The Distribution of
Wealth in 10 Countries (London: H.M Stationery Office, 1979) {B33}"The
Billionaires" Fortune (Sep 12 1988): p71 {B34}"The Billionaires"
Fortune (Sep 12 1988): p98 {B35}"A wealth of billionaires" Forbes (Jul
24 1989): p126 {B36}"Plenty of workers are waiting in the wings"
BusinessWeek (Mar 13 1989): p98 {B37}"White-collar bloat" Forbes (Oct
17 1988): p34 {B38}"Croesus Incorporated" The Economist (Feb 18 1989):
p67 {B39}"In poverty's hard clutch, little chance to escape" Insight
(Apr 3 1989): p9 {B40}"How we can win the war on poverty" Fortune (Apr
10 1989): p128 {B41}"Wages of politics" The Economist" (Mar 18 1989):
p25 {B48} "Why Bush's trickle-up theory is sailing through Congress"
BusinessWeek (Oct 16 1989): p47 {B49} "Who got reformed?" Forbes (Jan
9 1989): p298 {B50} "Some big companies did a strange thing in '87:
They paid taxes" BusinessWeek (Dec 26 1988): p40 {B51} "How the
government subsidizes leveraged buyouts" Forbes (Nov 28 1988): p194
{B52} "How the government subsidizes leveraged buyouts" Forbes (Nov 28
1988): p194 {B53} "Invasion of the company snatchers" Forbes (Dec 12
1988): p106 {B54} "Don't blame me" Forbes (Sep 4 1989): p102 {B55}
"Wall Street 100" Financial World (Jul 11 1989): p34 {B56}
"Billionaires" Forbes (Oct 23 1989): p154 {B57} "Billionaires" Forbes
(Oct 23 1989): p178 {B58} "Who's really picking up the tab?" Forbes
(Oct 30 1989): p38 {B59} "Takeover and makeover" The Economist (Aug 12
1989): p66 {B60} "Postelection blues" Forbes (Dec 12 1989): p290
{B61} "The bills are coming due" BusinessWeek (Sep 11 1989): p86
{B62} "Michael Milken meet Sewell Avery" Forbes (Oct 23 1989): p61
{B63} "Morning in America" The Economist (Jun 24 1989): p5 of Banking
Survey {B64} "Morning in America" The Economist (Jun 24 1989): p5 of
Banking Survey {B65} "Debt: The zero option" The Economist (Feb 22
1989): p61 {B66} "ESOPs: Are they good for you?" BusinessWeek (May 15
1989): p118 {B67} "ESOPs aren't the magic key to anything"
BusinessWeek (Oct 23 1989): p20 {B68} "Trust the trust, or bust the
trust?" The Economist (Sep 2 1989): p63 {B69} "FDIC believes tide has
turned after record number of failures" American Banker (Jan 5 1989): p
{B70} "Spent thrifts, contd" The Economist (Jun 17 1989): p15
{B71} "You can't buy a house anymore..." Financial World (Dec 13
1988): p42 {B72} "Priced out of house and home" Insight (Mar 13 1989):
p10 {B73} From article by Mr Bowsher for the Los Angeles Times
{B74} "Burned" BusinessWeek (Oct 9 1989): p57 {B75} "Unsheltered"
The Economist (Jan 6 1990): p31 {B76} "The junkification of American
T-Bonds" The Economist (May 27 1989): p77 {B77} "Surplus loophole"
Forbes (Sep 4 1989): p44 {B78} "Liabilities dangereuses" Forbes (Sep
18 1989): p106 {B79} "You bet your life" Forbes (Jul 10 1989): p38
{B80} "Jockeying for power at the IMF" BusinessWeek (Oct 3 1988): p109
{B81} "Brady's Mexican hat trick" The Economist (Jul 29 1989): p61
{B82} "Shutters down" The Economist (May 27 1989): p80 {B83} "Will
the U.S. be left holding the bag on third World debt?" BusinessWeek (Oct
16 1989): p24 {B84} "A price on your head" Forbes (Sep 4 1989): p80
{B85} "The power of the pension funds" BusinessWeek (Nov 6 1989): p154
{B86} "The fury over pension funds" BusinessWeek (Jul 3 1989): p31
{B87} "The power of the pension funds" BusinessWeek (Nov 6 1989): p155
{B88} "Hidden bombs" The Economist (Oct 7 1989): p26 {B89}
"Unsheltered" The Economist (Jan 6 1990): p32 {B90} "The folly of
raiding the piggy bank" The Economist (Apr 8 1989): p27 {B91} "Capital
Comment" Financial World (Jun 27 1989): p112 {B92} "A brief history of
funny money The Economist (Jan 6 1990): p21 {B93} "This plan won't end
America's savings drought" BusinessWeek (Jan 15 1990): p24 {B94} "A
Latin debt that might work" Fortune (Apr 24 1989): p212 {B95} "Croesus
unlimited" The Economist (Mar 18 1989): p69 {B96} "Capital fiddling"
The Economist (Sep 23 1989): p26 {B97} "Tax tips for trying times"
Fortune (Special fall edition Vol 120, No 10): p201 {B98} "Wall Street
100" Financial World (Jul 11 1989): p33 {B99} "Trigger-pulling on
hostile takeovers" Insight (Jun 19 1989): p44 {B100} "Washington's war
against LBO debt" Fortune (Feb 13 1989): p92 {B101} "Memo to the
airlines: Deregulation days are numbered" BusinessWeek (Nov 13 1989): p59
Bibliographic References for Chapter 2
{B102} "Sad Salvador" The Economist (Nov 25 1989): p14
{B103} "Death Map" The Economist (Jan 14 1989): p40 {B104} "No
doves here" The Economist (Apr 1 1989): p38 {B105} "Taming the dreaded
Gerrymander" Insight (Dec 25 1989): p20 {B106} "How to end Washington
corruption" Fortune (Dec 18 1989): p213 {B107} "Can you buy a
congressman?" The Economist (Nov 18 1989): p25 {B108} "Gallos humor"
Forbes (Oct 17 1988): p88 {B109} "Before the loophole closes" Forbes
(Oct 2 1989): p239 {B110} "Frenzy on the Hill" Newsweek (Jun 12 1989):
p20 {B111} "Heavy hitters of politics, 1988 edition" Forbes (Oct 24
1988): p72 {B112} "The rise and fall of special interest financing"
Forbes (Oct 24 1988): p80 {B113} "Can you buy a congressman?" The
Economist (Nov 18 1989): p25 {B114} "Can you buy a congressman?" The
Economist (Nov 18 1989): p26 {B115} "Frenzy on the Hill" Newsweek (Jun
12 1989): p17 {B116} "Frenzy on the Hill" Newsweek (Jun 12 1989): p20
{B117} "Frenzy on the Hill" Newsweek (Jun 12 1989): p18 {B118}
"The S&L mess - and how to fix it" BusinessWeek (Oct 31 1988): p131
{B119} Good timing, Charlie" Forbes (Nov 27 1989): p142 {B120}
"DeConcini banks on voter loyalty" Insight (Dec 18 1989): p20 {B121}
"The seduction of Senator Alan Cranston" BusinessWeek (Dec 4 1989): p82
{B122} "High-rolling Texas: The state that ate FSLIC" BusinessWeek
(Oct 31 1989): p138 {B123} "An amazing tale" The Economist (Aug 26
1989): p66 {B124} "DeConcini banks on voter loyalty" Insight (Dec 18
1989): p21 {B125} "How one family handles its finances" Forbes (Jun 12
1989): p42 {B126} "Hi, Ho, Silverado" The Economist (Jan 13 1990): p78
{B127} "Humpty Dumpty" The Economist (Dec 9 1989): p23 {B128}
"'Nuff said" The Economist (Nov 25 1989): p95 {B129} "DeConcini banks
on voter loyalty Insight (Dec 18 1989): p21 {B130} "The plaintiff
Attorney's great honey rush (Oct 16 1989): p199 {B131} "Greenspan's
moment of truth" BusinessWeek (Jul 31 1989): p62 {B132} "The screwiest
S&L bailout ever" Fortune (Jun 19 1989): p114 {B133} "Sweet deal"
Forbes (Sep 18 1989): p96 {B134} "Why Bush's trickle-up theory is
sailing through Congress" BusinessWeek (Oct 16 1989): p47 {B135}
"Incumbents' real ace in the hole" Insight (May 22 1989): p22 {B136}
"How to please Mr Speaker" The Economist (Nov 18 1989): p34 {B137}
"Franking wins in the back room" Insight (Oct 23 1989): p21 {B138}
Will the US be left holding the bag on Third World debt?" BusinessWeek
(Oct 16 1989): p22 {B139} "The seduction of Senator Alan Cranston"
BusinessWeek (Dec 4 1989): p82
Bibliographic References for Chapter 3
{B140} "Even Rupert has his limits" BusinessWeek (Oct 2
1989): p35 {B141} "Murdoch's empire" Newsweek (Aug 22 1989): p43
{B142} "Even Rupert has his limits" BusinessWeek (Oct 2 1989): p34
{B143} "Murdoch's empire" Newsweek (Aug 22 1988): p45 {B144} The
Billionaires" Fortune (Sep 12 1988): p71 {B145} "The Billionaires"
Fortune (Sep 12 1988): p84 {B146} "The Billionaires" Fortune (Sep 12
1988): p71 {B147} "The Billionaires" Fortune (Sep 12 1988): p92
{B148} "The Billionaires" Fortune (Sep 12 1988): p84 {B149} "How
Hollywood fixed an election" American Film Magazine (Nov 88): {B150}
Swanberg, W.A. Citizen Hearst (New York: Bantam Books, 1971), p.531
{B151} "The wordsmith behind The Speech" Newsweek (Aug 22 1988): p16
{B152} Cap Weinberger to become fourth Forbes Publisher" Forbes (Oct 3
1988): p {B153} "The Quayle family newspapers: Black, white - and
green all over" BusinessWeek (Aug 28 1989): p29 {B154} "When the
presses stop" The Economist (Nov 11 1989): p36 {B155} "Do you
sincerely want to publish?" Forbes (Sep 18 1989): p72 {B156}
"Murdoch's empire" Newsweek (Aug 22 1988): p47 {B157} "Flag burning
and flag waving" The Economist (July 1 1989): p19 {B158} "U.S.
jingoism is revealed in striking lack of criticism of Bush's action in
Panama" The Toronto Globe and Mail (Dec 22 1989): pA1 {B159} "The case
of the briefcase" The Economist (Jul 29 1989): p24
Bibliographic References for Chapter 4
{B161} "Howard Baker could help Drexel get out of the
doghouse" BusinessWeek (Nov 21 1988): p48 {B162} "The Conservative
Five" The Economist (Jul 8 1989): p22 {B163} "The plaintiff attorneys'
great honey rush" Forbes (Oct 16 1989): p199 {B164} "The plaintiff
attorneys' great honey rush" Forbes (Oct 16 1989): p199 {B165} "The
plaintiff attorneys' great honey rush" Forbes (Oct 16 1989): p197,199
{B166} Moyers, Bill. The Secret Government (USA: Seven Locks Press),
1987 {B167} "No jug for Ollie" The Economist (July 8 1989): p28
{B168} "The plaintiff attorneys' great honey rush" Forbes (Oct 16
1989): p198 {B169} "The plaintiff attorneys' great honey rush" Forbes
(Oct 16 1989): p204-209 {B170} Quoted from article "Look who heads
'supreme court' of judicial discipline" by Alan M. Dershowitz, Professor
of Law at Harvard University {B171} "A right turn, but no free ride
for business" BusinessWeek (Jul 10 1989): p27 {B172} "Business may
have found a way to defang RICO" BusinessWeek (Aug 28 1989): p {B173}
"A shorter leash for the Attorneys General" BusinessWeek (Oct 9 1989): p86
Bibliographic References for Chapter 5
{B174}Williams, Neville. Chronology of the Modern
World (Great Britain: The Chaucer Press, 1975) pp. 598, 600, 606,
610 {B175}Williams, Neville. Chronology of the Modern World
(Great Britain: The Chaucer Press, 1975), pp.650, 652 {B176}"PLO
quest for U.N. status bogs down in muddled state "Insight (Jun 19 1989):
p34 {B177} "The Shah's last laugh" Forbes (Sep 19 1988): p52, P12
{B178} Williams, Neville. Chronology Of The Modern
World(England: Penguin Books, 1975), .597 {B179} "Welcome up to a
point" The Economist (Sep 9 1989): p26 {B180} Churchill, Winston.
Triumph and Tragedy p533 {B181}"A special relationship at risk", The
Economist (Jan 21 1989): p21 {B182}"After-sales servicemen", The
Economist (Sep 2 1989): p40 {B183} "Stingy Sam" The Economist (Mar 25
1989): p26
Bibliographic References for Chapter 6
{B184} "Congress of the New World" Forbes (Oct 30 1989):
p78 {B185} "A Latin debt plan that might work" Fortune (Apr 24 1989):
p212 {B186} "The banks' great escape" The Economist (Feb 11 1989): p73
{B187} "No more Mr Cheap Guy" Forbes (Oct 30 1989): p102 {B188}
"NSC change" The Economist (Feb 11 1989): p21 {B189} "Merger mania is
sweeping Europe" Fortune (Dec 19 1988): p158 {B190} "Merger mania is
sweeping Europe" Fortune (Dec 19 1988): p158 {B191} "Merger mania is
sweeping Europe" Fortune (Dec 19 1988): p158 {B192} "Invoice us in
ECU, if you please" The Economist (Jan 13 1990): p78 {B193} "Enjoy,
enjoy!" Forbes (Dec 12 1988): p144 {B194} "Here comes richer, riskier
pay plans" Fortune (Dec 19 1988): p54 {B195} "ESOPs: Are they good for
you?" BusinessWeek (May 15 1989): p117 {B196} "No more health care on
the house" Fortune (Feb 27 1989): p71 {B197} "Ouch! The squeeze on
your health benefits" BusinessWeek (Nov 20 1989): p112 {B198} "Passing
the buck" The Economist (Jan 6 1990): p66 {B199} "What you need to
know about "Enhanced Benefits" BusinessWeek (Nov 20 1989): p122 {B200}
"Hospitals you may hate to leave" BusinessWeek (Oct 8 1990): p146
{B201} "Passing the buck" The Economist (Jan 6 1990): p66 {B202}
""I can think of more important things than being loved by everybody""
Forbes (Nov 27 1989): p102 {B203} "Eye hopes" The Economist (Jun 17
1989): p98
Bibliographic References for Chapter 7
{B204} "Has History Come to an End?" Time magazine (Sep 4 1989): p62
{B205} "Time to call history a day?" The Economist (Sep 16 1989): p48
{B206 "Are we at the end of history?" Fortune (Jan 15 1990): p75
{B207} Fuller, Buckminster. The Critical Path (New York St.
Martin's Press, 1981) {B208} "How Brazil subsidizes the destruction of
the Amazon" The Economist (Mar 18 1989): p9
HOW TO CONTRIBUTE:
Due to the
controversial nature of this book a publisher brave enough to print this
has not been found so it is being made available on the Internet. If the
information in this book has been valuable to you, please be honest and
make a contribution to the author by mailing a cheque or money order
payable to "Synergy Communications Press", ...to:
Synergy Communications Press Suite #312 718 - 333 Brooksbank
Ave. North Vancouver, B.C. Canada V7J3V8
The amount of the contribution is left to the reader's
discretion.
As individuals, we have little or no chance of
limiting the power of the elite. Collectively, we can do it! In
fact, every time you discuss the issues with anyone else, you will at last
be effectively lobbying for your interests. Once the average person
refuses to continue living out the role of pawn, chess as a lifestyle will
come to an end.
Unless we start demanding changes, the bottom 90% of us will continue
to be manipulated as pawns in a chess society.
Thank you for your contribution! ...David
[Introduction
and Overview] [Chapter
1] [Chapter
2] [Chapter
3] [Chapter
4] [Chapter
5] [Chapter
6] [Chapter
7] [Chapter
8] [Bibliography]
[Contributions]
|